5-011-867-16 (1)

GB

Solid-State Memory Camcorder

Operating Instructions

PXW-FX9V/PXW-FX9VK
PXW-FX9T/PXW-FX9TK
Software Version 4.0

© 2019 Sony Corporation

2

Table of Contents
1. Overview 5. Thumbnail Screen 8. Appendix
System Configuration........................................ 3 Thumbnail Screen............................................ 73 Usage Precautions..........................................128
Location and Function of Parts........................... 4 Playing Clips..................................................... 74 Output Formats and Limitations.....................130
Using the Touch Panel..................................... 10 Clip Operations................................................ 75 Troubleshooting.............................................132
Screen Display................................................... 11 Error/Warning Messages................................134
6. Menu Display and Settings
Items Saved in Files........................................136
2. Preparation Setup Menu Configuration and Hierarchy........ 76 Block Diagrams.............................................. 146
Power Supply....................................................18 Setup Menu Operations................................... 78 Updating E-mount Lens Software...................149
Attaching Devices............................................ 20 User Menu........................................................80 Licenses......................................................... 150
Configuring Basic Camcorder Operation.......... 27 Edit User Menu..................................................81 Specifications..................................................153
Using XQD Memory Cards................................ 29 Shooting Menu................................................ 82
Using a UTILITY SD/MS Card............................ 32 Project Menu.....................................................91
Paint Menu.......................................................99
3. Shooting
TC/Media Menu..............................................103
Basic Operation Procedure............................... 33 Monitoring Menu............................................105
Adjusting the Focus......................................... 35 Audio Menu................................................... 108
Adjusting the Brightness..................................41 Thumbnail Menu............................................110
Adjusting for Natural Colors Technical Menu............................................... 112
(White Balance).........................................44
Network Menu................................................ 116
Setting the Audio to Record............................. 45
Maintenance Menu......................................... 121
Useful Functions.............................................. 47
Saving and Loading Configuration Data.........122
Proxy Recording............................................... 56
Recording RAW Video...................................... 57 7. External Device Connection
Connecting a Remote Control Panel...............124
4. Network Functions
Connecting External Monitors and Recording
Connecting to Other Devices via LAN............... 58 Devices.....................................................125
Connecting to the Internet............................... 62 External Synchronization................................126
Uploading Files................................................64 Managing/Editing Clips using a Computer.....127
Using Network Client Mode.............................66
Using the C3 Portal App...................................68
Using Web Remote Control.............................. 69
3 1. Overview

System Configuration

SMAD-P3D XLR-K2M
SMAD-P5 URX-P03D
UWP-D21 Multi- XLR-K3M HVL-LBPC
Multi-Interface Shoe Wireless
UWP-D22 Interface Shoe XLR Adaptor Video Light
Adaptor Microphone
UWP-D26 Adaptor Kit
Receiver
Wireless
Microphone
Package S/N/M/H/G series MRW-E80, MRW-E90
(Receiver: XQD Memory Card XQD Card Reader
URX-P40)

LA-EA3
LA-EA4
A-mount Adaptor
BP-U35, BP-U70, BC-U1A, BC-U2A
BP-U100 Battery Charger
Battery Pack

LA-EB1
Mount Adaptor PXW-FX9V/PXW-FX9VK
PXW-FX9T/PXW-FX9TK

AC adaptor
(supplied)
E-mount lens
VCT-FS7
Shoulder Adaptor
ECM-VG1
ECM-MS2
Microphone

Grip remote control XDCA-FX9 URX-S03D

MCX-500 RM-30BP (supplied) Extension Unit UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner
Multi Camera Live Remote Control Unit DWR-S02DN
Producer
Digital Wireless Receiver

* A mount adaptor is required for lenses other than E-mount lenses.

4 1. Overview

Location and Function of Parts

between the camcorder and the subject For details about accessories supported by
Left Side, Front Side, and Handle accurately, use this hook as a reference point. the multi-interface shoe, contact your sales
You can attach the end of a tape measure to representative.
the hook to measure the distance from the
20 21 22 23 24 subject. Attaching the accessory shoe
12. Recording/tally lamp (front) (page 33)
Flashes when the remaining capacity on the 1 Lift the front edge of the shoe spring, and
recording media or battery is low. pull the spring in the opposite direction to
the arrow engraved on the spring.
13. Lens lock ring stopper (page 22)
14. Image sensor Shoe spring
1
15. Multi-function dial (page 47)
2 Press when viewing the image in the
viewfinder to display and operate the direct
3 menu.
11 Turn the dial when a menu is displayed in the 1
12 viewfinder to move the cursor up/down to
4 select menu items or settings. Press to apply Accessory shoe
5 13 the selected item.
14 When the menu is not being displayed, the
6 15 dial can also function as an assignable dial. 2 Position the accessory shoe on the
16 16. Lens signal contacts accessory shoe mount, aligning the
7 17 Connect an E-mount lens.
protrusions on the shoe with the
18 corresponding points on the mount, and
8 17. WB SET (white balance set) button tighten the four screws.
19
9 (page 44)
10 18. Lens lock pin (page 22) 3 Insert the shoe spring in the direction of
the arrow so that the U-shaped portion
19. Lens lock ring (page 22) fits onto the end of the accessory shoe.
20.GPS module antenna
The GPS antenna and peripheral circuits are Accessory shoe
1. Handle (page 5) 6. USB/multi connector (page 24)
built-in.
2. Wi-Fi antenna (page 58) 7. INPUT1 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch
(page 45) 21. Accessory shoe (page 4)
3. Air outlet 3 2
8. Shoulder pad (page 24) 22. Handle record START/STOP button
[Note] The record button cannot be operated when
Do not cover the air outlet. 9. INPUT2 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch the lock lever is in the lock position. Shoe spring
(page 45)
4. Viewfinder connector (page 20) 23. Handle zoom lever (page 112)
10. Grip attachment (page 23)
5. REMOTE connector 24. Multi-interface shoe
Connect to general-purpose LANC jack 11. Tape measure hook
accessory. The tape measure hook is on the same plane
as the image sensor. To measure the distance
5 1. Overview: Location and Function of Parts

Removing the accessory shoe Attaching the handle connector Top Side
Remove the shoe spring as described in step 1
protective cap (supplied)
in “Attaching the Accessory Shoe,” unscrew the When using the camcorder with the handle
four screws, and remove the accessory shoe. removed, protect the connector using the
supplied protective cap.
Removing the handle
Remove the four handle attachment screws,
and remove the handle from the camcorder. 1
2

Protecting the connector terminals 1. Extension screw holes (3/8 inch)

Compatible with 3/8-16 UNC screws (length of
Attach the cover to unused connectors to
10.0 mm or less).
protect the connector terminals.
2. Extension screw holes (1/4 inch)
Compatible with 1/4-20 UNC screws (length of
7.0 mm or less).
3. Handle connector
6 1. Overview: Location and Function of Parts

1. Built-in speaker (page 33) 19. ASSIGN (assignable) 9 button (page 47)
Right Side (Front/Top/Bottom)
2. VOLUME (monitor volume adjust) buttons 20.WHT BAL (white balance) function button
Adjusts the monitor volume and alarm (page 44)
volume.
21. WHT BAL (white balance memory select)
3. (N-Mark) switch (page 44)
ˎˎTouch a smartphone equipped with the
22. SHUTTER function button (page 42)
NFC function against the unit to establish a
wireless connection (page 58). 23. Air inlet
Some smartphones that support wireless [Note]
pay systems may not support NFC. For Do not cover the air inlet.
details, refer to the operation manual for the
smartphone. 24. POWER indicator (page 33)
ˎˎNFC (Near Field Communication) is an
international communications protocol for 25. POWER switch (page 33)
1 Right side (rear)
wireless communication between objects in
2 (page 7)
close proximity.
3
4 4. HOLD switch (page 112)
5 Disables operation of the unit (hold state).
5. Record START/STOP button/indicator
6
7 (page 33)
8
9 6. ND VARIABLE dial (page 42)
10
11 7. ND PRESET/VARIABLE switch (page 42)
12
13 8. ND FILTER POSITION up/down buttons
14
15 (page 42)
16
17 9. ND CLEAR indicator (page 42)
18
10. ND VARIABLE AUTO button (page 42)
19
11. STATUS button (page 14)
Displays the main settings of the unit. The
settings of some items can be changed.

20 22 23 24 25 12. FOCUS AUTO indicator (page 35)

21 13. FOCUS switch (page 35)
14. PUSH AUTO FOCUS button (page 38)
15. IRIS function button (page 41)
16. PUSH AUTO IRIS button (page 41)
17. ISO/GAIN function button (page 41)
18. ISO/GAIN (gain select) switch (page 41)
7 1. Overview: Location and Function of Parts

14. THUMBNAIL button (page 73)

Right Side (Rear)
15. DISPLAY (screen display) button
(page 11)

1 2

SLOT SELECT

7 8
S&Q
3
CH-1 CH-3
4
1 EXT INT AUTO 5
6
MI SHOE MAN 7
2 CH-2 CH-4
8
EXT INT AUTO 9
MI SHOE MAN
10
3 AUDIO LEVEL

THUMBNAIL
DISPLAY
CANCEL/
MENU BACK

15 14 13 12 11

1. ASSIGN (assignable) 1 to 3, 7 to 8 buttons 7. CH2 INPUT select switch (page 45)

(page 47)
8. CH2 (AUTO/MAN) switch (page 45)
2. SLOT SELECT (XQD memory card select)
9. AUDIO LEVEL (CH2) dial (page 45)
button (page 33)
10. AUDIO LEVEL (CH4) dial (page 45)
3. CH1 INPUT select switch (page 45)
11. CANCEL/BACK button (page 74)
4. CH1 (AUTO/MAN) switch (page 45)
12. Arrows (///) and SET button
5. AUDIO LEVEL (CH1) dial (page 45)
(page 74)
6. AUDIO LEVEL (CH3) dial (page 45)
13. MENU button (page 76)
8 1. Overview: Location and Function of Parts

17. INPUT1 (audio input 1) connector

Card Slot, Rear Side, and Terminals (page 45) Viewfinder
18. INPUT2 (audio input 2) connector
(page 45) For details about attaching the viewfinder
(supplied), see page 20.
19. SDI OUT 2 connector (page 125)
20.IN/OUT select switch (page 126)
1 1
21. TC IN/TC OUT (timecode input/output)
2 connector (page 126) 2
6 22. GENLOCK IN (genlock input)/REF OUT 3
(sync signal output) connector
3 7 (page 126)

4 15 23. HDMI OUT connector (page 125) 4 5 6

8
9 16 1. PEAKING button
10 17 2. ZEBRA button
5 11 18 Bottom Side 3. ASSIGN (assignable) 10 button (page 47)
12 19 4. MIRROR switch
13 5. Eyepiece attachment hooks

14 6. Touch panel
Touch operations can be disabled using
23 21 an assignable button or using the menu
(page 10).
22 20

1. XQD card slot A (page 29) 10. Recording/tally lamp (rear) (page 33) Eyepiece
2. XQD (A) access indicator (page 30) 11. BATT RELEASE button (page 18)
1
3. XQD card slot B (page 30) 12. Battery (page 18) For details about attaching the eyepiece
1. Tripod screw holes (1/4 inch, 3/8 inch) (supplied), see page 22.
4. XQD (B) access indicator (page 30) 13. Battery pack attachment (page 18)
Attach to a tripod (option, screw length of 1 2
5. Headphone jack (page 33) 14. Air inlet 5.5 mm or less) that supports 1/4-20 UNC or
3/8-16 UNC screws.
6. SD card access indicator (page 32) [Note]
Do not cover the air inlet.
7. UTILITY SD/MS card slot (page 32)
15. Internal microphone (page 45)
8. Extension unit connector (internal) Narration microphone for recording ambient
(page 25) sound.
1. Diopter adjustment knob
9. DC IN connector (page 19) 16. SDI OUT 1 connector (page 125)
2. Eyecup
9 1. Overview: Location and Function of Parts

Grip Remote Control XDCA-FX9 Extension Unit (Option) Rear

For details about attaching the grip remote For details about attaching an XDCA-FX9
1
control (supplied), see page 23. Extension Unit (option), see page 25.

Front
1
2 2
1
3

4 2 3
3
4
5
6
5
6
7 78 9
8
1. USB connectors (type A)
2. Battery release lever
1. Wireless receiver insertion slot
Attach a portable wireless tuner when using a 3. Battery attachment terminal
wireless microphone. 4. TC OUT connector (BNC type)
2. DC OUT connector (4-pin round type) 5. REF OUT connector (BNC type)
1. Zoom lever 12 V DC power output connector.
6. DC IN connector (XLR type, 4-pin)
2. ASSIGN (assignable) 4 button 3. LIGHT connector (2-pin)
12 V DC power output connector. 7. Recording/tally lamp (rear) (page 33)
3. Assignable dial
8. RAW OUT connector (BNC type)
4. ASSIGN (assignable) 6 button
9. LAN connector
5. Grip rotation lever
6. Record START/STOP button
7. Multi selector (8-way D-pad and SET
button)
8. ASSIGN (assignable) 5 button
10 1. Overview

Using the Touch Panel

Drag
Touch Panel Usage Precautions Touch the screen and slide your finger to
Configuring the Touch Panel
the desired position of the screen, and then
The viewfinder of the unit is a touch panel, remove your finger. Touch panel operation can be enabled/
which you operate directly by touch using disabled using Touch Operation (page 79)
your finger. in the Technical menu.
ˎˎThe touch panel is designed to be touched
lightly with your finger. Do not press the
panel with force or touch it using sharp-
edged or pointed objects (nail, ballpoint
pen, pin, etc.).
ˎˎThe touch panel may not respond when
touched in the following circumstances. Also
note that these may cause a malfunction.
ˎˎOperation using the tips of finger nails
ˎˎOperation while other objects are Flick/swipe
touching the surface Touch the screen and quickly flick/swipe your
ˎˎOperation with a protective sheet or finger up, down, left, or right.
sticker attached
ˎˎOperation with water droplets or
condensation on the display
ˎˎOperation using wet or sweaty fingers
ˎˎOperation in water

Touch Panel Gestures

Tap
[Tip]
Lightly touch an item, such as an icon, using If the display content continues beyond the edges of the
your finger and then immediately remove your screen, you can drag or flick the display content to scroll.
finger.
11 1. Overview

Screen Display
During shooting (recording/standby) and playback, the camcorder status and settings are 10. UWP-D series status indicator 17. GPS status indicator (page 54)
superimposed on the image displayed in the viewfinder. (page 14) Displays the GPS status.
You can show/hide the information using the DISPLAY button. Displays the RF level signal strength as an icon
18. Image stabilization mode indicator
You can also select to show/hide each item independently (page 105). when a UWP-D series device is connected
to an MI shoe configured for digital audio 19. SDI output/HDMI output Rec Control
transfer. status indicator (page 125)
Displays the output status of the REC control
11. Slow & Quick Motion shooting frame rate
Information Displayed on the Screen While Shooting indicator (page 48)
signal.
20.Focus indicator (page 35)
12. Remaining battery capacity/DC IN voltage
43 1 23 45 6 7 9 11 12 indicator (page 18) 21. Remaining media capacity indicator
13. Focus mode indicator (page 39) 22. White balance mode indicator
13 42 Meaning Display
16 14 15 8 41 Display Meaning
17 40 Focus Hold mode Focus Hold Auto mode
18 10 39 MF mode MF
19 38 Hold Auto mode paused
37 AF mode AF
20 36 Realtime tracking AF mode
W:P Preset mode
35 W:A Memory A mode
21 Face/eye detection AF (AF/ /Only/ / ) W:B Memory B mode
34
22 Face/eye detection icon

Face/eye detection AF icon Only 23. Timecode external lock indicator/time

data display (page 33)
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Saved tracking face icon
Displays “EXT-LK” when locked to the
AF paused icon during timecode of an external device.
1. Network status indicator (page 13) 6. Recording mode, slot A/B, Interval Rec
face/eye detection AF1)
Displays the network connection status as an recording interval indicator (page 49) 24. ND filter indicator (page 42)
icon. 1) Displayed when there is no saved tracking face and a
Display Meaning 25. Scene file indicator (page 122)
face is not detected, or when there is a saved tracking
2. Upload indicator/remaining files indicator Rec Recording face but the tracking target face is not detected.
(page 64) 26. Iris indicator
Stby Recording standby
14. Focus position indicator Displays the iris position (F value or T value)
3. Network client mode status indicator Displays the focus position. if a lens that supports iris setting display is
(page 14) 7. Depth-of-field indicator attached.
Displays the connection status in network 15. Focus marker indicator (page 35)
8. Imager scan mode indicator (page 27) Displays the difference from the focus 27. Video level warning indicator
client mode.
A mark is displayed if there is a mismatch reference position in the range –99999 to
4. Streaming status indicator between the image circle size of the lens and
28.Gain indicator (page 41)
+99999. Displayed as an EI value when Base Setting
the effective picture size imager scan mode
5. Focus area indicator (page 36) 16. Zoom position indicator >Shooting Mode (page 91) in the Project
setting.
Displays the focus area for auto focus. Displays the zoom position in the range 0 menu is set to Cine EI.
9. RAW output operation status indicator (wide angle) to 99 (telephoto) (if a lens that Display Meaning
(page 57) supports zoom setting display is attached).
Displays the output status of the RAW signal. Auto mode
The display can be changed to a bar indicator
or focus distance indicator (page 113). H Preset H mode
M Preset M mode
12 1. Overview: Screen Display

Display Meaning 36. Base Sensitivity indicator/Base ISO 42.Recording format (picture size) indicator
indicator (page 41) (page 91)
L Preset L mode
When Base Setting >Shooting Mode Displays the picture size for recording on XQD
Temporary adjustment mode
(page 91) in the Project menu is set to memory cards.
SDR or HDR, it displays the base sensitivity
43. Realtime tracking AF stop button
29. Clip name display (page 73) set using ISO/Gain/EI >Base Sensitivity in the
(page 40)
Shooting menu.
30.Shutter indicator (page 42) When Base Setting >Shooting Mode
31. AE mode/AE level indicator (page 41) (page 91) in the Project menu is set to Cine
EI, it displays the base ISO sensitivity set using
32. Spirit level indicator ISO/Gain/EI >Base ISO in the Shooting menu.
Displays the horizontal level in ±1° increments
up to ±15°. 37. Gamma display assist/monitor LUT
indicator
33. Audio level meter Displays the gamma display assist status. The
Displays the audio level of CH1 and CH2 or CH3 gamma display assist function can be turned
and CH4. on/off by assigning Gamma Display Assist to
The following is displayed depending on an assignable button (page 47).
the Audio Output > Monitor CH (page 109) Displays the monitor LUT (page 89)
setting in the Audio menu. setting when Base Setting >Shooting Mode
Monitor CH setting Display channel (page 91) in the Project menu is set to Cine
EI.
CH1/CH2 CH1/CH2
CH3/CH4 CH3/CH4 38.Gamma indicator (page 99)
MIX ALL CH1/CH2 Displays the gamma setting of the picture
CH1 CH1/CH2 recorded on XQD memory cards.
CH2 CH1/CH2 39. Proxy status indicator
CH3 CH3/CH4 Display Meaning
CH4 CH3/CH4 Proxy recording On

The audio level can be monitored on the Proxy recording

status screen. Proxy recording not ready

34.Video signal monitor (page 52) (flashing)

Displays a waveform, vectorscope, and Proxy chunk recording On
histogram. Proxy chunk recording
The monitor LUT type of the signal being
monitored is displayed when Base Setting Proxy chunk recording not
>Shooting Mode (page 91) in the Project (flashing) ready
menu is set to Cine EI.
35. Recording format (codec) indicator 40.4K & HD (Sub) recording indicator
(page 91)
41. Recording format (frame rate and scan
Displays the name of the format for recording
method) indicator
on XQD memory cards.
13 1. Overview: Screen Display

Information Displayed on the Screen During Playback Icon Display

The following information is superimposed on the playback picture.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Network connection icon display

Network mode Connection status Icon

Access point mode Operating as an access point

Access point operation error

Station mode Wi-Fi connection

Icon changes according to the signal
strength (4 steps)
Wi-Fi disconnected (including when
establishing connection)
Wi-Fi connection error

Modem/smartphone 1)
Icon changes according to the 3G/4G 3G connection
connection signal strength (5 steps)
–
11 12 13 14 15 16 Icon for signal strength 3 is displayed
for modems that do not report signal 4G connection
1. Network status indicator 14. Gamma display assist indicator strength. –
2. Upload indicator/remaining files indicator 15. Audio level meter Network connection where
Displays the recording audio level. 3G/4G cannot be
3. Clip number/total number of clips distinguished
16. Gamma indicator
4. Playback status indicator –

5. Playback format (frame rate and scan 3G/4G disconnected (including when
establishing connection)
method) indicator
3G/4G connection error
6. Network client mode status indicator
Signal strength unknown (strength not
7. Streaming status indicator reported by connected modem/
smartphone or other device)
8. Playback format (picture size) indicator
9. Remaining battery capacity/DC IN voltage 1) Two modems can be connected when an XDCA-FX9
(option) is attached to the camcorder. When two
indicator modems are connected, the icons change according
to the modem status as follows.
10. Playback format (codec) indicator
Connection status Icon
11. Media indicator
A icon appears if the memory card is write- Two modems connected, only modem 1 in use
protected. Two modems connected, only modem 2 in use
12. Time data display Two modems connected, both in use
13. Clip name display
14 1. Overview: Screen Display

Network client mode icon display Status Screen

Network client mode connection status Icon
You can check the settings and status of the camcorder on the status screen. The settings of
Network client mode connected status
items marked with an asterisk (*) can be changed.
The status screen supports touch operation.
Network client mode connection standby status

Network client mode connection error status To display the status screen
ˎˎPress the STATUS button.
[Tip]
You can show/hide each status screen using Status Page On/Off (page 113) in the Technical menu.
UWP-D series icon display
To switch the status screen
Transmitter status Receive status Icon ˎˎTurn the multi-function dial.
Power off Not receiving ˎˎPress the / arrow buttons.
ˎˎSwipe the status screen up/down.
Normal transmit status Receiving
–
(receive level (4 steps)) To hide the status screen
Muting status Receiving (muted) ˎˎPress the STATUS button.

Remaining battery capacity warning Receiving

(Icon flashing) To change a setting
status
Muting and remaining battery capacity Receiving With the status screen displayed, press the multi-function dial or multi selector to enable
(Icon flashing) selection of a setup item within a page. Select a page number and then press to switch pages.
warning status
You can also select items directly using touch operation.
[Tip]
You can disable changes from the status screen by setting Menu Settings >User Menu Only (page 112) in the
Technical menu to On.
15 1. Overview: Screen Display

Main Status screen Camera Status screen Display item Description Project status screen
CH2 Level Control Auto adjustment On/Off
Displays the main functions of the camera and Displays the status of various presets of the status Displays the basic settings related to the
the free space on the media. camera. shooting project.
Level Meter Audio level meter
Display item Description Display item Description Source* Input source Display item Description
S&Q Frame Rate* Slow & Quick Motion White Switch<B> White balance memory B Reference* Input reference level Frequency/Scan* System frequency and
shooting and frame rate setting Wind Filter* Microphone wind noise scanning method settings
settings White Switch<A> White balance memory A reduction filter setting Codec* Codec setting for recording
Frequency/Scan* System frequency and setting CH3 Level Control* Auto adjustment On/Off Rec Function* Special recording function
scanning method settings White Switch<P> Preset White setting status On/Off setting and main
Imager Scan* Scan mode of the image ND<Preset> ND filter Preset1 to 3 settings Level Meter Audio level meter settings
sensor ISO / Gain <L>*
1)
ISO/Gain 1) <L> setting Simul Rec* 2-slot simultaneous
Source* Input source
Media Remain Remaining free space on recording function On/Off
ISO / Gain <M>*
1)
ISO/Gain <M> setting
1)
Reference* Input reference level
(A) media in slot A status and setting
ISO / Gain 1) <H>* ISO/Gain 1) <H> setting Wind Filter* Microphone wind noise
ND Filter ND filter setting Title Prefix 1) / Title portion of the clip
Base ISO/ Base ISO/Base Sensitivity reduction filter setting
ISO/Gain/EI ISO/Gain/Exposure Index Reel 2) name/Camera ID and Reel
Sensitivity* setting CH4 Level Control* Auto adjustment On/Off
setting Number settings
Zebra1* Zebra1 On/Off setting and status
Base ISO/ Base ISO/Base Sensitivity Imager Scan* Scan mode of the image
level Level Meter Audio level meter
Sensitivity* setting sensor
Zebra2* Zebra2 On/Off setting and Source* Input source
Codec* Codec for recording and Video Format* Picture size for recording to
level Reference* Input reference level
RAW output enable/disable XQD memory cards
VF Gamma/ Gamma category and curve Wind Filter* Microphone wind noise
setting Picture Cache Picture cache recording
Gamma reduction filter setting
Media Remain (B) Remaining free space on Rec* function On/Off status and
Scene File* Scene file in use and its File Audio Input Level* Master audio input level setting
media in slot B
ID setting setting
Scene File* Scene file in use and its File Number 1) / Shot 2) Numeric suffix of the clip
ID setting 1) Exposure Index when Shooting Mode is set to Cine EI. HDMI Output CH* HDMI output audio name/Shot Number value
Monitor LUT* Monitor LUT setting channel setting Shooting Mode* Shooting mode setting
Shutter Shutter speed or shutter Audio Status screen Headphone Out* Headphone output type RAW Output Image size of the RAW
angle setting setting Format* output
Displays the input setting, audio level meter, Monitor CH* Monitor channel setting 4K & HD (Sub) 4K & HD (Sub) recording
Iris Iris setting
and volume monitor setting for each channel. Rec* function On/Off status
Video Format* Picture size for recording to
XQD memory cards Display item Description [Note] Proxy Rec* Proxy recording function
The Source settings for CH1 and CH2 are selected using On/Off status and setting
RAW Output Image size of the RAW CH1 Level Control Auto adjustment On/Off the CH1 INPUT select switch (page 7) and CH2
Format* output status INPUT select switch (page 7) on the right side of the
Genlock Genlock state
White Balance White balance setting Level Meter Audio level meter unit. You can set Source for CH1 and CH2 when using a
1) When Auto Naming is set to Plan
portable wireless tuner (page 25). You can also set
Source* Input source 2) When Auto Naming is set to Cam ID+Reel#
Source for CH2 when the CH2 INPUT select switch is set
Reference* Input reference level to EXT.
Wind Filter* Microphone wind noise
reduction filter setting
16 1. Overview: Screen Display

Monitoring Status screen Assignable Button Status screen Display item Description Display item Description
Capacity Remaining capacity (Ah) Media B Displays an estimate of the
Displays the SDI, HDMI, and video output Displays the functions assigned to each of the remaining remaining recording time of
Voltage Voltage (V)
settings. assignable buttons. recording time the recording media
Manufacture Date of battery manufacture
Display item Description Display item Description inserted in slot B in units of
Date
minutes under the current
SDI1 Signal* Output picture size 1 Function assigned to the Video Light Displays the remaining
recording conditions.
Info. Disp* Output display On/Off ASSIGN 1 button Remaining capacity of the video light
SD card Displays the media icon
setting 2 Function assigned to the battery.
information when media is inserted in
Color Color space setting/ ASSIGN 2 button Power Source Power supply source
the UTILITY SD/MS card slot.
Gamut* Monitor LUT status 3 Function assigned to the Supplied Voltage Supplied power source
SD card Displays the lock icon when
SDI2 Signal* Output picture size ASSIGN 3 button voltage
protection the media inserted in the
Info. Disp* Output display On/Off 4 Function assigned to the
UTILITY SD/MS card slot is
setting ASSIGN 4 button
protected (locked).
Color Color space setting/ 5 Function assigned to the Media Status screen SD card Displays the remaining
Gamut* Monitor LUT status ASSIGN 5 button
Displays the remaining capacity and remaining remaining capacity of media inserted in
HDMI Signal* Output picture size 6 Function assigned to the capacity meter the UTILITY SD/MS card slot
recording time of recording media.
ASSIGN 6 button expressed as a percentage
Info. Disp* Output display On/Off
7 Function assigned to the Display item Description on a bar graph.
setting
ASSIGN 7 button Media A Displays the media icon SD card Displays an estimate of the
Color Color space setting/
8 Function assigned to the information when recording media is remaining remaining recording time of
Gamut* Monitor LUT status
ASSIGN 8 button inserted in slot A. capacity the recording media inserted
Stream Signal Output picture size
9 Function assigned to the Media A Displays the remaining in the UTILITY SD/MS card
Info. Disp Output display (Off remaining capacity of recording media slot in units of minutes, or
ASSIGN 9 button
(fixed)) capacity meter inserted in slot A expressed displays the remaining
10 Function assigned to the
Color Color space setting/ as a percentage on a bar capacity in units of GBs.
ASSIGN 10 button
Gamut* Monitor LUT status graph.
Focus Hold Function assigned to the
RAW Image size of the RAW Media A Displays an estimate of the
Button Focus Hold button of the
output
lens remaining remaining recording time of GPS Status screen
Monitor LUT* Monitor LUT setting recording time the recording media
Multi Function Function assigned to the Displays the GPS positioning status and
VF* Gamma display assist inserted in slot A in units of
Dial multi-function dial information.
setting/Monitor LUT minutes under the current
Assignable Dial Function assigned to the recording conditions.
status/Color space Display item Description
assignable dial
setting Media B Displays the media icon GPS GPS signal and positioning
information when recording media is status
inserted in slot B.
[Note] Battery Status screen Dilution Of Positioning accuracy
The monitor LUT setting is linked to all output systems, Media B Displays the remaining Precision information
including the viewfinder. Only the gamma display assist remaining capacity of recording media
setting is available for the viewfinder display.
Displays information about the battery and DC Latitude Latitude information
IN source. capacity meter inserted in slot B expressed
as a percentage on a bar Longitude Longitude information
Display item Description graph. Altitude Altitude information
Detected Battery Type of battery Positioning date Positioning date and time
Remaining Remaining capacity (%) and time
Charge Count Number of recharges
17 1. Overview: Screen Display

Display item Description File Transfer Status screen Using Touch-enabled Settings Screens
Current date and Current date and time
time Displays file transfer information.
Time Zone Time Zone setting Display item Description Screen layout
Auto Upload Auto Upload function On/ Item Item name Set button
Off status
Network Status screen Auto Upload Auto Upload (Proxy) function
(Proxy) On/Off/Chunk status
Displays the network connection status.
Total Transfer Transfer progress of all jobs
Display item Description Progress Mark indicating
Wireless LAN Wireless network settings Default Upload Name of Auto Upload/Auto current setting
and connection status Server Upload (Proxy) destination
Wired LAN Wired LAN network settings server
and connection status Job Status Remaining number of jobs
Modem 1 Wireless network settings (Remain / Total) and total number of jobs
and connection status of Current File Transfer progress of current
modem (option) Transfer Progress file transfer Setting selection cursor Selection options
Modem 2 Wireless network settings Current Name of file currently being
(orange frame)
and connection status of Transferring File transferred
modem (option) Name Operation
Server Address Address of file transfer
destination server 1 Tap a setup item. 2 Tap a value directly or drag/flick to move
NCM/Streaming Status screen Destination Destination directory of file the desired value to the cursor position.
Directory transfer destination server
Displays the connection status in network
client mode and the streaming status.
Display item Description
Network Client Network client mode status
Mode Status
CCM Name Name of CCM connected in
network client mode Tap
Flick
CCM Address Address of CCM connected The selection options for the value

QoS Streaming1
in network client mode
Streaming bit rate 1
appear. 3 Tap the Set button or the value selection
cursor.
Bit Rate
The value is applied and the display
QoS Streaming2 Streaming bit rate 2 returns to the previous screen.
Bit Rate
[Tips]
Streaming Status Streaming status
ˎˎ You can also press the  arrow button to apply the
Streaming Type Currently selected streaming value.
type ˎˎ Press the CANCEL/BACK button to return to the
previous value.
ˎˎ You can also use the multi-function dial or multi
selector.
ˎˎ Touch operations can also be disabled (page 10).
18 2. Preparation

Power Supply
You can use a battery pack or AC power ˎˎ When using an AC-DN10A adaptor and peripheral
devices are attached to the camcorder, make sure
When using an extension unit
supply from an AC adaptor.
that the total power consumption of the peripheral
For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and devices is less than 25 W. When using the XDCA-FX9 Extension Unit,
AC adaptors listed below. the battery voltage or the remaining battery
BATT RELEASE capacity is displayed, depending on the
button battery used.
Lithium-ion battery packs
BP-U35 (supplied) Using a Battery Pack [Note]
BP-U70 The camcorder battery pack cannot be attached when
BP-U100 an XDCA-FX9 unit is attached to the camcorder. You
To attach a battery pack, plug the battery pack must attach a battery pack to the XDCA-FX9 or connect
an external power supply.
Battery chargers into the attachment (page 8) as far as it
BC-U1A (supplied) will go, and then slide it down to lock it into
position. If the battery pack charge becomes low
BC-U2A
If the remaining battery charge falls below a
AC adaptor (supplied) certain level during operation (Low Battery
[Notes] state), a low-battery message appears, the
A V-shoe battery can be used when an XDCA- ˎˎ Before attaching a battery pack, charge the battery recording/tally lamp starts flashing, and a
using the dedicated BC-U1A or BC-U2A battery
FX9 Extension Unit is attached. charger.
beep sound will warn you.
For safety, use only the Sony battery packs and ˎˎ Charging a battery pack while it is warm (for example, If the remaining battery charge falls below
AC adaptors listed below. immediately after use) may not fully recharge the the level at which operation cannot continue
battery. (Battery Empty state), a battery-empty
Lithium-ion battery packs message appears.
BP-GL95B Checking the remaining capacity Replace with a charged battery pack.

When shooting/playing using a battery pack,

AC adaptor Changing the warning voltage levels
the remaining battery capacity is displayed in
AC-DN10A the viewfinder (page 11). The Low Battery level is set to 10% of full
[CAUTION] Icon Meaning battery charge and the Battery Empty level is
Do not store battery packs in locations To remove a battery pack, press and hold the set to 3% by factory default. You can change
91% to 100%
exposed to direct sunlight, flame, or high BATT RELEASE button (page 8), slide the the warning level settings using Camera
temperature. 71% to 90% Battery Alarm (page 114) in the Technical
battery pack up and then pull it out of the
[Notes] attachment. 51% to 70% menu.
ˎˎ When operating from an AC power source, use the
supplied AC adaptor. 31% to 50%
ˎˎ Always set the POWER switch to the Off position
before connecting a battery or AC adaptor. If it is 11% to 30%
connected with the POWER switch in the On position,
0% to 10%
the camcorder may be unable to start in some cases.
If the camcorder cannot be started, set the POWER
switch to the Off position and disconnect the battery The camcorder indicates the remaining
pack or AC adaptor temporarily, then wait about capacity by calculating the available time with
30 seconds before attempting to connect again. (If
the battery pack if operation is continued at
the AC adaptor is connected while the camcorder is
operating from the battery pack, it can be connected the current rate of power consumption.
with the POWER switch in the On position without
problem.)
19 2. Preparation: Power Supply

[Tip]
Using AC Power If an AC power source is used while the battery is
attached, the camcorder will automatically switch to
battery power if the output voltage of the AC adaptor
Connecting the camcorder to an AC power drops.
source allows use without worrying about the
need to recharge the battery pack. Changing the warning levels
DC IN connector
The DC Low Voltage1 level is set to 16.5 V and
the DC Low Voltage2 level is set to 15.5 V by
factory default. You can change the warning
level settings using Camera DC IN Alarm
(page 114) in the Technical menu.

AC adaptor
ˎˎDo not connect and use an AC adaptor in a
confined space, such as between a wall and
furniture.
AC adaptor ˎˎConnect the AC adaptor to the nearest AC
power source. If a problem occurs during
operation, immediately disconnect the
power cord from the AC power source.
Power cord
ˎˎDo not short-circuit the metal parts of the
Connect the AC adaptor to the DC IN plug of the AC adaptor. Doing so will cause
connector on the camcorder, and connect the a malfunction.
power cord (supplied) to an AC power source. ˎˎThe battery cannot be charged while
attached to the camcorder, even if the AC
If the output voltage from the AC adaptor is connected.

adaptor becomes low

If the output voltage from the AC adaptor falls
below a certain level during operation (DC Low
Voltage1 state), a message appears informing
you that the AC adaptor output voltage has
dropped, the recording/tally lamp starts
flashing, and a beep sound is emitted.
If the output voltage from the AC adaptor falls
below the level at which operation cannot
continue (DC Low Voltage2 state), a message
appears informing you that the AC adaptor
output voltage is too low.
If this occurs, the AC adaptor may be faulty.
Check the AC adaptor, as required.
20 2. Preparation

Attaching Devices
Clamp Lever Operation Adjusting the Microphone Holder Replacing the Microphone Rod Attaching the Viewfinder
Position
Operate the clamp levers when attaching/ [Notes] [Note]
removing or adjusting the position of the ˎˎ The microphone rod is attached when shipped from Attach/remove the viewfinder while the camcorder
microphone and viewfinder. Loosen the clamp lever, and turn the the factory. is turned off. If the viewfinder is removed while the
When attaching, turn the clamp lever microphone holder to move it forward/ ˎˎ Attach/remove the microphone rod while the camcorder is turned on, the camcorder will restart
clockwise to secure the rod. backward to adjust the position. camcorder is turned off. automatically.
ˎˎ Attach/remove the microphone rod with the body
When removing or adjusting the position, turn cap attached so as not to damage the image sensor.
the clamp lever counterclockwise to loosen
1 Loosen the screw.
1 Loosen the viewfinder clamp lever, and
the clamp lever. insert the viewfinder onto the microphone
If a clamp lever is in a position that makes it rod.
difficult to turn, pull the clamp lever off and Clamp lever
rotate it to an angle that will make operation
easier. Then place the clamp lever back on.

Clamp lever

Microphone holder and microphone

orientation
Attach so that the microphone holder and [Note]
When attaching the viewfinder, attach the rod
microphone are oriented as shown in the
clamp to the microphone rod so that the parts are
following diagram. positioned as shown in the following diagram.
Clamp lever
–– Clamp lock lever positioned between the
viewfinder rod and the handle
2 Withdraw the microphone rod.
–– Viewfinder rod positioned above the microphone
rod
Handle

Clamp lock
lever

Viewfinder
rod

Microphone
rod

3 Attach the microphone rod in the reverse

sequence. Rod clamp
21 2. Preparation: Attaching Devices

2 Adjust the left/right positioning of the

spacer with the groove in the clamp, and
insert the spacer.
viewfinder, tighten the clamp lever,
connect the viewfinder cable to the
viewfinder connector of the camcorder,
and secure the viewfinder cable in the
cable clamper.

You can adjust the angle so that the

viewfinder is facing the subject. Setting the If the viewfinder is turned 180° as shown in the
Cable clamper MIRROR switch to the B/T position flips the following diagram, set the MIRROR switch to Protrusion
left and rights sides of the image on the the ROT position to flip the image display and Groove
LCD screen, but the image is recorded in the text display horizontally and vertically.
[Notes] correct orientation.
ˎˎ Attach the viewfinder so that the viewfinder rod
is positioned above the clamp lock lever of the
viewfinder clamp.
Adjusting the viewfinder position Groove
Viewfinder rod Viewfinder
Protrusion
90° angle adjustment
If a square-shaped clamp spacer is attached
to the rod connection joint, you can adjust the [Note]
position of the viewfinder in 90° increments. Always attach a washer. If a washer is not attached, the
clamping force on the rod may be insufficient and may
Temporarily remove the viewfinder to adjust cause the viewfinder to fall off.
the angle, then reattach the viewfinder.
You can determine the shape of the spacer as
shown in the following diagrams.
Clamp lock Viewfinder clamp
lever
Square-shaped clamp spacer
ˎˎ Check that the viewfinder is securely attached.
The viewfinder may fall off during shooting if the [Note]
When attaching a circular-shaped clamp spacer, attach Square mark
clamp lever is loose.
to a commercial ø15 mm rod.

Adjusting the viewfinder orientation [Tip]

A circular-shaped clamp spacer is attached by factory
default.
Tilt the viewfinder up/down to adjust the
angle of the viewfinder.
Changing the clamp spacer
Arbitrary angle adjustment
If a circular-shaped clamp spacer is attached Remove the clamp spacer as shown in the
to the rod connection joint, you can turn the following diagram, align the protrusion on
viewfinder on the rod to adjust the position of the square-shaped spacer or circular-shaped
the viewfinder.
22 2. Preparation: Attaching Devices

Circular-shaped clamp spacer Removing the rear part of the eyepiece Removing the eyepiece
Circle mark With the eyepiece opened upwards, release Unclip the eyepiece lock, and remove the
the eyepiece lock in the direction of the arrow eyepiece from the viewfinder.
(), and slide the rear part of the eyepiece out
in the direction of the arrow (). When the
rear part of the eyepiece is removed, the front
of the eyepiece can be used instead of a hood. Attaching a Lens
Removing the viewfinder
[CAUTION]
Lock Do not leave the lens facing the sun. Direct sunlight can
Loosen the viewfinder clamp lever, and
plate enter through the lens, be focused in the camcorder, and
use the reverse procedure of attaching the
may cause a fire.
viewfinder.
Opening the eyepiece [Notes]
ˎˎ Attach/remove a lens while the camcorder is turned
Press the button indicated by the arrow. off.
ˎˎ A lens is a precision component. Do not place the lens
Attaching the Eyepiece on a surface with the lens mount face down. Attach
the supplied lens mount cap.

[Tip]
[Note] For details about lenses supported by the camcorder,
Attach/remove the eyepiece while the camcorder is contact your Sony service representative.
turned off.
Attaching the rear part of the eyepiece
When attaching the rear part of the eyepiece, Attaching an E-mount lens
1 Attach the hook on the top of the align the projection of the hinge with the
eyepiece to the hook on the top of the guide groove, and push it in the direction of 1 Remove the cover from the lens.
viewfinder, and attach the metal clip on the arrow in the following diagram until it
the bottom of the eyepiece to the hook Open the eyepiece upwards when the lock locks.
on the bottom of the viewfinder. disengages. The viewfinder is directly visible
when the eyepiece is opened.

2 Release the lens lock ring stopper, turn

the lens lock ring clockwise, and remove
Attachment hooks the body cap from the camcorder.

2 Push the lock plate on the bottom of the

eyepiece in the direction of the arrow to
lock the eyepiece into position.
Guide groove Protrusion
23 2. Preparation: Attaching Devices

Lens lock Removing a lens Attaching to a tripod Attaching the Grip Remote Control
ring stopper
Lens lock
ring Remove a lens using the following procedure. Use the tripod screw holes on the camcorder
1 Release the lens lock ring stopper, and
when attaching to a tripod. Using the tripod
mount on the lens may cause damage.
[Note]
turn the lens lock ring clockwise while Attach/remove the grip remote control while the
camcorder is turned off.
firmly supporting the lens.
Anamorphic lenses 1 Attach the arm to the grip attachment,
2 Pull the lens out in the forward direction. For details about the procedure for de- and tighten the screw.
[Notes] squeeze display in the viewfinder of the unit,
ˎˎ When removing a lens, align the mount mark on the see page 53.
3 Align the lens mount mark (white) with lens lock ring with the mount mark on the camcorder.
ˎˎ Grasp the lens securely in your hand to prevent the
the camcorder, carefully insert the lens, lens from falling.
and slowly turn the lens lock ring ˎˎ If another lens will not be attached immediately,
counterclockwise to secure the lens. always attach the body cap.

Iris adjustments for lenses with Auto Iris

switch
ˎˎWhen the lens Auto Iris is set to AUTO, the
iris is adjusted automatically and can also be
adjusted manually from the camcorder.
ˎˎWhen the lens Auto Iris is set to MANUAL,
the iris can only be adjusted using the lens
ring. Iris operation from the camcorder has
no effect.
Mount marks (white)

[Notes] Focus adjustments for lenses with focus

ˎˎ If the lens lock ring stopper does not return to the
lock position when the lens is attached, move the
switch
stopper to the lock position manually.
ˎˎ When attaching a lens, align the mount mark (white) ˎˎWhen the lens focus switch is set to AF/MF
on the lens lock ring with the mount mark (white) on or AF, the focus is adjusted automatically
the camcorder. and can also be adjusted manually from a
remote control unit.
Attaching an A-mount lens ˎˎWhen the lens focus switch is set to MF, the
focus is adjusted using the lens ring and can
To use an A-mount lens, attach a lens mount also be adjusted manually from a remote
adaptor (option) and then attach the A-mount control unit.
lens.
[Note]
[Note] When using an A-mount lens, manual adjustment
When using an A-mount lens, the iris is set manually from a remote control unit may not be available.
and focus is set to MF.
ˎˎWhen the lens focus switch is set to Full
MF, the focus can only be adjusted using
the lens ring. Focus operation from the
camcorder has no effect.
24 2. Preparation: Attaching Devices

2 Connect the grip remote control cable to ˎˎLoosen the arm extension screw, adjust the
length of the arm (2), and then tighten the
[Note]
After extending the arm, securely tighten the screw. Adjusting the Position of the
the USB/multi connector on the
screw. Shoulder Pad
camcorder, and secure the cable in the
cable clamper. ˎˎPress the grip rotation lever (page 9) to 3 Connect the grip remote control cable to
adjust the angle of the grip remote control (3). the USB/multi connector on the
camcorder. You can slide the shoulder pad forward or
backward. Adjust the position of the shoulder
Clamper 4 Align the protrusion on the arm with the
pad so that the camcorder is easy to operate
when placed on your shoulder.
groove in the grip attachment point, and
secure in position using the screw
removed in step 1.

1 31 3
1
2

1 3
3

2
Shoulder pad
Attaching the grip close to the
[Notes]
ˎˎ When attaching the grip remote control cable, secure
camcorder 1 Loosen the three shoulder pad screws.
the cable in the cable clamper to prevent damaging it.
ˎˎ Check that the arm is securely attached to the 1 Remove the arm mounting screw (1). 2 Slide the shoulder pad forward/backward
camcorder. The camcorder may fall while shooting if to the desired position.
the screw is loose.
ˎˎ Do not support the weight of the camcorder by
2 Loosen the arm extension screw (2), and
holding just the grip remote control. extend the arm until a hole becomes 3 Securely tighten the screws.
ˎˎ After connecting the grip remote control cable, always visible (3).
lock the cable in the clamper. Pulling on the cable
with force during use may damage the connector.
ˎˎ If the grip cable gets in the way, secure it using the 1
cable clamper in the center of the arm.
3

Adjusting the position of the grip 2

remote control
ˎˎLoosen the arm mounting screw, adjust the
angle of the arm (1), and then tighten the
screw.
25 2. Preparation: Attaching Devices

Attaching the XDCA-FX9 3 Align the protrusions of the XDCA-FX9 Attaching a V-Shoe Battery Fastener strap
with the left and right grooves of the
camcorder and slide it all the way in and
You can add functions to the camcorder, such then down into the connector block. Insert the V-shoe battery into the battery pack
as a V-shoe battery or wired LAN, by attaching attachment on the XDCA-FX9.
an XDCA-FX9 Extension Unit (option) to the
camcorder. Removing a V-shoe battery
Loop
[Notes]
ˎˎ The camcorder battery pack cannot be attached
Pull the V-shoe battery out from the battery
when an XDCA-FX9 unit is attached to the camcorder. pack attachment on the XDCA-FX9 while
You must attach a battery pack to the XDCA-FX9 or holding down the battery release lever.
connect an external power supply.
ˎˎ Attach/remove the XDCA-FX9 while the camcorder is
turned off. Attaching a Portable Wireless
1 Remove the battery pack (page 18)
Attaching the Dongle Guards Tuner (when using a wireless
attached to the camcorder.
Grooves Protrusions
microphone)
2 Remove the two screws, and remove the You can attach a dongle guard to protect a
modem or other USB device attached to a USB
cover of the extension unit connector
block from the camcorder.
4 Tighten the two screws on the top of the connector.
You can attach any one of the following
portable wireless tuners, once the camcorder
XDCA-FX9 to secure the XDCA-FX9. Attach the dongle guard and dongle guard is turned off, when using a wireless
mounting bracket to the extension unit, and microphone.
secure in position using mounting bracket ˎˎURX‑S03D UHF Synthesized Diversity Tuner
screws. ˎˎDWR-S02DN Digital Wireless Receiver
Also refer to the instruction manual of the portable
wireless tuner.

[Note]
The wireless tuners that are supported will vary
depending on the region and the corresponding
frequency band. Consult your Sony dealer or Sony sales
representative for the wireless tuners that can be used
with this unit.

Dongle guard
mounting plate
Removing the XDCA-FX9
Attaching using fastener strap
Loosen the two screws on the top of the
XDCA-FX9, and remove the XDCA-FX9 from the Attach the fastener strap to the dongle guard
camcorder. to secure a USB device in place.
Attach the loop of the strap to the back of
the dongle guard and pass the strap over the
guard as shown below.
26 2. Preparation: Attaching Devices

1 Remove the four screws securing the 3 Set one of the following.
cover of the insertion slot, and remove the For CH1 input: Set the CH1 INPUT select
cover. switch to MI SHOE, and set Audio Input
>CH1 MI SHOE Input Select in the Audio
menu to Wireless.
For CH2 input: Set the CH2 INPUT select
switch to MI SHOE, and set Audio Input
>CH2 MI SHOE Input Select in the Audio
menu to Wireless.
For CH3/CH4 input: Set Audio Input >CH3
Input Select or CH4 Input Select in the
Audio menu to Wireless.

2 Insert the DWR-S02DN or URX-S03D into

the housing slot, and fasten the four
screws.

DWR-S02DN or
URX-S03D
27 2. Preparation

Configuring Basic Camcorder Operation

The initial settings screen appears in the
Shooting Mode Recording LUT data as metadata System Frequency
viewfinder the first time the camcorder is
turned on or after the backup battery has In Cine EI mode, you can record the LUT data
become completely discharged. You can switch the shooting mode between (Cube data) applied to the monitor image Select the frequency using Rec Format
Set the date and time of the internal clock “SDR mode” (for creating images flexibly when shooting as clip metadata. >Frequency* (page 91) in the Project menu.
using this screen. on-site), “HDR mode” (for shooting with Set Cine EI Setting >Embed LUT File The camcorder may reboot automatically after
Before shooting, configure the basic operation wide color space and wide dynamic range), (page 93) in the Project menu to On. switching, depending on the selected value.
of the camcorder to suit the application. and “Cine EI mode” (where the camcorder The LUT Cube data selected at the start of * Can also be configured on the status screen.
is operated similarly to a film camera, with recording is recorded as metadata. However, [Note]
Time Zone footage developed in post production). it cannot be recorded as metadata in the You cannot switch the system frequency during
Time Zone sets the time difference from UTC Select the mode using Base Setting* following cases. recording or playback.
(Coordinated Universal Time). Change the >Shooting Mode (page 91) in the Project ˎˎWhen there is no Cube data in internal
setting as required. menu. memory
* Can also be configured on the status screen. ˎˎIf the following occurs even when there is
[Notes] Cube data in internal memory Imager Scan Mode
ˎˎ Cine EI mode has the following limitations. –– When recording is started immediately
after changing the LUT data to apply
Setting the Date and Time ˎˎ Functions that cannot be adjusted automatically
(tracking) LUT data is recorded when Monitor LUT >LUT You can set the effective picture size and
–– White balance resolution of the image sensor.
Select (page 89) in the Shooting menu
–– Gain
Use the arrow buttons (page 7) or the is set to 709(800%) or s709, or when a user Select the mode using Rec Format >Imager
–– Shutter
multi-function dial (page 4) to select items ˎˎ Functions that cannot be configured 3D LUT saved in internal memory is selected Scan Mode* (page 91) in the Project menu.
* Can also be configured on the status screen.
and settings, then press the SET button or –– ISO sensitivity/gain (set to base ISO sensitivity using User 3D LUT Select (page 89).
multi-function dial to apply the settings and (fixed))
–– Paint menu settings (all are disabled) [Notes] ˎˎFF 6K: Full-frame size at 6K resolution.
start the clock running. –– Scene File (disabled) ˎˎ Only one metadata can be recorded per clip. ˎˎFFcrop 5K: Full-frame size cropped to
Once the settings screen is closed, you ˎˎ The following functions are available in Cine EI mode ˎˎ When Monitor LUT Setting >Internal Rec (page 89) approximately 83% size for 5K resolution.
can change the date, time, and time zone only. in the Shooting menu is set to MLUT On, metadata
ˎˎS35 4K: Super 35mm size at 4K resolution.
ˎˎ Exposure Index cannot be recorded.
settings using Clock Set (page 121) in the ˎˎFF 2K: Full-frame size at 2K resolution.
ˎˎ Monitor LUT ˎˎ If a file name displaying a mark on the left of the
Maintenance menu. name is selected using Monitor LUT >User 3D LUT ˎˎS35 2K: Super 35mm size at 2K resolution.
[Notes] Select (page 89) in the Shooting menu, then Cube ˎˎS16 2K: Super 16mm size at 2K resolution.
When the shooting mode is set to Cine EI data is not saved. Load the user 3D LUT data again
ˎˎ If the clock setting is lost because the backup battery [Tip]
becomes fully discharged due to power being
mode, select the base color space for the and select it.
You can quickly change the imager scan mode without
disconnected for an extended period (no battery pack recording signal and output signal. The color
changing the video format using an assignable button
and no DC IN power source), the initial settings screen space selected here is the color space of the (page 47) assigned with the Crop Select function.
will be displayed when you next turn the camcorder video output when MLUT is set to Off.
on. [Notes]
Select the color space using Cine EI Setting
ˎˎ While the initial settings screen is displayed, no other ˎˎ You cannot switch the imager scan mode during
operation, except turning the power off, is permitted >Color Gamut (page 93) in the Project recording or playback.
until you finish the settings on this screen. menu. ˎˎ When the imager scan mode is set to FF 2K, S35 2K,
ˎˎ The camcorder has a built-in rechargeable battery for ˎˎS-Gamut3.Cine/SLog3: Easy to adjust color or S16 2K, the recording format setting is restricted to
storing the date, time, and other settings even when gamut for digital cinema (DCI-P3). 1920×1080 resolution.
the camcorder is turned off. For details about the
built-in rechargeable battery, see page 128. ˎˎS-Gamut3/SLog3: Wide color space that
covers Sony’s ITU-R BT.2020.
28 2. Preparation: Configuring Basic Camcorder Operation

Codec

Select the codec using Rec Format

>Codec* (page 91) in the Project
menu.
* Can also be configured on the status
screen.

[Note]
You cannot switch the codec during
recording or playback.

Video Format

You can set the video format for

recording. Select a format using Rec
Format >Video Format* (page 91)
in the Project menu.
* Can also be configured on the status
screen.

[Notes]
ˎˎ You cannot switch the video format
during recording or playback.
ˎˎ Restrictions may apply to the signal from
the SDI OUT and HDMI OUT connectors,
depending on the video format setting.
29 2. Preparation

Using XQD Memory Cards

The camcorder records audio and video on XQD memory cards (available separately) inserted in
the card slots. Recommended Media

The guaranteed operating conditions will vary depending on the Rec Format and Recording
settings.
About XQD Memory Cards Yes: Operation supported
No: Normal operation not guaranteed

Use the following Sony XQD memory cards in the camcorder. Recording format G-series N-series H-series
For details on operations with media from other manufacturers, refer to the operating S-series M-series S-series
instructions for the media or consult the manufacturer’s information. (QD-S64E/S32E) (QD-S64/S32)
S-series XQD memory cards (QD-S64E/S32E/S64/S32) XAVC Intra 4096×2160 Normal 59.94P/ Yes No No
H-series XQD memory cards (QD-H32/H16) 422 mode or 50P/
N-series XQD memory cards (QD-N64) S&Q (60P or 29.97P/
M-series XQD memory cards (QD-M128A/M64A/M32A) lower) 25P/
G-series XQD memory cards (QD-G240F/G120F/G256E/G128E/G64E/G32E/G128A/G64A/G32A) 23.98P/
24P
The use of memory cards other than Sony XQD memory cards is not guaranteed.
3840×2160 Normal 59.94P/ Yes No No
[Tip]
mode or 50P/
For details about using XQD memory cards and usage precautions, refer to the operating instructions for the XQD
memory card. S&Q (60P or 29.97P/
lower) 25P/
23.98P
1920×1080 Normal 59.94P/ Yes No No
mode or 50P
S&Q (60P or 59.94i/ Yes Yes No
lower) 50i/
29.97P/
25P/
23.98P
S&Q (above 59.94P/ Yes No No
60P) 50P/
29.97P/
25P/
23.98P
30 2. Preparation: Using XQD Memory Cards

Recording format G-series

S-series
N-series
M-series
H-series
S-series
Inserting XQD Memory Cards Formatting (Initializing) XQD
(QD-S64E/S32E) (QD-S64/S32) Memory Cards
XAVC Long
422
3840×2160 Normal
mode or
59.94P/
50P/
Yes Yes No
1 Open the media cover of the card slot
section. If an unformatted XQD memory card or an
S&Q (60P or 29.97P/
lower) 25P/ XQD memory card that was formatted in a
23.98P 2 Insert an XQD memory card with the XQD different specification is inserted, the message
1920×1080 Normal 59.94P/ Yes Yes Yes label facing to the left. “Media Needs to be Formatted” is displayed in
mode or 50P/ The access indicator (page 8) is lit red, the viewfinder.
S&Q (60P or 59.94i/ then changes to green if the card is Format the card using the following procedure.
lower) 50i/
29.97P/
usable.
1 Select Format Media (page 104) in the
TC/Media menu.
25P/
23.98P
3 Close the media cover.

S&Q (above 59.94P/ Yes Yes No

[Notes] 2 Select Media(A) (slot A) or Media(B) (slot
ˎˎ The memory card, memory card slot, and image data B), then select Execute.
60P) 50P on the memory card may be damaged if the card is
A confirmation message appears.
29.97P Yes 50 Mbps: No No forced into the slot in the incorrect orientation.
35 Mbps: Yes ˎˎ When recording to media inserted in both XQD

25P/ Yes No No
card slots A and B, insert media in both slots that is
recommended for operation with the format of the
3 Select Execute.
23.98P recording.
A message is displayed while formatting
is in progress, and the access indicator is
MPEG2 HD 1920×1080 Normal 59.94i/ Yes Yes Yes
422 mode 50i/ lit red.
29.97P/ When formatting is completed, a
completion message is displayed. Press
25P/
23.98P
Ejecting XQD Memory Cards the SET button or multi-function dial to
dismiss the message.
Open the media cover of the card slot section, [Note]
and lightly press the XQD memory card in to Formatting a memory card erases all data, including
eject the card. recorded video data and setup files.

[Notes]
ˎˎ If the camcorder is turned off or the memory
If formatting fails
card is removed while the memory card is being
accessed, the integrity of data on the card cannot Memory cards not supported by the
be guaranteed. All data recorded on the card may camcorder cannot be formatted.
be discarded. Always make sure the access indicator A warning message is displayed. Follow
is green or off before turning off the camcorder or
removing the memory card.
the instructions to replace the card with a
ˎˎ When removing an XQD memory card immediately supported XQD memory card.
after recording is finished, the XQD memory card may
be hot, but this does not indicate a problem.
31 2. Preparation: Using XQD Memory Cards

2 Format the unusable XQD memory card

Checking the Remaining Restoring XQD Memory Cards on the camcorder.
Recording Time 3 Copy the required clips back to the newly
If for any reason an error should occur in formatted XQD memory card.
a memory card, the card must be restored [Notes]
When shooting (recording/standby), you can before use. ˎˎ For restoration of media recorded with this camcorder,
monitor the remaining capacity of the XQD When you load an XQD memory card that be sure to use this camcorder.
memory card in each slot using the slot A/B needs to be restored, a message appears on ˎˎ Media recorded with a device other than this
remaining media indicators in the viewfinder camcorder or with another camcorder of different
the viewfinder screen to ask whether you want version (even of the same model) may not be
(page 11). to restore it. restored using this camcorder.
The remaining recording time is calculated ˎˎ Clips shorter than 2 seconds cannot be restored.
from the remaining capacity of the media
in each slot and the current video format
Restoring a card
(recording bit rate), and is displayed in units of Use the arrow buttons (page 7) or the
minutes. multi-function dial (page 4) to select
Execute, then press the SET button or multi-
XQD memory card replacement timing function dial.
A message is displayed while formatting is in
ˎˎWhen the total remaining recording time on progress, and the access indicator is lit red.
the two memory cards becomes less than When restoration ends, a completion message
5 minutes, the message “Media Near Full” appears.
appears, the recording/tally lamp starts
flashing, and a beep sound (headphone
output) will warn you.
If restoration fails
Replace with media that has free space. ˎˎXQD memory cards on which memory
ˎˎIf you continue recording until the total errors have occurred cannot be restored. A
remaining recording time reaches zero, warning message is displayed. Follow the
the message changes to “Media Full” and instructions to replace the XQD memory
recording stops. card.
[Note] ˎˎXQD memory cards on which memory errors
Up to approximately 600 clips can be recorded on one have occurred may become usable if they
XQD memory card. are reformatted.
If the number of recorded clips reaches the limit, the
remaining recording time indicator becomes “0” and a ˎˎIn some cases, some clips can be restored
message is displayed. while others cannot. The restored clips can
be played normally.
ˎˎIf the message “Could not Restore Some
Clips” keeps appearing after repeated
attempts at restoration, it may be possible
to restore the XQD memory card with the
following procedure.
1 Copy the required clips to another XQD
memory card using Copy Clip (page 110)
in the Thumbnail menu.
32 2. Preparation

Using a UTILITY SD/MS Card

The UTILITY SD/MS card is used for proxy the SET button or multi-function dial to
recording and storing/loading settings. It Ejecting an SD/MS Card dismiss the message.
is also used for future upgrades (software [Note]
update). Open the media cover of the card slot section, Formatting an SD card or “Memory Stick” media erases
and lightly press the SD card or “Memory Stick” all data. The data cannot be restored.
media in to eject it.
[Notes]
Supported SD/MS Cards ˎˎ If the camcorder is turned off or the SD card or
“Memory Stick” media is removed while the SD Checking the Remaining Capacity
card or “Memory Stick” media is being accessed,
SDXC memory cards* the integrity of data cannot be guaranteed. All data
SDHC memory cards* recorded on the card may be discarded. Always make You can check the remaining capacity on an
sure the access indicator is off before turning off the
SD memory cards* SD card or “Memory Stick” media on the Media
camcorder or removing the SD card or “Memory Stick”
“Memory Stick PRO-HG Duo”** media. Status screen (page 16).
“Memory Stick PRO Duo”** ˎˎ Take caution to prevent the SD card or “Memory Stick” When shooting (recording/standby) with
* Referred to collectively as “SD cards” in this manual. media from flying out when inserting/ejecting the proxy recording set to On, you can monitor the
** Referred to as “Memory Stick” media in this card. remaining capacity of the SD card using the
document.
remaining media indicators on the viewfinder
[Note] screen (page 11).
Proxy recording is not supported on “Memory Stick”
media. [Note]
Formatting (Initializing) SD/MS A mark is displayed if the SD card is protected.

Cards
To use an SD card formatted on the
Inserting an SD/MS Card SD cards and “Memory Stick” media must be
camcorder in the slot of another device
formatted the first time they are used in the First, make a backup of the card, then reformat
1 Open the media cover of the card slot
camcorder.
An SD card or “Memory Stick” media to be
the card in the device to be used.
section.
used with this camcorder must be formatted
using the format function of this camcorder.
2 Insert the SD card or “Memory Stick”
1 Select Format Media (page 104) in the
media into the card slot with the label
facing right. TC/Media menu.
The access indicator (page 8) is lit red,
then goes off if the card is usable. 2 Specify Utility SD/MS, then select Execute.
A confirmation message appears.
3 Close the media cover.
3 Select Execute.
A message and progress status are
displayed while formatting is in progress,
and the access indicator is lit red.
When formatting is completed, a
completion message is displayed. Press
33 3. Shooting

Basic Operation Procedure

Basic shooting is conducted using the Multiple clips are recorded in succession
following procedure. Switching Between XQD Memory during relay recording, but recording will stop Specifying Time Data
Cards automatically after approximately 24 hours.
1 Attach the necessary devices, and check [Notes]
that power is being supplied.
When two XQD memory cards are inserted,
ˎˎ Do not eject a memory card while recording to it is in Setting the timecode
progress. When recording, only change memory cards
press the SLOT SELECT button (page 7) to
2
in slots for which the slot access indicator is off.
Set the timecode to record using Timecode
Insert the memory card(s). switch cards. ˎˎ When the remaining capacity on the memory card
being recorded becomes less than one minute and (page 103) in the TC/Media menu.
Recording automatically switches to the
3 Set the POWER switch to the on position. second memory card just before the
a recordable memory card is inserted in the other
slot, a “Will Switch Slots Soon” message appears. The Setting user bits
The POWER indicator turns on, and the remaining capacity on the first card is reduced message disappears after switching memory card
camera image appears in the viewfinder. to zero (relay recording). You can continue slots.
You can add an 8-digit hexadecimal number
recording continuously when switching ˎˎ Relay recording may not operate if recording is
started when the remaining memory card capacity to the recorded image as user bits. You can
4 Press the record START/STOP button/ memory cards by replacing the memory card
that is full with a new memory card.
is less than one minute. For correct relay recording, also set the user bits to the current time. Set
indicator (page 6). check that the remaining memory card capacity is using Users Bit (page 103) in the TC/Media
more than one minute before starting recording. menu.
The recording/tally lamp lights and [Note]
ˎˎ Video created using the camcorder relay recording
recording begins. You cannot switch between memory cards during
function cannot be played back seamlessly on the
playback mode. Also, continuous playback of a clip
camcorder. Displaying time data
5
spanning media in slot A and slot B is not supported.
To stop recording, press the record ˎˎ To combine video created using the camcorder relay
recording function, use “Catalyst Browse” software. Set the timecode to display using TC Display
START/STOP button (page 6) again.
Clips (recorded data) (page 103) >Display Select in the TC/Media
Recording stops, and the camcorder
When you stop recording, the video, audio, menu.
switches to STBY (standby) mode.
and accompanying data from the start to the Pressing an assignable button (page 47)
[Note]
If the record START/STOP button is pressed within a few
end of the recording are saved as a single Monitoring Audio with DURATION/TC/U-BIT assigned will switch
“clip” on an XQD memory card. the display between the timecode, user bits,
seconds after turning the camcorder on, the recording/
tally lamp lights up to indicate the unit is in the and duration in sequence.
You can monitor the audio that is being
recording state, but recording to media may not occur Clip names
for the first few seconds, depending on the selected recorded using headphones. Switching the timecode input/output
The name of each clip recorded by the
recording format. Connecting a set of headphones to the
camcorder is automatically assigned using the
headphone jack (page 8) enables you to You can switch the timecode input/output
format set in Clip Name Format (page 103) of
monitor the audio being recorded. You can using the IN/OUT select switch (page 8).
the TC/Media menu.
also monitor the playback audio (page 74) For details, see page 126.
using the built-in speaker (page 6) or
Maximum clip duration headphones.
Up to 6 hours per clip. Adjust the volume of the monitored audio
The maximum duration of continuous using the VOLUME (audio monitoring volume
recording is the same as the maximum adjustment) buttons (page 6).
duration of a clip. If the recording time exceeds You can select the audio channel to monitor
the maximum duration of a clip, a new clip is using Audio Output >Monitor CH* (page 109)
created automatically and recording continues. in the Audio menu.
The new clip appears as a separate clip on the The Monitor CH setting can be switched
thumbnail screen. (page 53) by assigning Audio Monitor CH or
Audio Mon. CH Switch to an assignable button
(page 47).
* Can also be configured on the status screen.
34 3. Shooting: Basic Operation Procedure

Reviewing the Recording (Rec

Review)

You can review the last recorded clip on the

screen (recording review).
[Note]
Rec Review is not supported if the video format is
changed after recording a clip.

Recording review method

Assign Rec Review to one of the assignable
buttons beforehand.
When recording is stopped, press the
assignable button (page 47) with Rec
Review assigned. Playback of the last recorded
clip begins.
The clip is played to the end, Rec Review ends,
and the camcorder returns to STBY (standby)
mode.

To stop Rec Review

Press the assignable button with Rec Review
assigned or press the CANCEL/BACK button.

Recording review settings

You can set the playback start position to one
of the following using the Rec Review setting
(page 112) in the Technical menu.
ˎˎLast 3 seconds of the clip
ˎˎLast 10 seconds of the clip
ˎˎStart of the clip
[Tip]
If you want to review a specific clip after recording
multiple clips, press the THUMBNAIL button to display
the thumbnail screen, and select the clip to start
playback.
35 3. Shooting

Adjusting the Focus

You can adjust the focus automatically [Tips] at high speed. Focusing stops as soon as you You can move the position to be magnified
or manually according to the shooting ˎˎ In spot focus mode, you can press an assignable release the button. during focus magnification using the arrow
button (page 47) assigned with Push AF/Push MF
conditions. to temporarily stop spot focus and enable auto focus
The focus status is indicated by the focus buttons (page 7) or the multi selector
while the button is pressed. The focus returns to indicator. (page 9). You can return to the center
manual focus when you release the button. ˎˎOn: The focus is fixed at the focus position. position by pressing and holding the SET
ˎˎ The Spot Focus function does not operate if the lens ˎˎFlashing: Out of focus. Since focusing is not button (page 7) or multi selector.
is set for manual focusing.
Adjusting the Focus Manually ˎˎ The spot focus position cannot be specified while
automatic, change the composition and When push auto focus (AF) is used during
the focus is magnified or when Touch Operation focus settings to achieve focus. focus magnification, focusing occurs within
(Manual Focus) (page 112) in the Technical menu is set to Off. The focus returns to manual focus when you the focus area set using Focus >Focus Area
release the button. (page 89) in the Shooting menu.
To adjust the focus manually, set the FOCUS Using auto focus temporarily (Push Auto This is useful when you want to quickly focus If push auto focus (AF-S) is used during
on a subject before starting to shoot. focus magnification, the focus adjusts to the
switch (page 6) to the “MAN” position. Focus (AF)) magnified display position.
This allows you to adjust the focus manually [Tips]
according to the shooting conditions. When Focus >Push AF Mode (page 89) ˎˎ The same operation is supported using an assignable [Notes]
button (page 47) assigned with Push AF/Push MF. ˎˎ The recorded image or SDI/HDMI output image is not
Manual focusing is useful for the following in the Shooting menu is set to AF, press the
ˎˎ You can also assign Push AF Mode to an assignable magnified when the focus is magnified.
types of subjects. PUSH AUTO FOCUS button (page 6) when button (page 47). ˎˎ During focus magnification, the STATUS button and
ˎˎSubjects on the far side of a window in manual focus mode to focus automatically ˎˎ You can also assign Focus Area(AF-S) to an assignable MENU button are disabled.
covered in water droplets while the button is pressed. button (page 47). ˎˎ The magnified position returns to the center of the
Focusing occurs within the focus area set ˎˎ You can display/hide the focus area frame using screen when the camcorder is turned off.
ˎˎSubjects with low contrast against the Display On/Off >Focus Area Ind.(AF-S) (page 105) in
background using Focus >Focus Area (page 89) in the the Monitoring menu.
ˎˎSubjects further away than nearby subjects Shooting menu. ˎˎ During focus magnification, the focus adjusts to fit Focusing Manually by Displaying a
The focus returns to manual focus when you the magnified display position.
Focus Marker
Focusing using touch operation (Spot release the button. [Notes]
This is useful when you want to move the ˎˎ The Push Auto Focus function does not operate if the During manual focus, you can check the
Focus) focus slowly from one subject to another lens is set for manual focusing. difference from a reference focus position
subject during manual focus. ˎˎ The focus area frame is not hidden when using the numerically.
In manual focus mode, you can specify the DISPLAY button.
position where you want to adjust the focus [Tips] Storing a specific focus position beforehand
by touching operation. ˎˎ The same operation is supported using an assignable is useful during shooting, for example, when
button (page 47) assigned with Push AF/Push MF. Focusing using magnified view (Focus you want to adjust a change in the amount
To use spot focus, set Focus >Touch Function
in MF (page 89) in the Shooting menu to
ˎˎ You can also assign Push AF Mode to an assignable
button (page 47).
Magnifier) of bokeh using a numerical value as a guide
Spot Focus. or when you want to return to the original
[Note] By factory default, the Focus Magnifier ×3/×6 position.
A spot focus mark is displayed when you tap The Push Auto Focus function does not operate if the function is assigned to the ASSIGN 4 button
the position where you want to adjust the
focus.
lens is set for manual focusing. on the grip remote control and the ASSIGN 10 1 Set Display On/Off >Focus Marker
button on the viewfinder (page 47). (page 105) in the Monitoring menu to
Using single-shot Auto Focus (Push Auto Press the ASSIGN 4 button or ASSIGN 10 On.
Focus (AF-S)) button to switch to the focus magnifier screen,
with the center magnified by approximately 2 Assign Focus Zero Marker to an
Set Focus >Push AF Mode (page 89) in three times. Press the button again to increase assignable button (page 47).
the Shooting menu to Single-shot AF(AF-S), the magnification to approximately six times.
then set the focus area using Focus >Focus This function is useful for checking the focus.
Area(AF-S) (page 89) in the Shooting menu. Press the button again to return to the normal
Press the PUSH AUTO FOCUS button when in screen.
manual focus mode to focus automatically
36 3. Shooting: Adjusting the Focus

3 When you are at a focus position that you Adjusting the Focus Automatically
When selected, specify the position using the
arrow buttons (page 7) or multi selector
[Tip]
The same operation is supported using an assignable
want to set as the reference, press the button (page 47) assigned with Focus Area.
Focus Zero Marker button. (Auto Focus) (page 9). You can display/hide the focus area frame using Display
You can return to the center position On/Off >Focus Area Indicator (page 105) in the
The focus marker indicator value is set to
by pressing and holding the SET button Monitoring menu.
0.
The camcorder uses phase detection AF for (page 7) or multi selector. [Note]
high-speed focusing and contrast AF for high-
4 Adjust the focus position using the focus accuracy focusing.
The focus area frame is not hidden when using the
DISPLAY button.
marker indicator value as a guide. The combination of these two AF methods
[Note] provides auto focus with both high speed and Changing the focus area quickly (Focus
The value will vary depending on the shooting high accuracy.
conditions and the lens used. Check the operation To adjust the focus automatically, set the
Setting)
before use.
FOCUS switch (page 6) of the camcorder You can change the position and size of the
to the “AUTO” position. If the lens is fitted with auto focus area quickly during shooting by
a focus selector switch, set the switch to the assigning Focus Setting to an assignable
“AF/MF” or “AF” position. If the switch is set to Zone:
button (page 47).
the “Full MF” or “MF” position, lens focusing Automatically searches for a focus position
The operation varies depending on the focus
cannot be operated from the camcorder within the specified zone.
area setting.
(page 23). When selected, specify the position using the
In AF mode, the FOCUS AUTO LED is lit. arrow buttons (page 7) or multi selector
(page 9). When Focus >Focus Area (page 89) in the
[Tip]
When Focus >AF Assist (page 89) in the Shooting
You can return to the center position Shooting menu is set to Flexible Spot or Zone
menu is set to On, you can still use the focus ring on the by pressing and holding the SET button You can change the position of the focus area
lens during auto focus to adjust the focus. (page 7) or multi selector. by pressing an assignable button assigned
[Notes]
with Focus Setting and adjusting using the
ˎˎ A lens that supports auto focus is required. arrow buttons (page 7), multi selector
ˎˎ Accuracy may not be obtained depending on the (page 9), or touch operation (page 37).
shooting conditions. You can return the position of the focus area
ˎˎ The focus cannot be adjusted automatically on an to the center while adjusting the position by
A-mount lens.
ˎˎ Auto focus cannot be used when VF Setting >De-
pressing the SET button (page 7) or multi
Squeeze (page 107) in the Monitoring menu is not selector.
set to Off(1.0x). You can change the size of the focus area by
pressing and holding an assignable button
Setting the auto focus area/position Wide: assigned with Focus Setting.
Searches for a subject over a wide angle of After changing the size, set the position of the
(Focus Area) the image when focusing. A frame is not focus area by pressing the SET button or multi
displayed. selector.
You can set the target area for auto focus
using Focus >Focus Area (page 89) in the When finished, press the assignable button
Shooting menu. assigned with Focus Setting to return to the
original screen.
Flexible Spot:
Focuses on a specified position in the image.
37 3. Shooting: Adjusting the Focus

When Focus >Focus Area (page 89) in the Tap any position [Notes] Focused on far subject
ˎˎ If you tap a position or drag the focus area to a
Shooting menu is set to Wide position that exceeds the setting range, the focus
You can only change the size of the focus area area moves to the top/bottom/left/right edge of the
by pressing and holding an assignable button setting range.
assigned with Focus Setting. The position can ˎˎ This function is not available in the following
circumstances.
be also be changed by first changing the type –– When Touch Operation (page 79) in the
to Flexible Spot or Zone. Technical menu is set to Off
–– When the focus area is displayed in gray or is not
[Tips]
displayed at all
ˎˎ The focus area frame is displayed orange when the
position of the focus area can be changed.
ˎˎ When Focus >Push AF Mode (page 89) in the Adjusting the auto focus action (AF
Shooting menu is set to Single-shot AF(AF-S), you can
change the Focus Area(AF-S) (page 89) focus area transition speed, AF subject shift
position.
Focus area moves, with the focus area sensitivity)
centered on the tapped position.
Moving the focus area frame using
touch operation (touch focus area) AF transition speed
During the change:
You can set the speed of the focus drive for 1(Slow): Focus operates slowly
You can move the focus area using touch when the subject changes using Focus >AF .
operation when the focus area frame is Transition Speed (page 88) in the Shooting .
displayed orange as a result of setting Focus menu. .
> Focus Area (page 89) in the Shooting When set to low speed, the focus moves 7(Fast): Focus operates rapidly
menu to Flexible Spot or Zone, or by pressing slowly when the subject to be focused
an assignable button assigned with the Focus changes, enabling the shooting of impressive
Setting function. images.
Tap the screen to move the focus area, When set to high speed, the focus switches
with the focus area centered on the tapped Focused on near subject
between subjects quickly. The subject that
position. Drag on the screen to move the focus enters the frame is immediately focused,
area to the position traced by your finger making this setting ideal for documentary
Drag to move the focus area, tracing your
(page 10). finger position shooting which requires quick focusing.
38 3. Shooting: Adjusting the Focus

AF subject shift sensitivity AF Subj. Shift Sens.: 1(Locked On) AF Subj. Shift Sens.: 5(Responsive) Changing the focus target manually (AF
You can set the sensitivity for changing
between subjects using Focus >AF Subj. Shift
Assist)
Sens. (page 88) in the Shooting menu. When Focus >AF Assist (page 89) in the
When set to a low sensitivity, the focus does Shooting menu is set to On, you can select the
not readily shift even if another subject moves target for auto focus during auto focus using
in front of the in-focus subject. When set to a the focus ring on the lens.
high sensitivity, the focus shifts to give priority Auto focus operation is restored when you
to the subject that moves in front. stop operating the focus ring.
[Tip] Setting Focus >AF Subj. Shift Sens.
If AF Speed/Sens. is assigned to an assignable button, (page 88) in the Shooting menu to 1(Locked
the level bars for adjusting values are displayed in On) is convenient when you want the auto
the following order each time the button is pressed,
allowing you to change the AF transition speed and AF
focus operation to continue as-is when the
subject shift sensitivity settings. focus position moves to a subject with a
AF transition speed  AF subject shift sensitivity  No different distance.
display …

Using manual focus temporarily (Push

Manual Focus)
Press the PUSH AUTO FOCUS button
(page 6) when in auto focus mode to
focus manually while the button is pressed.
The focus returns to auto focus when you
release the button.
This allows you to temporarily stop auto focus
and focus manually when something that is
not the subject of shooting crosses in front of
the subject.
[Tip]
The same operation is supported using an assignable
button (page 47) assigned with Push AF/Push MF.

Change focus to another subject slowly Change focus to another subject rapidly
39 3. Shooting: Adjusting the Focus

detected, focusing is in AF mode (default ˎˎ If you turn the camcorder off while Face/Eye Only AF
Tracking using Face and Eye setting). Tracking a Specified Subject is selected, the mode automatically switches to Face/
Eye Priority AF when the camcorder is next turned on.
Detection (Face/Eye Detection AF) (Realtime Tracking AF)
Off: Starting realtime tracking AF
The face/eye detection AF function is
The camcorder can detect people’s faces and disabled. You can maintain focus on a subject by
When a tracking target is specified on the
eyes as a target to track, and then adjust the specifying the subject by touch operation or
[Notes] camera, tracking of that target starts.
focus on faces and eyes within the focus area. by selecting a face detection frame.
ˎˎ During push auto focus operation, Face/Eye Priority
This function is available only when the focus AF is activated even if Face/Eye Only AF is currently When a subject is selected, a white tracking
mode is AF mode or during push auto focus. selected. frame is displayed and tracking starts. Specifying by touch operation
When faces are detected, gray face/eye ˎˎ When the FOCUS switch is set to MAN, face/eye Tap the target subject to track in one of the
[Tips]
detection frames are displayed. When auto detection AF is disabled (excluding during push auto following states:
ˎˎ Tracking occurs over the entire image area, regardless
focus operation). ˎˎWhen the focus mode is MF mode or during
focusing is possible, the frames change to of the focus area setting.
ˎˎ If you turn the camcorder off while Face/Eye Only AF push manual focus, and Focus >Touch
white and tracking starts. When eyes are ˎˎ When Focus >Touch Function in MF (page 89) in
is selected, the mode automatically switches to Face/
the Shooting menu is set to Tracking AF, realtime Function in MF (page 89) in the Shooting
detected and the focus is adjusted, the face/ Eye Priority AF when the camcorder is next turned on.
tracking AF is supported even when the focus mode
eye detection frame is displayed on the eyes. menu is set to Tracking AF
is MF mode.
When multiple individuals are detected, the Hiding face/eye detection frames ˎˎWhen the focus mode is AF mode or during
main subject is automatically determined. push auto focus (AF)
The following actions occur for the tracking
You can show/hide face/eye detection frames target, depending on the face/eye detection [Note]
[Tips]
ˎˎ When the focus area is set to Zone or Flexible Spot using Display On/Off >Face/Eye Detection AF operating mode. Specifying a target by touch operation is not available
and faces or eyes overlap within the specified focus Frame (page 105) in the Monitoring menu. when Touch Operation (page 112) in the Technical
area, the face/eye detection frames change to white, menu is set to Off.
and the camcorder focuses on those faces/eyes.
[Note] Face/Eye Only AF, Face/Eye Priority AF:
Green face/eye detection frames are displayed for faces
ˎˎ When push auto focus (AF-S) is used, the face/eye Use for focusing and tracking of a specified Specifying by face detection frame selection
and eyes that are in focus using push auto focus (AF-S),
detection frames for the faces/eyes that are in focus subject.
change to green.
and are not hidden using the DISPLAY button or when Move the face selection cursor (orange
Face/Eye Detection Frame is set to Off. If the tracking target is a person and a face/ underline) to the target subject to track using
eye is detected, the camera focuses on that the arrow buttons (page 7) or multi
Set the face/eye detection AF action using
Focus >Face/Eye Detection AF (page 89) in Switching face/eye detection AF face/eye. selector (page 9), and press the SET
When a tracking target face/eye is detected,
the Shooting menu. operation using an assignable button the tracking target face is saved.
button (page 7) or multi selector.

Assign Face/Eye Detection AF to an assignable When saved, a (saved tracking face icon) Other face detection
Face/Eye Only AF: (page 11) is displayed. frames (gray) Tracking frame
button (page 47). You can then switch face/
The camera detects the faces/eyes of subjects
eye detection AF operation in the order Face/ [Note]
(people) and focuses and tracks only on If tracking AF is started during manual focus, the
Eye Priority AF, Face/Eye Only AF, and Off each
their faces/eyes. While a face or eye is not tracking target face is not saved.
time you press the button.
detected, AF is temporarily stopped and the
(Face/Eye Only AF mode auto focus paused) Off:
icon (page 11) is displayed. This mode is Setting using the direct menu
Focusing and tracking of the specified subject.
effective when you want to auto focus and Face/eye detection does not occur, even if the
You can also set the face/eye detection AF
track faces/eyes only. tracking target is a person.
operation using the direct menu (page 47). Face selection cursor
[Notes] (orange)
Face/Eye Priority AF: ˎˎ The Realtime Tracking AF function does not operate if [Tips]
The camera detects the faces/eyes of subjects the lens is set for manual focusing.
ˎˎ You can also change the target to track during
(people) and prioritizes the focusing/tracking realtime tracking AF.
on the faces/eyes. When a face or eye is not
40 3. Shooting: Adjusting the Focus

ˎˎ If an assignable button (page 47) assigned with the

Focus Magnifier function is pressed during realtime
tracking AF, the tracking status is maintained and the
focus is magnified. However, you cannot specify a
target to track during focus magnification.

[Note]
During manual focus, tracking cannot be started by face
detection frame selection.

Stopping realtime tracking AF

Stopping by touch operation

Tap the (Realtime tracking AF stop)
button displayed at the top left of the touch
panel.
[Tips]
ˎˎ Realtime tracking AF will stop in the following cases:
–– When the FOCUS switch or AUTO/MAN control on
the lens is switched
–– When the focus mode is changed
–– When auto focus assist is executed
–– When the focus area setting or face/eye detection
AF action is changed
–– When an assignable button assigned with Push
AF/Push MF is pressed
–– When the tracking target is not within the shooting
screen or when the subject is out of focus for a few
seconds
ˎˎ When a tracking face is saved (when the “ ” (saved
tracking face icon) is displayed), realtime tracking AF
will resume when the saved tracking face enters the
image area. To clear the tracking face, specify another
face or stop realtime tracking AF as described above.
41 3. Shooting

Adjusting the Brightness

A ND ND Selecting the Base Sensitivity Adjusting the iris manually Adjusting the Gain
PRESET VARIABLE

1
ND ON

B Press and hold the IRIS function button (F)

ND AUTO You can select from two types of base to display the direct menu (page 47), In SDR/HDR mode, you can adjust the gain to
C CLEAR
sensitivity on the camcorder. and select Manual. adjust the brightness.
D STATUS FOCUS In SDR/HDR mode, you can set Base
Sensitivity* in the Shooting menu to High or
2 Press the IRIS function button (F) so that
Adjusting the gain automatically
E AUTO MAN-PUSH AUTO Low. In Cine EI mode, you can set Base ISO* in
IRIS
the Shooting menu to ISO 4000 or ISO 800. the iris value is displayed on a white Press and hold the ISO/GAIN function button
F * Can also be configured on the status screen. background. (I) to display the direct menu (page 47), and
PUSH AUTO

G You can shoot with good balance, without select Auto.

I
ISO/GAIN WHT BAL SHUTTER increased noise, by selecting Low or ISO 800 3 Turn the multi-function dial to adjust the [Tips]
in normal lighting conditions or selecting High value. ˎˎ You can also perform the same action by setting Auto
or ISO 4000 in low lighting conditions. Exposure (page 85) >AGC in the Shooting menu
J
L B
M A [Tips]
H PRESET to On.
[Tip] ˎˎ You can also operate the multi-function dial as
an IRIS dial (page 47) by assigning the IRIS ˎˎ You can also assign AGC to an assignable button
You can also assign Base ISO/Sensitivity to an
(page 47).
assignable button (page 47). function to the multi-function dial.
You can adjust the brightness by adjusting the ˎˎ You can also assign the IRIS function to an
iris, gain, shutter speed, and by adjusting the assignable dial (page 47). Adjusting the gain manually
light level using ND filters. You can also make
adjustments automatically. Temporarily adjusting automatically You can control the gain when you want to
The target level for automatic brightness Adjusting the Iris adjust the exposure while using a fixed iris
adjustment is set using Auto Exposure Press the PUSH AUTO IRIS button (E) to setting or when you want to prevent the gain
(page 85) >Level in the Shooting menu. You can adjust the iris to adjust the brightness. automatically adjust the iris temporarily while increasing due to AGC.
You can also assign Auto Exposure Level to an
assignable button (page 47).
the button is pressed.
The iris returns to the previous setting when
1 Press and hold the ISO/GAIN function
Adjusting the iris automatically you release the button.
button (I) to display the direct menu
[Note] (page 47), and select Manual.
The gain cannot be adjusted in Cine EI mode. The This function adjusts the brightness according [Tip]

2
base sensitivity is fixed. Also, the brightness cannot to the subject. A lens that supports auto iris is You can also assign Push Auto Iris to an assignable
be adjusted automatically using the shutter speed. button (page 47). Set the ISO/GAIN switch (J) to H, M, or L.
required.
Brightness auto adjustment using the iris and ND filter
is supported. 1 If a lens with Auto Iris switch is attached,
[Note]
When the Auto Iris switch of the lens is set to MANUAL,
[Tip]
You can also assign Push AGC to an assignable button,
set the switch to AUTO. the Auto Iris and Push Auto Iris functions on the and set AGC to On temporarily by pressing and holding
camcorder have no effect. Manual iris adjustments on the button.

2 Press and hold the IRIS function button (F)

the camcorder also have no effect.
Controlling the gain (fine adjustment)
to display the direct menu (page 47),
and select Auto.
[Tip]
1 Press the ISO/GAIN function button (I) so
You can also assign Auto Iris to an assignable that the gain value is displayed on a white
button (page 47). background.
[Note]
The iris cannot be adjusted automatically on an
A-mount lens.
2 Turn the multi-function dial to adjust the
value.
42 3. Shooting: Adjusting the Brightness

[Tip]
Change the gain preset value according to the ISO/GAIN Adjusting the Exposure Index Adjusting the Shutter Adjusting the Light Level (ND
switch (J) setting.
Filter)
In Cine EI mode, it is assumed that video You can adjust the shutter to adjust the
Controlling the gain temporarily (fine output with MLUT set to Off is recorded as the brightness.
adjustment) main signal. By changing the brightness of In conditions where the lighting is too bright,
you can set the appropriate brightness by
Turn the assignable dial (page 47) assigned
the image with MLUT On to match an EI value, Adjusting the shutter automatically changing the ND filter.
you can check the result of post-production
with the ISO/Gain/EI function, to adjust the exposure sensitivity adjustment while Press and hold the SHUTTER function button The camcorder features two ND filter modes.
gain value set by the ISO/GAIN switch (J). shooting. (G) to display the direct menu (page 47) You can switch between the two modes using
This is useful when you want to adjust the You can change the EI value by setting the and select Auto to adjust the shutter speed or the ND PRESET/VARIABLE switch.
exposure by one step without changing the ISO/GAIN switch (J) to H, M, or L. shutter angle automatically in response to the
depth of field.
[Tip]
image brightness. Adjusting in preset mode
The adjusted gain value is canceled by
You can change the EI value of each switch position [Tip]
switching the ISO/GAIN switch (J), changing using ISO/Gain/EI >Exposure Index<H>/<M>/<L>
Set the ND PRESET/VARIABLE switch (A) to
You can also perform the same action by setting Auto
the base sensitivity, setting AGC to On, or (page 84) in the Shooting menu or using the Camera Exposure (page 86) >Auto Shutter in the Shooting the PRESET position, and set the ND FILTER
turning the power off. Status screen (page 15). menu to On. POSITION up/down buttons (B) to one of the
[Tip]
following settings.
You can also assign this function to the multi-function Fine adjustment of the exposure index Adjusting the shutter manually Clear: No ND filter
dial (page 47). 1: Transmittance set by ND Filter >Preset1
1 Press the ISO/GAIN function button (I) so 1 Press and hold the SHUTTER function
(page 84) in the Shooting menu.
2: Transmittance set by ND Filter >Preset2
that the EI value is displayed on a white button (G) to display the direct menu
(page 84) in the Shooting menu.
background. (page 47), and select Speed or Angle.
3: Transmittance set by ND Filter >Preset3
(page 84) in the Shooting menu.
2 Turn the multi-function dial to adjust the 2 Press the SHUTTER function button (G) so
value. that the shutter value is displayed on a Adjusting in variable mode
[Tip] white background.
Change the EI preset value according to the ISO/GAIN Set the ND PRESET/VARIABLE switch (A) to
switch (J) setting.
3 Turn the multi-function dial to adjust the the VARIABLE position. Switch the ND FILTER
shutter speed. POSITION up/down buttons (B) between
CLEAR and On.
[Tips]
ˎˎ To adjust the exposure time to match the frame
interval, select Off in step 1. Adjusting the light level automatically
ˎˎ You can also set the angle and adjust the frequency You can set Auto ND Filter to On to enable
(page 84).
auto exposure adjustment using the ND filter.
1 Press the [+] button of the ND FILTER
POSITION up/down buttons (B) to turn ND
filter operation on.

2 Press and hold the ND VARIABLE AUTO

button (C) until Auto is selected.
43 3. Shooting: Adjusting the Brightness

Adjusting the light level manually in video cameras). You can suppress this effect to
obtain better shooting results using the ND filter.
1 Press the [+] button of the ND FILTER
POSITION up/down buttons (B) to turn ND
filter operation on.

2 Press and hold the ND VARIABLE AUTO

button (C) until Manual is selected.

3 Turn the ND VARIABLE dial (D) to adjust

the transmittance of the filter.
[Tip]
You can also assign the ND Filter function to an
assignable dial (page 47).

Temporarily adjusting automatically

You can assign Push Auto ND to an assignable
button (page 47), and temporarily set Auto
ND Filter to On by pressing and holding the
button. Releasing the button sets Auto ND
Filter back to Off.
Press the [+] button of the ND FILTER POSITION
up/down buttons (B) to turn ND filter
operation on.
[Note]
When the ND filter is switched to or from CLEAR during
shooting, the ND filter frame is displayed on the image
and the operating sound is included in the audio.

[Tips]
ˎˎ You can set to CLEAR by turning the ND VARIABLE dial
(D) down from ND1/4. Turning the dial up from CLEAR
sets ND1/4. You can disable this action using ND Dial
>CLEAR with Dial (page 112) in the Technical menu.
ˎˎ You can also assign ND Filter Position to an assignable
button (page 47), and press the button instead of
using the ND FILTER POSITION up//down buttons to
change the setting.
Preset mode: Clear  Preset1  Preset2  Preset3
 Clear…
Variable mode: Clear  On  Clear…
ˎˎ You can also assign Auto ND Filter to an assignable
button (page 47), and press the button to switch
Auto ND filter between On and Off.
ˎˎ When shooting a brightly lit subject, closing the iris
too much may cause diffraction blur, producing an
image starting to go out of focus (typical phenomena
44 3. Shooting

Adjusting for Natural Colors (White Balance)

ND
PRESET
ND
VARIABLE
Examples:
–– When a single color dominates the subject, such as
Press and hold the WHT BAL function button
(H) and select one of the following in the
4 Press the WB SET button (page 4).
ND ON sky, sea, ground, or flowers. ˎˎIf auto white balance is run in memory
–– When the color temperature is extremely high or
direct menu.
mode, the adjustment value is saved in
ND AUTO
extremely low. SDR/HDR mode:  3200K,  4300K, 
CLEAR the memory (A or B) selected in step 1.
If the appropriate effect cannot be obtained because 5600K,  6300K
the ATW auto tracking speed is slow or for other ˎˎIf auto white balance is run in ATW
STATUS FOCUS Cine EI mode:  3200K,  4300K,  5500K
reasons, run auto white balance. mode, the white balance adjustment
[Tip] returns to the ATW mode white balance
AUTO MAN-PUSH AUTO
You can also assign Preset White Select to an assignable
IRIS when adjustment ends.
button (page 47), and press the button to change the
setting. [Note]
Adjusting the White Balance
PUSH AUTO
SDR/HDR mode: 3200K  4300K  5600K  6300K If the adjustment is not successful, an error message is
ISO/GAIN WHT BAL SHUTTER  3200K… displayed on the screen for about three seconds. If the
H Manually Cine EI mode: 3200K  4300K  5500K  3200K… error message persists after repeated attempts to set
white balance, contact your Sony service representative.
K
L B
M
H
A
PRESET Changing the color temperature
1 When white balance is set to ATW mode,

You can select the adjustment mode to suit

press and hold the WHT BAL function 1 Press the WHT BAL function button (H) so
button (H) to display the direct menu that the color temperature value is
the shooting conditions.
(page 47), and select Manual. displayed on a white background.

2 Select B, A, or PRESET using the WHT BAL 2 Turn the multi-function dial to adjust the
switch (K). value.
ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance) B: Memory B mode
[Tips]
A: Memory A mode ˎˎ In preset mode, you can set the value in 100K units.
This function adjusts the white balance PRESET: Preset mode ˎˎ In memory mode, you can set the value in 20K
automatically to an appropriate level. units. You can also adjust the tint value using White
[Tip] (page 87) >Tint in the Shooting menu.
The white balance is automatically adjusted ATW can be enabled for memory B by setting White
when the color temperature of the light source Setting >White Switch<B> (page 87) in the Shooting
changes. menu to ATW. Running auto white balance
Press and hold the WHT BAL function button
The white balance to save in memory A/
(H) to display the direct menu (page 47) Memory A/Memory B mode
memory B mode is configured automatically.
and select ATW. This mode adjusts the white balance to the
You can select the speed of adjustment setting saved in memory A or B, respectively. 1 Select memory A mode or memory B
(five steps) using White Setting >ATW Speed mode.
(page 87) in the Shooting menu. Preset mode
[Tip] This mode adjusts the color temperature to a 2 Place white paper (or other object) in a
You can freeze the current white balance setting by preset value (factory default is 3200K). location with the same lighting source
assigning the ATW Hold function to an assignable and conditions as the subject, then zoom
button (page 47), and pressing the assignable button
to temporarily pause ATW mode.
Changing the default preset value in on the paper to show white on the
screen.
[Notes] In preset mode, you can change an existing
ˎˎ ATW cannot be used in Cine EI mode.
ˎˎ It may not be possible to adjust to the appropriate
preset value directly.
3 Adjust the brightness.
color using ATW, depending on the lighting and Adjust the iris using the procedure in
subject conditions.
“Adjusting the iris manually” (page 41).
45 3. Shooting

Setting the Audio to Record

You can specify the audio to be recorded
using the input connectors, switches, and dials Selecting the Audio Input Device Connected device Switch position
Adjusting the Audio Recording
External audio source (e.g. LINE
of the camcorder. mixer) Level Manually
External audio input connectors and 1 Select the audio input connector. Dynamic microphone,
battery-operated
MIC
For CH1/CH2, select the audio input using Use the following procedure to adjust the
selector switches the CH1 INPUT select switch or CH2 INPUT microphone
audio recording level for CH1/CH2.
select switch. +48 V phantom power MIC+48V
INPUT1 connector (page 8)
Set to EXT to use the INPUT1 connector or feed microphone 1 Set the CH1/CH2 (AUTO/MAN) switches for
INPUT2 connector (page 8) the channels to adjust manually to MAN.
INPUT2 connector.
Multi-interface shoe (page 4)
If using a shoe microphone, XLR adaptor, ˎˎSelecting MIC+48V and connecting
CH1 INPUT select switch (page 7)
CH2 INPUT select switch (page 7)
UWP (UHF wireless microphone) device,
a microphone that is not compatible
with a +48V source may damage the
2 During shooting or standby, turn the
or portable wireless tuner, specify MI AUDIO LEVEL (CH1)/(CH2) dials of the
INPUT1 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch connected device. Check the setting
SHOE in the same way. For details about corresponding channels to adjust the
(page 4) before connecting the device.
the XLR adaptor, see “Adding Audio Input audio level.
INPUT2 (LINE/MIC/MIC+48V) switch ˎˎIf noise is a concern on connectors
Connectors” (page 46). ˎˎFor CH3/CH4, set Audio Input >CH3 Level
(page 4) with no device connected, set the
For details about portable wireless tuners, Control* and CH4 Level Control* in the
corresponding INPUT1/INPUT2 (LINE/
see “Using a Portable Wireless Tuner” Audio menu to Manual, and then set the
Switches for setting the audio level (page 46).
MIC/MIC+48V) switches to LINE.
audio recording level using the AUDIO
For CH3/CH4, select the audio input using LEVEL(CH3)/(CH4) dials.
CH1 (AUTO/MAN) switch (page 7)
Audio Input >CH3 Input Select* ˎˎYou can adjust the levels for CH1 to
CH2 (AUTO/MAN) switch (page 7)
(page 108) and CH4 Input Select* CH4 as a group. You can adjust the
AUDIO LEVEL (CH1) dial (page 7)
(page 108) in the Audio menu. Adjusting the Audio Recording recording level using an assignable dial
AUDIO LEVEL (CH2) dial (page 7) * Can also be configured on the status screen. (page 47) assigned with the Audio
AUDIO LEVEL (CH3) dial (page 7) Level Automatically Input Level function, or using Audio
AUDIO LEVEL (CH4) dial (page 7) [Tip]
For CH2, you can also select INPUT1 using Audio Input >Audio Input Level* in the Audio
Input >CH2 EXT Input Select* (page 108) in the Set the CH1/CH2 (AUTO/MAN) switches for the menu.
Audio menu.
channels to adjust automatically to AUTO. * Can also be configured on the status screen.
* Can also be configured on the status screen.
For CH3/CH4, set Audio Input >CH3 Level
[Note] [Tip]
Control* and CH4 Level Control* in the Audio The Audio Status screen is convenient for checking the
The camcorder has a built-in narration microphone
for recording ambient sound. It can be used for
menu to Auto (page 108). audio input level (page 15).
* Can also be configured on the status screen.
syncing the timing with other equipment. In such
[Notes]
cases, specify INT or Internal MIC.
ˎˎ The Audio Input Level settings may be disabled,
depending on the combination of settings in
2 Select the input audio source. the Audio menu. For details, see the diagram on
page 146.
Set the INPUT1/INPUT2 (LINE/MIC/
ˎˎ If either the CH1 INPUT select switch or CH2 INPUT
MIC+48V) switches to the devices select switch is set to INT, CH2 is switched to
connected to the INPUT1/INPUT2 automatic/manual in conjunction with the CH1
connectors, respectively. (AUTO/MAN) switch. Also, the CH2 audio recording
level is set in conjunction with the AUDIO LEVEL (CH1)
dial.
ˎˎ The camcorder supports combinations of various
settings. For details, see the diagram on page 146.
46 3. Shooting: Setting the Audio to Record

Adding Audio Input Connectors Using a Portable Wireless Tuner

You can connect up to four channels of XLR An XDCA-FX9 Extension Unit (option) is
audio devices to the camcorder at the same required. For details about attaching an XDCA-
time by using an XLR-K2M XLR adaptor FX9, see page 25.
(not supplied) or XLR-K3M XLR adaptor (not With a portable wireless tuner attached to the
supplied). XDCA-FX9, set Audio Input (page 108) >CH1
Attach the XLR adaptor to the multi-interface MI SHOE Input Select*, CH2 MI SHOE Input
shoe, and set Audio Input >CH3 Input Select* Select*, CH3 Input Select*, or CH4 Input Select*
to Shoe CH1 and CH4 Input Select* to Shoe in the Audio menu to Wireless.
CH2 in the Audio menu. * Can also be configured on the status screen.
Camcorder functions that overlap will be
disabled for channels on which the XLR
adaptor is selected as the input. Use the
switches and dials on the XLR adaptor to
perform adjustments.
* Can also be configured on the status screen.

[Notes]
ˎˎ The camcorder supports the digital audio interface of
the XLR-K3M.
ˎˎ If Audio Input >CH3 Level and CH4 Level in the Audio
menu are set to Audio Input Level, then Audio Input
Level on the camcorder will be set to match the level
adjusted on the XLR adaptor.
Audio Input Level is also enabled when the XLR
adaptor switch is set to AUTO.
When “Through” is specified, audio will be recorded at
the level adjusted with the XLR adaptor (page 147).
ˎˎ To attach an XLR-K2M XLR adaptor (not supplied) or
XLR-K3M XLR adaptor (not supplied) to the camcorder,
remove the microphone holder from the camcorder.
47 3. Shooting

Useful Functions
Press the assignable button assigned with Button 6 Off
Direct Menu Operation Direct Menu again or wait 3 seconds Button 7 Off
Function LED on/off status
Push AF/Push MF Lit only while function
without performing any action to exit the Button 8 Off is operating
You can check the status and settings of the direct menu. Button 9 Off
Focus Hold Lit only while function
camcorder displayed on the viewfinder screen, [Tips] Button 10 Focus Magnifier x3/x6
is operating
and directly select and change the settings. ˎˎ Direct settings can also be configured by pressing Focus Hold button Focus Hold
Focus Magnifier x3/x6 Lit when not Off
The following items can be configured. and holding each of the function buttons
(page 6). (x3/x6)
ˎˎFace/Eye Detection AF Assignable functions Focus Magnifier x3 Lit when On
ˎˎ When items are displayed on a white
ˎˎSteady Shot background, the multi-function dial can be used Depending on the function, assignable button
Focus Magnifier x6 Lit when On
ˎˎWhite Mode like an assignable dial. (1 to 3, 7 to 9) numbers light up according to
ˎˎColor Temp ˎˎ The multi selector (page 9) can also be used the status of the function. S&Q Motion Lit when On
for selection operations. SteadyShot Lit when not Off
ˎˎScene File –: Does not light up
ˎˎND Filter Position / Auto ND Filter (Active/Standard)
Function LED on/off status
ˎˎND Filter Value Crop Select –
Off –
ˎˎAuto Iris Rec Lit or flashing in
ˎˎIris Value Assignable Buttons/Dials Base ISO/Sensitivity – conjunction with
ˎˎAGC AGC Lit when On recording/tally lamp
ˎˎGain Value Push AGC Lit only while function Picture Cache Rec Lit when On
There are ten assignable buttons (page 6,
ˎˎISO Value is operating Rec Review Lit during recording
9) on the camcorder to which you can
ˎˎEI Gain Value ND Filter Position – review
assign functions.
ˎˎAuto Shutter Auto ND Filter Lit when On Last Clip Del. –
You can also assign functions to the
ˎˎShutter Value Push Auto ND Lit only while function
assignable dial (page 9) on the grip Shot Mark1 –
ˎˎAuto Exposure Mode is operating
remote control and to the multi-function dial Shot Mark2 –
ˎˎAuto Exposure Level
on the camcorder. Auto Iris Lit when On Clip Flag OK –
ˎˎS&Q Motion Frame Rate
Assignable buttons 1 to 3 and 7 to 9 have a Push Auto Iris Lit only while function
1 Press the multi-function dial, or an built-in LED that turns on/off (orange when is operating
Clip Flag NG
Clip Flag Keep
–
–
assignable button assigned with the lit) according to the status of the assigned Auto Shutter Lit when On
Direct Menu function. function. Color Bars Lit when On
Auto Exposure Level –
Only the items on the screen that can be Tally [Front] Lit when On
Backlight Lit in backlight mode
configured using the direct menu are Changing the button function Spotlight Lit in spotlight mode
CALL Lit when On
selectable using the orange cursor. DURATION/TC/U-BIT –
Use Assignable Button (page 94) in the Preset White Select –
Display –
2 Turn the multi-function dial to move the
Project menu.
You can view the assigned functions on the
ATW
ATW Hold
Lit when On
Lit when On
Lens Info Lit when not Off
cursor to the menu item to operate, then (Meter/Feet)
Assignable Button Status screen (page 16). AF Speed/Sens. –
press the multi-function dial. Video Signal Monitor List when not Off
A menu is displayed or the item is Focus Zero Marker – (Waveform/Vector/
displayed on a white background. Functions assigned to each assignable button Focus Setting – Histogram)
by factory default Focus Area – Marker Lit when On
3 Turn the multi-function dial to select a Button 1
Button 2
S&Q Motion
Off
Focus Area(AF-S) – VF Adjust –
setting, then press the multi-function dial. Face/Eye Detection AF Lit when face/eye VF Mode Lit in B&W mode
The menu or white background Button 3 Off
detection AF is active Gamma Display Assist Lit when On
disappears and the new setting is Button 4 Focus Magnifier x3/x6
Button 5 Direct Menu Push AF Mode – Peaking Lit when On
displayed with an orange cursor.
48 3. Shooting: Useful Functions

Functions assignable to the assignable dial

Function LED on/off status
ˎˎOff
Slow & Quick Motion
Zebra Lit when On
Audio Monitor CH – ˎˎISO/Gain/EI
ˎˎND Filter When the recording format (page 91) is set to the following values, you can specify different
Audio Mon. CH Switch –
ˎˎIRIS values for the shooting frame rate and playback frame rate.
Thumbnail –
ˎˎAudio Input Level Recording format Frame rate
Touch Operation Lit when On
Handle Zoom – You can view the assigned functions on the System frequency Imager scan mode Codec Video format

NFC – Assignable Button Status screen (page 16). 59.94/50 FFcrop 5K/S35 4K XAVC-I 4096×2160P 1–60

Network Client Mode Flashing when On 3840×2160P 1–60

Lit when connected to 1920×1080P 1–60
Connection Control XAVC-L 3840×2160P 1–60
Manager (CCM) 1920×1080P 1–60
Auto Upload (Proxy) Lit when On or Chunk FF 2K XAVC-I 1920×1080P 1–60, 100, 120, 150, 180*1
Direct Menu – XAVC-L 1920×1080P 1–60, 100, 120
User Menu – S35 2K XAVC-I 1920×1080P 1–60, 100, 120
Menu – XAVC-L 1920×1080P 1–60, 100, 120
S16 2K XAVC-I 1920×1080P 1–60, 100, 120, 150, 180*1
XAVC-L 1920×1080P 1–60, 100, 120
Changing the dial function
29.97/25/23.98 FF 6K XAVC-I 4096×2160P 1-30
You can change the function of the multi- 3840×2160P 1–30
function dial on the camcorder and the 1920×1080P 1–30
assignable dial on the grip remote control. XAVC-L 3840×2160P 1–30
For the multi-function dial, set using Multi
1920×1080P 1–30
Function Dial (page 96) >Default Function in
the Project menu. FFcrop 5K/S35 4K XAVC-I 4096×2160P 1–60
Off is assigned by factory default. 3840×2160P 1–60
1920×1080P 1–60
Functions assignable to the multi-function XAVC-L 3840×2160P 1–60
dial 1920×1080P 1–60
ˎˎOff FF 2K XAVC-I 1920×1080P 1–60, 100, 120, 150, 180*2
ˎˎIRIS XAVC-L 1920×1080P 1–60, 100, 120
ˎˎISO/Gain/EI S35 2K XAVC-I 1920×1080P 1–60, 100, 120
ˎˎAudio Input Level XAVC-L 1920×1080P 1–60, 100, 120
[Note] S16 2K XAVC-I 1920×1080P 1–60, 100, 120, 150, 180*2
The setting is disabled while the menu is displayed.
XAVC-L 1920×1080P 1–60, 100, 120
24 FF 6K XAVC-I 4096×2160P 1-30
For the assignable dial, set using Assignable
Dial (page 96) in the Project menu. FFcrop 5K/S35 4K XAVC-I 4096×2160P 1–60
IRIS is assigned by factory default. *1 Can be selected when the system frequency is 59.94.
*2 Can be selected when the system frequency is 29.97/23.98.
49 3. Shooting: Useful Functions

You can turn Slow & Quick Motion mode

Recording format Frame rate
on/off by pressing an assignable button Recording Video Intermittently
System frequency Imager scan mode Codec RAW format
59.94/50 FFcrop 5K RAW/ 4096×2160 1–60
(page 47) assigned with the S&Q Motion (Interval Rec)
function.
RAW&XAVC-I*3/
You can set the frame rate for shooting by
RAW&XAVC-L*3
pressing and holding the button. The camcorder’s Interval Rec function allows
S35 4K RAW 4096×2160 1–60 you to capture time-lapse video to the
[Tip]
3840×2160 1–60, 100, 120 camcorder’s internal memory. This function
Can also be configured using S&Q Motion in the
RAW&XAVC-I / *3
4096×2160 1–60 Shooting menu, S&Q Frame Rate on the Main Status is an effective way to shoot slow-moving
RAW&XAVC-L*3 screen, and Rec Function on the Project Status screen. subjects.
FF 2K RAW/ 2048×1080 1–60, 100, 120, 150, 180*1 [Notes] When you start recording, the camcorder
RAW&XAVC-I*3 ˎˎ Slow & Quick Motion cannot be set during recording, automatically records a specified number of
RAW&XAVC-L*3 2048×1080 1–60, 100, 120 playback, or while the thumbnail screen is displayed. frames at a specified interval time.
ˎˎ Audio recording is not supported in Slow & Quick Shooting interval (Interval Time)
S35 2K RAW/ 2048×1080 1–60, 100, 120 Motion mode.
RAW&XAVC-I*3/ ˎˎ The auto focus function, auto iris function, and auto
RAW&XAVC-L*3 shutter function are disabled in Slow & Quick Motion
mode.
S16 2K RAW/ 2048×1080 1–60, 100, 120, 150, 180*1
ˎˎ For details about using RAW output, see page 57.
RAW&XAVC-I*3
RAW&XAVC-L*3 2048×1080 1–60, 100, 120
29.97/25/23.98 FF 6K RAW/ 4096×2160 1–30
RAW&XAVC-I*3/
RAW&XAVC-L*3
FFcrop 5K RAW/ 4096×2160 1–60
RAW&XAVC-I*3/
RAW&XAVC-L*3
S35 4K RAW 4096×2160 1–60
3840×2160 1–60, 100, 120
Number of frames in one take
RAW&XAVC-I*3/ 4096×2160 1–60
(Number of Frames)
RAW&XAVC-L*3
FF 2K RAW/ 2048×1080 1–60, 100, 120, 150, 180*2 When Interval Rec is enabled, the HVL-LBPC
RAW&XAVC-I*3 (option) video light automatically turns on
RAW&XAVC-L*3 2048×1080 1–60, 100, 120 before recording starts, which allows you to
S35 2K RAW/ 2048×1080 1–60, 100, 120 record pictures under stable light and color
RAW&XAVC-I*3/ temperature conditions (pre-lighting function).
RAW&XAVC-L*3 [Notes]
S16 2K RAW/ 2048×1080 1–60, 100, 120, 150, 180*2 ˎˎ Only one special recording function, such as Interval
Rec recording, can be used at any one time.
RAW&XAVC-I*3
ˎˎ If another special recording mode is enabled while
RAW&XAVC-L*3 2048×1080 1–60, 100, 120 Interval Rec is in use, Interval Rec is automatically
24 FF 6K RAW 4096×2160 1–30 released.
ˎˎ Interval Rec mode is automatically released after
FFcrop 5K/S35 4K RAW 4096×2160 1–60 changing system settings, such as the video format.
*1 Can be selected when the system frequency is 59.94. ˎˎ Interval Rec settings cannot be changed during
*2 Can be selected when the system frequency is 29.97/23.98. recording or playback, or when the thumbnail screen
is displayed.
*3 Video format becomes 1920×1080.
50 3. Shooting: Useful Functions

To set Interval Rec To exit Interval Rec mode Recording Cached Pictures (Picture Codec Video System Cache
format frequency time [s]
Set Interval Rec (page 93) >Setting in Do one of the following. Cache Rec) XAVC-I 1920×1080P 59.94 0–4/
the Project menu to On, and set Number of ˎˎSet the POWER switch to Off. 4–8 s
50
Frames and Interval Time. ˎˎIn recording standby mode, set Interval Rec
If using the HVL-LBPC video light (option), >Setting in the Project menu to Off. The Picture Cache Rec function allows you 29.97 0–4/
to capture video retroactively when you 25 4–8/
set the time interval for turning on the video Also, Interval Rec mode is automatically
start recording and then record it to XQD 8–12/
light before recording starts using Interval Rec released when the camcorder is restarted.
memory cards by maintaining an internal 12–16/
>Pre-Lighting in the Project menu, as required.
16–20/
[Tip] Limitations during recording cache memory of a specified duration when
20–24 s
Can also be configured using Rec Function on the shooting. Set Picture Cache Rec >Setting*
(page 94) in the Project menu to On. 23.98 0–4/
Project Status screen. ˎˎAudio is not recorded.
The picture cache recording time is set 4–8/
[Notes] ˎˎReviewing the recording (Rec Review) is not
using Picture Cache Rec >Cache Rec Time 8–12/
ˎˎ If you want to turn the video light on before the start possible.
12–16/
of recording, set the video light switch to AUTO. The ˎˎGenlock is not applied. (page 94) in the Project menu.
video light turns on and off automatically according * Can also be configured on the status screen. 16–20/
to the setting of Video Light Set (page 114) in the 20–24/
If the camcorder is turned off during 24–28 s
Technical menu.
Supported recording formats
ˎˎ If you turn the video light switch on, the video recording 1920×1080i 59.94 0–4/
light is always lit (video light does not turn on/off
4–8/
automatically). Codec Video System Cache
ˎˎIf the POWER switch on the camcorder is set 8–12/
ˎˎ If the video light is configured so that it will turn off format frequency time [s]
for a duration of 5 seconds or less, the video light to the Off position, the media is accessed for 12–16/
does not turn off. several seconds to record the images stored XAVC-I 4096×2160P 59.94 0–4 s 16–20 s
in memory up till that moment, and then 50 1920×1080i 50 0–4/
The camcorder exits Interval Rec mode when the power turns off automatically. 29.97 4–8/
it is powered off, but the Number of Frames, ˎˎIf power is lost because the battery 25 0–4/ 8–12/
Interval Time, and Pre-lighting settings are was removed, the DC power cord was 4–8 s 12–16/
23.98
maintained. You do not need to set them disconnected, or the power was turned off 16–20/
24
again the next time you shoot in Interval Rec from the AC adaptor, then the video and 20–24 s
audio data shot up to that point may be 3840×2160P 59.94 0–4 s
mode. XAVC-L 3840×2160P 59.94 0–4/
lost (maximum 10 seconds). Care should be 50 4–8/
50
To shoot using Interval Rec exercised when exchanging the battery. 29.97 8–12/
25 0–4/ 12–16 s
Press the record START/STOP button to start 23.98 4–8 s 29.97 0–4/
recording. “Int Rec” and “Int Stby” appear 25 4–8/
alternately in the viewfinder. 23.98
8–12/
If you are using the pre-lighting function, the 12–16/
video light turns on before recording starts. 16–20/
20–24/
To stop shooting 24–28 s

Stop the recording.

When shooting ends, the video data stored
in memory up to that point is written to the
media.
51 3. Shooting: Useful Functions

[Notes] ˎˎ Video is stored in cache memory when the Picture

Codec Video
format
System
frequency
Cache
time [s] ˎˎ Picture Cache Rec cannot be set to On at the same Cache Rec function is set to On. Video prior to the Changing the Settings of the
time as Interval Rec or Slow & Quick Motion. When function being set to On is not cached.
XAVC-L 1920×1080P 59.94 0–4/ Picture Cache Rec is set to On, these other recording ˎˎ Video is not stored in cache memory while an XQD Record START/STOP Buttons on
50 50 4–8/ modes are forcibly set to Off. memory card is being accessed, such as during

29.97
8–12/ ˎˎ Picture Cache Rec mode cannot be selected while playback, Rec Review, or thumbnail screen display. the Camcorder and Handle
recording or Rec Review is in progress. Picture cache recording of video during that interval
12–16/
25 ˎˎ When Picture Cache Rec is set to On, the timecode is is not possible.
16–20/
23.98
recorded in Free Run mode regardless of the setting When simultaneous recording (Simul Rec) is
20–24/ in the TC/Media menu (page 103). enabled, you can start/stop recording to each
24–28 s ˎˎ The Output Format setting may not be configurable in
Picture Cache Rec mode. If this occurs, temporarily set
memory card independently using the record
1920×1080P 59.94 0–4/
35 50 4–8/
Picture Cache Rec to Off, and then change the setting. Recording to Memory Cards A and START/STOP buttons on the camcorder and
the handle.
8–12/
29.97
12–16/ Configuring before shooting B Simultaneously (2-slot Simul By factory default, both buttons are set to
25 start/stop simultaneous recording to both
23.98
16–20/
Configure Picture Cache Rec (page 94) in
Rec) memory cards A and B.
20–24/
24–28 s the Project menu before shooting. ˎˎ“Rec Button [SlotA SlotB] Handle Rec Button
You can also assign the Picture Cache Rec You can record to both memory card A and [SlotA SlotB]”
1920×1080i 59.94 0–4/
function to an assignable button (page 47) memory card B simultaneously by setting When the buttons are set to control recording
50 50 4–8/
and switch Picture Cache Rec >Setting Simul Rec >Setting* in the Project menu to On. for different memory cards, SDI/HDMI Rec
8–12/
12–16/ between On and Off using the button. * Can also be configured on the status screen. Control follows the recording state of slot A.
16–20/ When configured, the “” ( is green) [Note]
20–24/ indicator appears in the viewfinder. Simultaneous recording is not supported in Slow & To change the setting
24–28 s Quick Motion mode (page 89) or Picture Cache
Starting picture cache recording Rec mode (page 94). Also, simultaneous recording Select Simul Rec >Rec Button Set in the Project
1920×1080i 59.94 0–4/ is not supported for the following recording formats menu.
35 50 4–8/ (page 91).
8–12/ When you press the record START/STOP Rec Button Set Buttons and memory
12–16/ button, recording starts and video is written cards
to XQD memory cards starting from the video XAVC-I
16–20/ “Rec Button [SlotA Starts/stops
stored in the cache memory. Video format
20–24/ SlotB] Handle Rec simultaneously
4096×2160P, 3840×2160P
24–28 s Button [SlotA SlotB]” recording to memory
1920×1080i 59.94 0–4/ To cancel Picture Cache Rec cards A and B using
25 50 4–8/ XAVC-L either button.
8–12/ Set Picture Cache Rec >Setting in the Project Video format
“Rec Button [SlotA] The record START/STOP
12–16/ menu to Off, or press an assignable button 4096×2160P, 3840×2160P
Handle Rec Button button starts/stops
16–20/ assigned with the Picture Cache Rec function. [SlotB]” recording to memory
20–24/ [Notes] card A, and the record
24–28 s ˎˎ Changing the recording format clears the video in START/STOP button on
MPEG 1920×1080i 59.94 0–4/ cache memory stored up to that point, and starts the handle starts/stops
caching new video. Consequently, picture cache
HD422 50 50 4–8/ recording to memory
recording of pictures before changing format is not
8–12/ card B.
29.97 possible, even if you start recording immediately after
12–16/ changing format.
25
16–20/ ˎˎ If Picture Cache Rec is set to On or Off immediately
23.98 20–24/ after inserting an XQD memory card, cache data may
24–28 s not be recorded on the card.
52 3. Shooting: Useful Functions

Rec Button Set Buttons and memory

Video Signal Monitor High Dynamic Range (HDR) Selecting the viewfinder display when
cards
the gamma display assist function is
“Rec Button [SlotB] The record START/STOP Shooting
Handle Rec Button button starts/stops You can set the type of video signal to display enabled
[SlotA]” recording to memory on the viewfinder screen to waveform,
You can set high dynamic range (HDR) mode There are two display methods supported for
card B, and the record vectorscope, or histogram using Display On/
START/STOP button on to record and output images with BT.2020 displaying HDR images in the viewfinder when
Off >Video Signal Monitor (page 106) in the
the handle starts/stops equivalent color space and increased dynamic the gamma display assist function is enabled.
Monitoring menu.
recording to memory The video signal monitor of the camcorder range.
card A. measures the video signal in the video output Displaying HDR with maintained contrast
stage. Accordingly, if the output video is edge Setting high dynamic range mode between low luminance areas and high
cropped with respect to the recorded video,
Set Base Setting >Shooting Mode*
luminance areas
the cropped signal component will not be This method takes advantage of the
(page 91) in the Project menu to HDR.
measured. When this occurs, “EC” is displayed expressive power of HDR to display the image
4K & HD (Sub) Recording at the top left of the video signal monitor. * Can also be configured on the status screen. in the viewfinder without causing crushed
blacks or blown out highlights, even when
You can simultaneously record a 4K (QFHD)
Setting the type of HLG shooting with bright or dark exposure. On the
video as a main clip and an MPEG HD422 other hand, there is a slight decrease in overall
Set the type of HLG for HDR mode using HDR contrast.
video as a sub-clip, which can be used for Paint Setting >HLG Look (page 99) in the
editing, to a single XQD memory card. To use this display method, set HDR Setting
Paint menu. >VF SDR Preview (page 93) in the Project
The following XQD memory card recording
formats can be used for 4K & HD (Sub) Monitoring target display HLG Look setting Description menu to Off.
recording. Natural Characteristic conforming
The sub-clip recording format varies, In Cine EI mode, the color space setting to ITU-R BT.2100(HLG). Displaying SDR by simple conversion from
depending on the system frequency of the (page 27) or monitor LUT setting Live Characteristic conforming HDR to SDR
main clip. (page 89) information is displayed at to ITU-R BT.2100(HLG) that This method supports camera operation with
the top right of the video signal monitor to delivers improved HDR the same approach as conventional SDR.
Main clip System Sub-clip
indicate the target of monitoring. performance. However, You can adjust the brightness of the HDR
recording format frequency recording
format using this setting may image by setting the gain difference between
increase the noise level. HDR and SDR using SDR Gain.
ˎˎ XAVC-I 29.97/25/ MPEG HD422
To use this display method, configure using
4096×2160P 23.98 1920×1080P
the following procedure.
ˎˎ XAVC-I
Setting the gamma display assist
3840×2160P 1 Set HDR Setting >VF SDR Preview
ˎˎ XAVC-L 59.94/50 MPEG HD422 function (page 93) in the Project menu to On.
3840×2160P 1920×1080i
Set Gamma Display Assist >Setting
(page 107) in the Monitoring menu to On to 2 Adjust the SDR gain value in HDR mode
[Tip] using HDR Setting >SDR Gain (page 93)
Sub-clips can be copied to other media as main clips
view an assisted display in the viewfinder that
makes shooting in HDR mode easier. in the Project menu.
using Copy Sub Clip (page 110) in the Thumbnail
menu. * Can also be configured on the status screen. [Tip]
When converting the display from an HDR image to
SDR using SR Live Metadata after shooting, SDR Gain
is applied to the conversion so that the SDR image
display has the same exposure that was viewed in the
viewfinder at the time of shooting.
53 3. Shooting: Useful Functions

User 3D LUT 4 Select a file to load.

adjusted to the same aspect ratio as when
you directly see the subject on the viewfinder
screen.
In Cine EI mode, you can load a CUBE file De-squeeze display is configured using VF
(*.cube) for a 17-point or 33-point 3D LUT Setting >De-Squeeze (page 107) in the
created using RAW Viewer or DaVinci Resolve Monitoring menu.
(by Blackmagic Design Pty. Ltd.) from an SD [Note]
card or a cloud service. A marker is displayed in the viewfinder only when De-
Squeeze is set to 1.3x or 2.0x. It is not displayed in the
[Note] image output. Also, Marker >Aspect Select (page 106)
Save the user 3D LUT file in the following directory on in the Monitoring menu is set to 2.39:1 (fixed).
the SD card.
\PRIVATE\SONY\PRO\LUT\
4 Select a file to load.
5 Select OK.
The following procedure is required in order to The selected file is loaded.
use user 3D LUT. Changing the Audio Channels
6 Select OK.
using Button Operation
Loading from an SD card
7 Select Monitor LUT >Category (page 89)
1 Insert the SD card into the UTILITY SD/MS >User 3D LUT in the Shooting menu. You can change the combination of audio
card slot (page 8) with the label facing channels configured using Audio Output
right.
8 Select the user 3D LUT you want to use
>Monitor CH (page 109) in the Audio menu
using assignable buttons.
using Monitor LUT >User 3D LUT Select 5 Select OK.
2 Select Monitor 3D LUT >Load from Utility (page 89) in the Shooting menu. The selected file is loaded.
You can select an audio channel to listen
to from the built-in speaker or headphones
SD/MS (page 90) in the Shooting
and check the audio being recorded on each
menu. Loading from a cloud service 6 Select OK. recording channel.

3 Select a load destination. 1 Connect to the unit from the “C3 Portal 7 Set Monitor LUT >Category (page 89) in Press an assignable button (page 47)
You can register up to 16 files in the App” smartphone application assigned with the Audio Monitor CH function
the Shooting to User 3D LUT.
internal memory of the unit. (page 68). and switch the audio channel as described
8 Select the user 3D LUT you want to use
below.
2 Select Monitor 3D LUT >Load from using Monitor LUT >User 3D LUT Select Current Monitor CH Setting after switching
Cloud(Private) or Load from Cloud(Share) (page 89) in the Shooting menu. setting using Audio Monitor
(page 90) in the Shooting menu. CH
CH1/CH2 CH1
3 Select a load destination. CH3/CH4 CH3
You can register up to 16 files in the Configuring De-squeeze Display MIX ALL Not applicable
internal memory of the unit. CH1 CH2

An anamorphic lens can be used to create CH2 CH1/CH2

cinemascope-sized video content. CH3 CH4
By setting the de-squeeze display according CH4 CH3/CH4
to the magnification of the anamorphic
lens being used, you can display the image
54 3. Shooting: Useful Functions

Press an assignable button assigned with the information that it contains, such as file
Audio Mon. CH Switch function and switch the
Positioning
status
Display GPS reception state
Planning Metadata names, date and time of creation, and titles.
audio channel as described below. Off No GPS is set to Off or an Select Planning Metadata (page 97)
display error occurred. Planning metadata is information about >Properties >Execute in the Project menu.
Current Monitor CH Setting after switching
setting using Audio Mon. CH Positioning Location information shooting and recording plans recorded in an
Switch not could not be obtained XML file. Clearing the loaded planning metadata
CH1/CH2 CH3/CH4 available because GPS signal You can shoot using clip names and shot You can clear the planning data loaded in the
could not be received. mark names defined in advance in a planning camcorder memory.
CH3/CH4 CH1/CH2
Move to a location with metadata file. Select Planning Metadata (page 97) >Clear
MIX ALL Not applicable
a clear view of the sky. You can send and receive planning metadata Memory >Execute in the Project menu.
CH1 CH3 via a network using the “Content Browser
Searching Searching for GPS
CH2 CH4 for satellites satellites. Several Mobile” application. Defining a clip name in planning
CH3 CH1 minutes may be
required to acquire
[Notes] metadata
CH4 CH2 ˎˎ When the media slot cover is opened, the transfer
satellites. of planning metadata via the network is interrupted. The following two types of clip name strings
Positioning A weak GPS signal is Planning metadata cannot be transferred while the
[Tips]
cover is open. The transfer resumes when the cover
can be written in a planning metadata file.
ˎˎ When an assignable button assigned with Audio being received. ˎˎASCII-format name that is displayed on the
is closed.
Monitor CH or Audio Mon. CH Switch is pressed, the
A GPS signal is being ˎˎ To define clip names or shot mark names, use a viewfinder screen
current Monitor CH setting is displayed in a message.
received. Location font set for the language specified using Language ˎˎUTF-8 format name that is actually
ˎˎ To change the Monitor CH setting, press the Audio >Select (page 121) in the Maintenance menu. Text
Monitor CH or Audio Mon. CH Switch assignable information can be registered as the clip name
characters may not be displayed correctly if you use a
button while the current Monitor CH setting is acquired. When you specify a clip name in planning
language that is different from the language setting
displayed. A strong GPS signal is of the camcorder. metadata, the name is displayed under the
ˎˎ When Monitor CH is set to MIX ALL, the audio channel being received. ˎˎ If you define clip and shot mark names in French, operation status indication on the viewfinder
is not switched.
Location information Dutch, or Finnish, some characters are displayed in a screen.
can be acquired. different but similar font.

Loading a planning metadata file Example of clip name strings

[Tips]
Obtaining Location Information ˎˎ GPS is set to On by factory default. Location and
Use a text editor to modify the description for
time information of video shot when positioning is To record planning metadata together with the planning metadata <Title> tag.
(GPS) enabled is recorded by the camcorder. clips, it is necessary to load a planning The shaded fields in the example are clip
ˎˎ If a positioning icon is not displayed after several metadata file into the camcorder’s memory name strings.
minutes, there may be a problem with signal “Typhoon” is described in ASCII format (up to
When GPS in the Technical menu is set to reception. Start shooting without location information,
beforehand.
Insert the XQD memory card with the planning 44 characters). “Typhoon_Strikes” is described
On, is displayed when the camcorder is or move to an area with a clear view of the sky.
Shooting when a positioning icon is not displayed metadata file (.xml) saved to the directory in UTF-8 format (up to 44 bytes).
seeking GPS satellites. When positioning is
means that location information will not be recorded. below into the camcorder card slot, then select “sp” indicates a space and  indicates a
established, location information is recorded ˎˎ The GPS signal may not be received when indoors or and load the file using Planning Metadata carriage return.
when shooting video. near tall structures. Move to a location with a clear
view of the sky. (page 97) >Load from Media(A) or Load
[Notes] from Media(B) in the Project menu. <?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding="
ˎˎ The recording of location information may be
ˎˎ The GPS setting in the Technical menu cannot be set UTF-8"?>
to On when the handle is not attached, as the GPS
interrupted, depending on the strength of the exFAT: XDROOT/General/Sony/Planning
receiver is built into the handle.
received signal, even if a positioning icon is displayed. <PlanningMetadataspxmlns="http://
xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/
ˎˎ The icon displayed varies, depending on the signal Confirming the detailed information in
reception from the GPS satellites. planningmetadata" spassignId="
ˎˎ While using the GPS function, gripping the handle planning metadata P0001" spcreationDate="
may affect the positioning accuracy. After loading planning metadata into the
2011-08-20T17:00:00+09:00"sp
camcorder, you can check the detailed
lastUpdate="
55 3. Shooting: Useful Functions

2011-09-28T10:30:00+09:00"sp Defining shot mark names in planning Example of shot mark name strings Transferring planning metadata files
version="1.00"> Use a text editor to modify the description for
<Properties sppropertyId=" metadata the planning metadata <Meta name> tag. You can transfer a planning metadata file
assignment" spupdate=" The shaded fields in the example are shot together with original files or proxy files.
When you record shot mark 1 or shot mark 2,
2011-09-28T10:30:00+09:00"sp mark name strings. When Proxy Rec >Setting (page 93) in the
you can apply a name to the shot mark, using
modifiedBy="Chris"> Names can be either in ASCII-format (up Project menu is set to On, proxy recording to
a string defined in planning metadata.
<TitlespusAscii="Typhoon"sp to 32 characters) or UTF-8-format (up to 16 an SD card is enabled.
xml:lang="en">Typhoon_Strikes characters). For details about proxy recording, see
</Title> “sp” indicates a space and  indicates a “Recording and Uploading a Proxy File in
</Properties> carriage return. Chunks” (page 56). For details about
</PlanningMetadata> transferring original files and proxy files, see
[Note]
[Notes] If a name string contains even one non-ASCII character, “Uploading Files” (page 64).
ˎˎ When you create a file, enter each statement as a the maximum length of that string is limited to 16 [Note]
single line by breaking a line with a carriage return characters. Planning metadata files are not transferred in the
only after the last character of the line, and do not following cases.
enter spaces except where specified with “sp.”
<?xmlspversion="1.0"spencoding=" ˎˎ Recording stops due to Media Full error
ˎˎ A string of up to 44 bytes (or 44 characters) is valid as ˎˎ SLOT SELECT is pressed during recording or the
a clip name. UTF-8"?>
memory cards switch due to a memory card
If the UTF-8 format string exceeds 44 bytes, the first <PlanningMetadata xmlns="http:// becoming full
44 bytes are used as the clip name. xmlns.sony.net/pro/metadata/ ˎˎ When a clip recorded up to the maximum duration
If only a string in ASCII format is specified, the ASCII planningmetadata"spassignId=" splits
format name up to the 44th character is used as the
H00123"spcreationDate="
clip name.
When neither the ASCII format name string nor 2011-04-15T08:00:00Z"splastUpdate="
UTF-8-format name string is valid, a clip name in the 2011-04-15T15:00:00Z"spversion=
standard format is used. "1.00">
ˎˎ The following characters cannot be used in clip <PropertiessppropertyId=
names, and are replaced by an underscore character
(_). "assignment"spclass="original"sp
Invalid characters: "*/:<>?\| update="2011-04-15T15:00:00Z"sp
modifiedBy="Chris">
Using a clip name defined in planning <TitlespusAscii="Football
Game"spxml:lang="en">
metadata
Football Game 15/04/2011
Load a planning metadata file that contains
</Title>
the clip name into the memory of the
<Metaspname="_ShotMark1"sp
camcorder, then select Clip Name Format
content="Goal"/>
>Auto Naming (page 103) >Plan in the TC/
<Metaspname="_ShotMark2"sp
Media menu.
content="Shoot"/>
Clip names are generated by adding an
</Properties>
underscore (_) and a 5-digit serial number
</PlanningMetadata>
(00001 to 99999).
Example: Typhoon_Strikes_00001, Typhoon_ [Note]
When you create a file, enter each statement as a single
Strikes_00002, …
line by breaking a line with a carriage return only after
[Notes] the last character of the line, and do not enter spaces
ˎˎ If the serial number reaches 99999, it returns to 00001 except where specified with “sp” outside the shot mark
upon the next recording. name strings.
ˎˎ When you load another planning metadata file, the
5-digit serial number returns to 00001.
56 3. Shooting

Proxy Recording
You can record proxy data to an SD card at the
same time as recording to an XQD memory Recording a Proxy Recording and Uploading a Proxy About the Recorded File
card. File in Chunks
For details about supported SD cards, formatting SD cards, Press the record START/STOP button to start The file name extension is “.mp4”.
and checking the remaining capacity, see “Using a UTILITY the recording after completing the required The timecode is also recorded simultaneously.
SD/MS Card” (page 32). setting for shooting. When the auto upload setting is set to Chunk
and a proxy file is recorded in chunks, the
[Notes]
proxy file can be uploaded while the main
ˎˎ If the camcorder is turned off or the SD card is
recording is in progress.
removed while the SD card is being accessed, the
For details about uploading a proxy file
Storage Destination of the
Configuring Before Shooting integrity of data on the card cannot be guaranteed.
All data recorded on the card may be discarded.
Always make sure the access indicator is off before
recorded in chunks, see “Uploading Files Recorded File
Automatically” (page 65).
turning off the camcorder or removing the SD card.
1 Set Proxy Rec* >Setting in the Project ˎˎ Take caution to prevent the SD card from flying out
when inserting/ejecting the card.
1 Select Proxy Rec (page 93) in the The recorded file is stored in the “/PRIVATE/
menu to On. Project menu. PXROOT/Clip” directory.
* Can also be configured on the status screen.
To exit, stop the recording.
2 Select the chunk recording interval in
2 Insert the SD card into the UTILITY SD/MS
When the recording on an XQD memory
card is stopped, proxy data recording is also
Chunk.
card slot (page 8) with the label facing
stopped.
30s: Record proxy file in 30-second chunks About the File Name
right. (default setting).
[Note] 1min: Record proxy file in 1-minute chunks.
Proxy Rec cannot be set to On at the same time as S&Q 2min: Record proxy file in 2-minute The file name consists of the clip name
Motion, Interval Rec, Picture Cache Rec, 2-slot Simul chunks. recorded on the XQD memory card and a
Rec, or 4K & HD (Sub) Rec. When Proxy Rec is set to On, Changing Proxy Recording consecutive number suffix.
recording functions other than S&Q Motion are forcibly
set to Off. Settings 3 Set File Transfer >Auto Upload (Proxy)
In 2-slot Simul Rec mode, the clip name of slot
A has precedence.
When Proxy Rec is On and S&Q Motion is set to On, (page 120) in the Network menu to
Proxy Rec is temporarily set to Off. When S&Q Motion is The consecutive number is maintained even if
Chunk.
set to Off, Proxy Rec is set to On again. the camcorder is turned off. The consecutive
Setting the picture size number returns to 0001 by executing All Reset.
4 Start proxy recording. For details about clip names, see Clip Name
Select Proxy Rec >Proxy Format (page 93) in The proxy file is recorded in chunks with Format (page 103) in the TC/Media menu.
the Project menu, and set the picture size. the specified interval and each chunk is
registered in the job list as a transfer job.
Setting the audio channel [Note]
When Auto Upload (Proxy) is not set to Chunk, proxy
Select Proxy Rec >Audio Channel (page 93) recording in chunks does not occur.
in the Project menu, and set the audio channel
for proxy data recording.
57 3. Shooting

Recording RAW Video

You can record the RAW video signal output The supported RAW output formats are shown
from the RAW OUT connector of an XDCA- below. Recording control status display
FX9 (option) attached to the camcorder to an
external recorder. Project >Rec Format If Display On/Off (page 105) >RAW Output
1 Connect an external RAW recorder to the Frequency Codec Imager RAW Control Status in the Monitoring menu is set
to On, the RAW recording control status is
RAW OUT connector of the XDCA-FX9 Scan Output
attached to the camcorder. Mode Format displayed in the viewfinder using an icon.
59.94/50 RAW FFcrop 5K 4096×2160 [Note]
2 Set Base Setting >Shooting Mode* in the S35 4K 4096×2160/
3840×2160
The recording control signal is output from the RAW
OUT connector of the camcorder, but it is not possible
Project menu to Cine EI. to get the status of the external recorder. Accordingly,
FF 2K/ 2048×1080 the camcorder may indicate RAW video recording is

3 Set the codec using Rec Format >Codec*

S35 2K/
S16 2K
in progress when the external recorder is not actually
recording. Check the indicator on the external recorder
in the Project menu to RAW. to obtain the correct operating status.
RAW & FFcrop 4096×2160
Selecting RAW & XAVC-I will
XAVC-I/ 5K/ [Tip]
simultaneously record RAW video to the The RAW Output Format setting value is also displayed.
RAW & S35 4K
external RAW recorder and HD video to
XAVC-L/ FF 2K/ 2048×1080
the XQD memory cards in the camcorder. RAW & S35 2K/
MPEG HD S16 2K
4 Select the scan mode and resolution 422 Slow & Quick Motion Recording
using Rec Format >Imager Scan Mode* in 29.97/25/ RAW FF 6K/ 4096×2160
the Project menu. 23.98 FFcrop 5K
If S&Q Motion >Setting in the Shooting menu
S35 4K 4096×2160/
5 Check that the external recorder is turned 3840×2160
is set to On, RAW video is recorded in Slow &
Quick Motion mode.
on, then press the record START/STOP FF 2K/ 2048×1080 For details about the supported frame rates
button on the camcorder. S35 2K/ for shooting, see page 48.
[Note] S16 2K
When recording is started on an external recorder, RAW & FF 6K/ 4096×2160
without using the record button on the camcorder, XAVC-I/ FFcrop
clips may not be recorded properly.
RAW & 5K/
[Tip] XAVC-L/ S35 4K
Functions marked with an asterisk (*) can also be RAW & FF 2K/ 2048×1080
configured on the status screen. MPEG HD S35 2K/
422 S16 2K

24 RAW FF 6K/ 4096×2160

FFcrop
5K/
S35 4K
58 4. Network Functions

Connecting to Other Devices via LAN

The camcorder can connect to smartphones,
tablets, and other devices via LAN connection.
Streaming high quality video using Sony Connecting using Wireless LAN 3 Activate the NFC function.
QoS technology (page 66) Press and hold (for 3 seconds) an
Making a LAN connection between a device Access Point Mode assignable button assigned with NFC or
and the camcorder enables the following
You can stream high quality video using a select Wireless LAN >NFC in the Network
using the web remote control (page 69) or
Sony Network RX Station (sold separately) or menu to activate NFC connection mode.
“Content Browser Mobile” application. The camcorder works as an access point, and
C3 Portal* Connection Control Manager (CCM) The NFC function is available only while
ˎˎPlanning metadata (page 54) connects to a device via a wireless LAN.
connected with the camcorder in network appears on the screen.
Send and receive planning metadata using a
client mode. Smartphone/ Computer
device and camcorder.
You can send planning metadata created
* C3 Portal is a cloud service that is provided by Sony.
To use this service, registration is required.
tablet
4 Touch the camcorder using the device.
beforehand to the camcorder to specify clip C3 Portal is not provided in some regions. For details The device connects to the camcorder
names. on areas where the service is provided, refer to the and “Content Browser Mobile” starts.
following site.
ˎˎRemote operation via LAN https://www.c3p.sony.net
You can control the camcorder from a In addition, refer to the following sites for the privacy
smartphone, tablet, computer, or remote policy of C3 Portal.
control panel that is connected to the –– Terms of service
https://www.c3p.sony.net/site/tos_eu.html
camcorder via a LAN.
–– Privacy policy of C3 Portal
ˎˎFile transfer via LAN https://www.c3p.sony.net/site/c3p_privacy_policy.
You can transfer a proxy file (low resolution) html
that is recorded on an SD card in the –– Privacy policy of professional ID
https://www.pro-id.sony.net/#/privacyPolicy
camcorder or original file (high resolution)
For more details, contact a Sony professional sales
that is recorded by the camcorder to the representative.
server via a LAN.
[Notes]
ˎˎVideo monitoring via LAN ˎˎ Disable sleep mode and screen lock beforehand.
You can create a stream (H.264) from the Connecting to an NFC-compatible device ˎˎ Touch and hold the device still until the “Content
camera or playback video of the camcorder, Browser Mobile” application launches (1 to 2
Setting the User Name and with one-touch operation seconds).
and monitor the video using the “Content
Browser Mobile” application from a device Password Devices that support NFC can be connected
via a LAN. (one-touch connection) using NFC.

“Content Browser Mobile” application Set the user name and password of the 1 Open [Settings] on the device, select
camcorder in order to use the network [More], and place a check mark in the NFC
You can operate the camcorder remotely on function. checkbox.
the device screen while monitoring the video
from the camcorder, and configure settings
1 Set Access Authentication >User Name
(page 116) in the Network menu.
of the camcorder, using the “Content Browser
Mobile” application.
For details about the “Content Browser Mobile” application,
2 Set Access Authentication >Password
(page 116) in the Network menu.
contact your Sony sales or service representative.
[Tip]
Select manual entry (Input Password) or generate
2 Turn the camcorder on.
automatically (Generate Password).
59 4. Network Functions: Connecting to Other Devices via LAN

Connecting to a WPS-compatible device 3 Connect the device to the camcorder by Connecting using Wireless LAN 1 Turn the access point on.
selecting the camcorder SSID from the
Devices that support WPS can be connected
SSID list in Wi-Fi Network and entering the Station Mode 2 Turn the camcorder on.
using WPS.
password.
1 Select Wireless LAN >Setting >Access For the SSID and password of the
The camcorder connects to an existing access 3 Select Wireless LAN >Setting > Station
Point Mode in the Network menu. camcorder, check AP Mode Settings
point of the wireless LAN as a client. The Mode in the Network menu.
>Camera SSID & Password (page 116) in
camcorder and device connect via the access
2 Select Wireless LAN >WPS >Execute in the the Network menu.
point.
4 Select Wireless LAN >WPS >Execute in the
Network menu. [Note] The 10 most recently connected access points
The operation method differs depending on the Network menu.
are displayed in the history.
3 Open the device Network settings or Wi-Fi
device.
The connection history is saved in an ALL
5 Press the WPS button of the access point.
file, but the access passwords are not saved.
settings on the device, and turn Wi-Fi on.
4 Display the web remote control Password entry is required the next time you For details about the operation of the
(page 69). Or connect using the WPS button, refer to the operating
4 Select the camcorder SSID from the SSID Content Browser Mobile application.
connect after loading the ALL file.
instructions of the access point.
list in Wi-Fi Network on the device, then Smartphone/ Computer When the connection is successful, the
select WPS Push Button in Option on the tablet
network status indicator icon will show a
device to connect. strength of 1 or higher on the viewfinder
[Notes] screen.
ˎˎ The operation method differs depending on the [Note]
device.
If the connection fails, perform steps from step 1
ˎˎ For the SSID and password of the camcorder, again.
check AP Mode Settings >Camera SSID &
Password (page 116) in the Network menu.
6 Connect the device to the access point.
5 Display the web remote control
Access
point
For details about connecting, refer to the
(page 69). Or connect using the operating instructions of the device.
Content Browser Mobile application.
7 Display the web remote control
Connecting by inputting an SSID and (page 69). Or connect using the
Content Browser Mobile application.
password on a device
You can connect the camcorder to a device by
entering the SSID and password on a device.
1 Select Wireless LAN >Setting >Access
Point Mode in the Network menu.

2 Open the device Network settings or Wi-Fi Connecting to an access point using
settings on the device, and turn Wi-Fi on. WPS
If the access point is compatible with the WPS
function, you can connect to the access point
with simple settings.
60 4. Network Functions: Connecting to Other Devices via LAN

Connecting to an access point using 5 Configure the following connection 2 Select ST Mode Settings >Manual Register
This setting is available only when DNS
Auto is set to Off.
auto network detection or manually settings. (page 118) >Execute in the Network
ˎˎSecondary DNS Server
ˎˎDHCP menu.
Enter the address of the secondary DNS
You can configure connection to a desired Set the DHCP setting. Momentarily, the network (access point)
server.
access point from the setup menu. When you set to On, the IP address is details screen appears.
This setting is available only when DNS
You can configure connection to a desired assigned to the camcorder automatically.
Auto is set to Off.
access point using the auto network detection
function.
To assign the IP address to the
camcorder manually, set to Off.
3 Configure the following connection

ˎˎIP Address
settings.
ˎˎSSID
4 When finished, select Connect to connect
Connecting using the network auto detection Enter the IP address of the unit. to the access point.
Enter the SSID for the connection access
function This setting is available only when DHCP point.
is set to Off.
1 Perform steps 1 to 3 in “Connecting to an ˎˎSubnet Mask
ˎˎSecurity
Select the encryption method.
access point using WPS” (page 59). Enter the subnet mask of the unit. ˎˎPassword Connecting to a Device using a
This setting is available only when DHCP Enter the password for the connection
2 Select ST Mode Settings >Scan Networks is set to Off. access point.
LAN Cable
(page 117) >Execute in the Network ˎˎGateway ˎˎDHCP
menu. Enter the gateway for the access point. Set the DHCP setting. You can connect with a device by connecting
The camcorder starts detection of This setting is available only when DHCP When you set to On, the IP address is the wired LAN connector of the XDCA-FX9
connection destinations. is set to Off. assigned to the camcorder automatically. (page 25) attached to the camcorder to a
Possible destinations that are found are ˎˎDNS Auto To assign the IP address to the LAN switch using a LAN cable.
displayed in a list. Sets whether to acquire DNS camcorder manually, set to Off.
automatically. Computer
ˎˎIP Address
3 Select a destination from the list.
When set to On, the DNS server address
is automatically acquired. This setting is
Enter the IP address of the unit.
The network (access point) details screen This setting is available only when DHCP
available only when DHCP is set to On. is set to Off.
appears. The selected connection is
displayed in SSID. ˎˎPrimary DNS Server ˎˎSubnet Mask
Enter the primary DNS server for the Enter the subnet mask of the unit.
access point.
4 Select Password, and set the password on This setting is available only when DNS
This setting is available only when DHCP
is set to Off.
the password input screen. Auto is set to Off.
Selecting an SSID in the connection ˎˎGateway
ˎˎSecondary DNS Server Enter the address of the gateway. LAN switch
history automatically configures settings, Enter the secondary DNS server for the This setting is available only when DHCP
including the password. access point. is set to Off.
Set the password to return to the network This setting is available only when DNS
(access point) details screen. ˎˎDNS Auto
Auto is set to Off. Sets whether to acquire DNS
automatically.
6 When finished, select Connect to connect When set to On, the DNS server address
to the access point. is automatically acquired. This setting is
available only when DHCP is set to On.
Connecting manually ˎˎPrimary DNS Server
Enter the address of the primary DNS
1 Perform steps 1 to 3 in “Connecting to an server.
access point using WPS” (page 59).
61 4. Network Functions: Connecting to Other Devices via LAN

LAN cable connections and wired LAN This setting is available only when DNS
Auto is set to Off.
settings ˎˎSecondary DNS Server
Enter the address of the secondary DNS
1 Connect the wired LAN connector of the server.
XDCA-FX9 to a LAN switch using a LAN This setting is available only when DNS
cable. Auto is set to Off.

2 Turn the camcorder on. 5 When finished, select Set to apply the
settings.
3 Set Wired LAN >Setting (page 118) in the [Note]
Network menu to On. Always select Set after changing the connection
settings. The settings are not applied if Set is not

4 Configure connection settings using

selected.

Wired LAN >Detail Settings (page 118) in

the Network menu.
ˎˎDHCP
Set the DHCP setting.
When you set to On, the IP address is
assigned to the camcorder automatically.
To assign the IP address to the
camcorder manually, set to Off.
ˎˎIP Address
Enter the IP address of the unit.
This setting is available only when DHCP
is set to Off.
ˎˎSubnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask of the unit.
This setting is available only when DHCP
is set to Off.
ˎˎGateway
Enter the address of the gateway.
This setting is available only when DHCP
is set to Off.
ˎˎDNS Auto
Sets whether to acquire DNS
automatically.
When set to On, the DNS server address
is automatically acquired. This setting is
available only when DHCP is set to On.
ˎˎPrimary DNS Server
Enter the address of the primary DNS
server.
62 4. Network Functions

Connecting to the Internet

You can connect the camcorder to the Internet screen appears. Select settings according
using a modem, wired LAN, or wireless LAN. to the on-screen guidance. Connecting using Wireless LAN
[Note] Station Mode Smartphone/
It may take some time (about 1 minute) to connect tablet
to a 3G/4G network. Wait until the network status
Internet
Connecting using a Modem indicator (page 11) modem icon shows a
strength of 1 or higher on the viewfinder screen.
You can connect the camcorder to the Internet
in Wi-Fi station mode via an optional wireless
LAN router or by tethering to a device.
You can connect the camcorder to the Internet
via a 3G/4G network by attaching an XDCA- Smartphone/ Computer
FX9 (page 25) to the camcorder and an Connecting using USB Tethering tablet
optional modem to the XDCA-FX9.
Attaching and using more than one modem
You can connect a smartphone via a USB cable
at the same time enables high-quality
to an XDCA-FX9 attached to the camcorder,
streaming in network client mode, using two
and then connect to the internet using the
lines for higher quality streaming and device Connect to the wireless LAN router or device
smartphone.
redundancy. as described in “Connecting using Wireless
For details about compatible modems, LAN Station Mode” (page 59).
contact your Sony dealer or a Sony service Attaching a smartphone to the Wireless LAN
router
representative. camcorder
[Note]
A modem cannot be used at the same time as a wired Connect a smartphone via a USB cable to the
LAN. USB connector (Type A) (page 4) of an
Internet
XDCA-FX9 attached to the camcorder.
Attaching an XDCA-FX9 to the unit [Notes]
ˎˎ Attach/remove the smartphone while the camcorder
Attach a modem that supports the USB is turned off.
standard to the USB connector (Type A) of ˎˎ USB tethering cannot be used if the smartphone is
connected via a USB hub.
the XDCA-FX9. Two modems can be used
simultaneously by connecting modems to
both connectors. Connecting to a network
[Note]
Attach/remove the modem while the camcorder is 1 Turn the camcorder on.
turned off.

2 Set Modem >Setting in the Network menu

Connecting to a network to On.
If other settings must be changed to
1 Turn the camcorder on. enable this setting, a function selection
screen appears. Select settings according
2 Set Modem >Setting in the Network menu to the on-screen guidance.
to On.
If other settings must be changed to
enable this setting, a function selection
63 4. Network Functions: Connecting to the Internet

Connecting using a LAN Cable

You can connect with a device by connecting

the wired LAN connector of the XDCA-FX9
(page 25) attached to the camcorder to an
Internet router using a LAN cable.

Computer

Router

Internet

Connect to the Internet router as described in

“Connecting to a Device using a LAN Cable”
(page 60).
64 4. Network Functions

Uploading Files
You can upload a proxy file or original file that
is recorded on the camcorder to a server on
Port
Enter the port number of the server to
Root Certificate Status
Displays the load status of the certificate.
3 Select the clip you want to transfer, then
press the MENU button.
the Internet or a server on a local network via connect. Reset
A transfer confirmation screen appears.
a 3G/4G network or access point. User Name Reset the settings of Server Settings to
Enter the user name. the defaults.
[Notes]
ˎˎ When the media slot cover is opened, the transfer Password 4 Select Execute.
of files via the network is interrupted. Files cannot
be transferred while the cover is open. The transfer
Enter the password.
Passive Mode
3 When finished, select Set to apply the
The proxy file corresponding to the
selected file is registered as a transfer job,
resumes when the cover is closed.
settings.
Turn passive mode on/off. and uploading begins.
ˎˎ If playback is performed during file transfer, the Always select Set after changing the
Destination Directory When the transfer job is successfully
playback screen may become distorted. settings. The settings are not applied if
Enter the name of the directory on the registered, the transfer result screen
Set is not selected.
destination server. appears.
You can also register a server using the web
Preparations
[Notes]
ˎˎ When editing, “” indicates characters that remote control “Registering a destination 5 Select OK.
cannot be changed. Correct operation is not server” (page 70).
guaranteed when editing a directory name that
contains these characters.
To upload all files
If you need to edit, delete all the characters and Select All Clips instead of Select Clip in step 2
Connecting to a network re-enter a value. to transfer the proxy files corresponding to all

Connect the camcorder to the Internet or local

ˎˎ If characters that are invalid on the destination
server are entered in Destination Directory, files
Selecting a File and Uploading the files.
will be transferred to the user’s home directory. [Note]
network as described in “Connecting to the
Invalid characters will vary depending on the Up to 200 files can be transferred.
Internet” (page 62) or “Connecting to Other server. Upload a file that is recorded on an SD card
Devices via LAN” (page 58). or an original file that is recorded on an XQD
Using Secure Protocol
memory card to a server.
Uploading an original file on an XQD
Set whether to perform secure FTP
Registering a file transfer destination uploading. Files can also be uploaded via web remote memory card from the thumbnail screen
Root Certificate control. For details, see “Transferring files (Slot
Register the server for uploading in advance.
Load/clear a certificate. A, Slot B, Slot SD/MS)” (page 71). 1 Connect the camcorder and device using
1 Select File Transfer >Server Settings1 (or ˎˎLoad a LAN connection (page 58).
Server Settings2, Server Settings3) in the Select Set in step 3 to import a CA Uploading a proxy file on an SD card
Network menu. certificate.
* The certificate to be loaded must be in PEM
from the thumbnail screen 2 Select Transfer Clip >Select Clip in the
The transfer destination setup screen Thumbnail menu.
format, and should be written to the root
appears.
directory of the Utility SD card with “certification.
pem” file name.
1 Connect the camcorder and device using
The display changes from the setup menu
to the thumbnail screen.
a LAN connection (page 58).
2 Set each item on the transfer destination ˎˎClear Clips can be transferred from the
thumbnail screen or the filtered clip
setup screen.
Display Name
Select Set in step 3 to clear a CA
certificate.
2 Select Transfer Clip (Proxy) >Select Clip in thumbnail screen.
the Thumbnail menu.
Enter the name of the server to display in ˎˎNone
the transfer destination list. Do not load or clear a certificate.
The display changes from the setup menu
to the thumbnail screen.
3 Select the clip you want to transfer, then
Service [Notes] press the MENU button.
Clips can be transferred from the
Displays the server type. ˎˎ Set the clock of the camcorder to the correct time A transfer confirmation screen appears.
thumbnail screen or the filtered clip
“FTP”: FTP server before importing a CA certificate.
ˎˎ When recording in XAVC-I 3840×2160P 59.94/50P,
thumbnail screen.
Host Name
Load cannot be selected.
Enter the address of the server.
ˎˎ In low voltage state, Load/Clear cannot be
selected for a CA certificate.
65 4. Network Functions: Uploading Files

4 Select Execute.
the transfer destination server. In this case, check the
transfer destination server settings and status. Uploading using Secure FTP
The selected file is registered as a transfer
job, and uploading begins.
When the transfer job is successfully You can upload files with encryption
registered, the transfer result screen using FTPS in Explicit mode (FTPES) for the
appears.
Uploading Files Automatically connection with the destination file server.

5 Select OK.
Setting secure FTP transfer
Uploading an original file automatically For secure FTP transfer, set Using Secure
To upload all files Original files can be uploaded to the specified Protocol to ON in the destination file server
Select All Clips instead of Select Clip in step 2 settings and import a certificate.
server when recording ends. To enable this
to transfer all the files. For details about configuration, see
function, set File Transfer >Auto Upload
[Note] (page 120) to On in the Network menu. “Registering a file transfer destination”
Up to 200 files can be transferred. (page 64).
Uploading a proxy file automatically
Checking the file transfer
Proxy files can be uploaded to the specified
You can check the status of file transfer server when recording ends. To enable this
by selecting File Transfer >View Job List function, set File Transfer >Auto Upload (Proxy)
(page 120) in the Network menu. (page 120) to On in the Network menu.
You can check the upload status on the Job Alternatively, when Auto Upload (Proxy) is set
List screen that is displayed by selecting Job to Chunk, you can record a proxy file in chunks
List on the SD Card, Slot A, or Slot B screen and then upload the chunks to a specified
(page 72). server while the recording continues. The
[Tips] uploading of a proxy file recorded in chunks
ˎˎ You can also check the status of file transfer from the takes precedence over other file transfer jobs.
web remote control screen.
For details about configuration, see “Recording
ˎˎ If File Transfer >Auto Upload (page 120) or Auto
Upload (Proxy) (page 120) in the Network menu is and Uploading a Proxy File in Chunks”
set to On and a network connection exists, original (page 56).
files and proxy files are automatically uploaded to
[Tip]
the server specified using Default Upload Server
If both Auto Upload and Auto Upload (Proxy) are set
(page 120) when recording ends. If both original
to On, the uploading of proxy files takes precedence.
files and proxy files are configured for auto upload,
However, the order may change depending on the
the auto upload of proxy files takes precedence.
network status.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Up to 200 transfer jobs can be registered.
ˎˎ The job list is retained when the camcorder is
turned off, but up to 10 minutes of recent progress
information may be lost if the battery pack is
removed or the camcorder is powered off without
first setting the POWER switch to STANDBY.
ˎˎ Jobs added after the battery low voltage state are not
saved in the job list.
ˎˎ If an error occurs during file transfer, the transfer of a
clip with the same name as a transferred clip may not
be resumed depending on the settings and status of
66 4. Network Functions

Using Network Client Mode

High-quality streaming is supported by ˎˎLoad [Notes]
enabling network client mode and connecting Select Set in step 3 to import a Setting the Streaming Quality ˎˎ Streaming cannot be started under the following
menu settings.
a Sony Network RX Station (option) as certificate. –– When S&Q Motion >Setting in the Shooting menu
a Connection Control Manager (CCM) or * The certificate to be loaded must be in PEM
Set Network Client Mode >Streaming Quality is set to On
format, and should be written to the root
connecting via C3 Portal. (page 119) in the Network menu to High for –– When Interval Rec >Setting in the Project menu is
directory of the SD card with “CCM_certification.
set to On
pem” file name. high-quality streaming. Set Streaming Quality
–– When Simul Rec >Setting in the Project menu is
ˎˎClear to Normal for normal quality. set to On
Select Set in step 3 to clear a certificate. [Notes] ˎˎ After changing to network client mode, monitoring
Setting the Network Client Mode ˎˎNone ˎˎ Streaming Quality cannot be set to High in the
(page 70) is not available.
Do not load or clear a certificate. following cases. ˎˎ Changing to network client mode while monitoring
Connection –– When Proxy Rec >Setting (page 93) in the will stop the monitoring.
[Notes] Project menu is set to On ˎˎ File transfer is not supported during streaming in
ˎˎ Set the clock of the camcorder to the correct time –– When 4K & HD (Sub) Rec >Setting (page 93) in network client mode. File transfer is supported after
Up to three network client mode connections before loading CCM and C3 Portal connection the Project menu is set to On stopping streaming.
certificates. –– When Focus >Face/Eye Detection AF (page 89) ˎˎ If streaming in network client mode is started during
can be configured as NCM Settings. file transfer, the file transfer stops. File transfer
ˎˎ When recording in XAVC-I 3840×2160P 59.94/50P in the Shooting menu is not set to Off
1 Select Network Client Mode >NCM or XAVC-I 4096×2160P 59.94/50P, Load cannot be
selected.
ˎˎ When Network Client Mode >Setting (page 119) in
the Network menu is set to On, Streaming Quality
restarts after stopping streaming.
ˎˎ User Name, Password, and certificates are not saved
Settings1 (or NCM Settings2, NCM in an ALL file, so these must be configured again after
ˎˎ In low voltage state, CCM and C3 Portal cannot be changed.
Settings3) in the Network menu. connection certificates cannot be loaded or loading an ALL file.
The network client mode connection cleared. ˎˎ If Setting is set to Off while streaming in network
destination setup screen appears. CCM Certificate Status client mode, streaming stops.
Displays the load status of the certificate. ˎˎ When streaming in network client mode, NCM

2 Set each item on the connection Camera Control Connecting in Network Client Settings Select and the NCM Settings selected using
NCM Settings Select cannot be changed.
Enable/disable camera control when
destination setup screen.
connected with a CCM.
Mode ˎˎ During streaming, the screen information update
frequency is reduced, but this does not affect
Display Name operation.
Set the display name in the NCM Settings Camera Setting
ˎˎ The recording settings cannot be changed during
menu. Enable/disable ALL file operations when
connected with a CCM.
1 Connect the camcorder to the Internet as streaming in network client mode.
ˎˎ The wired LAN settings cannot be changed during
CCM Address described in “Connecting to the Internet”
Enter the address of the CCM to connect Reset streaming in network client mode.
(page 62). ˎˎ The image may momentarily stop when switching to
(host name or IP address). Reset the settings of NCM Settings to the
the thumbnail screen or playback screen during QoS
defaults.
CCM Port
Enter the port number of the CCM to
2 Set Network Client Mode >Setting in the
streaming.
ˎˎ The distribution formats available for streaming
connect. 3 When finished, select Set to apply the
Network menu to On.
Network client mode is enabled, and the
vary depending on the Rec Format setting of the
camcorder.
User Name settings.
camcorder connects to the Network RX ˎˎ When connected using USB tethering, the image may
Enter the user name. Always select Set after changing the suffer disruption if the smartphone is operated during
Station or C3 Portal.
Password settings. The settings are not applied if QoS streaming.
Live streaming starts in response to
Enter the password. Set is not selected.
Network RX Station operation. For details
CCM Certificate
about operation, refer to the instruction
A CCM root certificate is required to 4 Select Network Client Mode >NCM manual for the Network RX Station or the
connect to a CCM or to C3 Portal. The Settings Select in the Network menu, and Help for C3 Portal.
camcorder contains a built-in CCM root then select the NCM settings (NCM You can also set Setting to On or Off by
certificate, which can also be updated. To Settings1, NCM Settings2, NCM Settings3) pressing an assignable button
update the CCM root certificate, save the specified in steps 1 to 3. (page 47) assigned with Network Client
certificate on a memory card and then
Mode.
import the certificate from the memory
card.
67 4. Network Functions: Using Network Client Mode

Transferring Files in Network

Client Mode

You can transfer files to a server set by the

CCM by connecting a Network RX Station
acting as a CCM and the camcorder in network
client mode.
1 Select the file to upload from the CCM or
other source.
ˎˎTo transfer a proxy file
Perform steps 1 to 4 in “Uploading a
proxy file on an SD card” (page 71).
ˎˎTo transfer an original file
Perform steps 1 to 4 in “Uploading an
original file on an XQD memory card”
(page 71).
[Note]
The destination can also be set to “NCM: RX Server”
when not in network client mode. In this case, transfer is
placed on hold, and then transfer to the server specified
on the CCM starts after connecting to the CCM in
network client mode.
68 4. Network Functions

Using the C3 Portal App

You can easily transfer files to the C3 Portal
cloud service by linking the unit with the “C3
8 Scan the QR code displayed in the Uploading a proxy file
viewfinder according to the instructions
Portal App” smartphone application. Set File Transfer >Auto Upload (Proxy)
on the C3 Portal App screen.
First, obtain a C3 Portal account and install C3 (page 120) in the Network menu to On to
File transfer setup information is sent
Portal App on a smartphone. enable uploading of proxy files to C3 Portal.
from the smartphone to the unit, and the
For details about obtaining a C3 Portal cloud Each time a recording finishes, the file is
following message appears.
service account, contact the administrator of uploaded to the location associated with your
your organization. C3 Portal account.
A setup confirmation screen appears.
[Notes] When Auto Upload (Proxy) is set to Chunk, the
proxy file is divided into chunks and uploaded
ˎˎ An XDCA-FX9 (option) is required.
ˎˎ The service may not be provided, depending on the 4 Check the settings and select OK.
[Tip]
at regular intervals from the start of recording.
region in which you live. The configuration starts. A “Changing…”
For the second and subsequent connections, the file
ˎˎ For details about using C3 Portal App, refer to the C3
Portal App Help Guide.
message appears while configuration is in transfer message may not appear. Uploading arbitrary files
progress.
When the configuration is completed, the
following screen appears in the
9 Select OK.
See “Selecting a File and Uploading”
(page 64).
The setup information starts loading.
viewfinder.
Connecting the Unit to C3 Portal When the setup is loaded successfully, a
“Network File loaded.” message appears.

1 Select Setup for Mobile App >Setup

[Tips]
ˎˎ Files sent by the unit are cached in C3 Portal App and
Other Functions that use C3 Portal
transferred to C3 Portal. The file transfer status display
(page 116) in the Network menu.
on the unit indicates the transfer status to C3 Portal
A codec selection screen appears. App.
If Rec Format >Codec (page 91) in the ˎˎ When the file transfer from the unit to C3 Portal App Managing 3D LUT files
Project menu is not set to RAW, the on the smartphone is completed, you can turn off the
screen in step 4 appears. [Tip] unit but note that file transfer from the smartphone You can load 3D LUT files stored in C3 Portal
may be continuing. Be aware of the remaining battery
This screen is not output to the video output. into the unit. See “Loading from a cloud
charge on the smartphone.
2 Select a codec, and select Next. [Note]
Take care that the password cannot be viewed and [Notes]
service” (page 53).
If Rec Format >Codec in the Project menu ˎˎ C3 Portal App overwrites the File Transfer (page 120)
is set to RAW, connection to a network
the QR code image cannot be copied by others.
setting in the Network menu of the unit. Managing ALL files
using USB tethering is not possible. ˎˎ Root Certificate cannot be set automatically.
Change the codec and video format 5 Launch C3 Portal App on the smartphone Configure manually. You can save an ALL file created by the unit in
and sign-in to the cloud service. C3 Portal and load an ALL file from C3 Portal.
settings in steps 2 to 3.
Uploading an original file See “Saving an ALL file to a cloud service”
6 Connect the smartphone via a USB cable
Set File Transfer >Auto Upload (page 120) in
(page 122) and “Loading an ALL file from a
cloud service” (page 122).
to the USB connector (Type A) of an
the Network menu to On to enable uploading
XDCA-FX9 attached to the camcorder.
of original files to C3 Portal.
Each time a recording finishes, the file is
7 Enable USB tethering on the smartphone uploaded to the location associated with your
screen. C3 Portal account.
The operation will differ depending on
3 Select a video format, and select Next.
your smartphone. Refer to the operation
manual for the smartphone.
69 4. Network Functions

Using Web Remote Control

You can access the web remote control built ˎˎShooting settings (Cine EI shooting mode) Assign screen The buttons become unavailable when
into the camcorder from a tablet or computer S&Q Frame Rate, Shutter, Color Temp/Tint, the Lock switch is dragged to the right.
over a network connection. Exposure Index, Color Gamut/Gamma, [Notes]
Using the web remote control allows you to Shutter Category, White Mode, Base ISO, ˎˎ The web remote control screen may not match
operate the camcorder remotely. You can Auto ND Filter, Auto Iris, AGC, Color Bars, the camcorder settings under the following
start/stop recording and adjust the recording Focus Mode, Monitor LUT, Auto White circumstances. If this occurs, reload the browser
window.
settings with a connected device. This function
–– If the camcorder is restarted while connected
is useful for setting the camcorder in a remote Playback screen –– If the camcorder is operated directly while
place, such as the top of a crane, etc. connected
–– If the device has been reconnected
ˎˎStatus display –– If the browser Forward/Back buttons have been
Camera Control screen used
ˎˎAssignable button display
ˎˎ The web remote control may not function if the
Assignable buttons 1 to 10, Focus Hold
Main screen button
wireless signal strength becomes weak.

Web Remote Control Compatible

Displaying the Web Remote
Devices
Control
ˎˎStatus display
ˎˎPlayback control buttons You can use a tablet or computer to configure
F Rev, Play/Pause, F Fwd, Prev, Stop, Next 1 Connect the camcorder and device via a and operate the camcorder.
network connection (page 58). The supported devices, OS, and browsers are
shown in the following table.
Cursor screen
2 Launch a browser on the device, then Device OS Browser
access “http://IP address of camcorder/ Tablet Android 7/8 Chrome
rm.html.” iOS Safari
For example, if the IP address is 12/13.3/14/15
192.168.122.1, enter “http://192.168.122.1/ Computer Windows Chrome
rm.html” in the address bar. 7/8.1/10
You can check the IP address of the macOS Safari
ˎˎStatus display
camcorder on the Network Status screen 10.13/10.14
ˎˎRecord start/stop button
(page 17).
ˎˎND filter slider
For details about devices supported using the
ˎˎIris slider
ˎˎFocus slider 3 Enter the user name and password “Content Browser Mobile” application, contact
(Access Authentication >User Name and your Sony sales or service representative.
ˎˎZoom slider ˎˎStatus display
ˎˎShooting settings (SDR or HDR shooting Password in the Network menu).
ˎˎCursor control buttons, menu/status display
mode (page 27)) Up, Left, Set, Right, Down, Cancel/Back, When connection is successful, the web
S&Q Frame Rate, Shutter, Color Temp/Tint, Menu, User Menu, Thumbnail, Status remote control screen appears on the
Gain, Gamma, Shutter Category, White device.
Mode, Base Sensitivity, Auto ND Filter, Auto You use the Wi-Fi Remote screen to
Iris, AGC, Color Bars, Focus Mode, Auto operate the camcorder.
White
70 4. Network Functions: Using Web Remote Control

Frame Rate Upload Server Edit screen When set to Off, the configured password is
Web Remote Control Menu Displays the frame rate of the video for not displayed. When entering a password, all
monitoring. characters are displayed as asterisks.
Tapping in the top left of the screen will When set to On, the configured password
display the screen selection menu. Select File transfer settings (Upload Settings) is displayed. When entering a password, all
Monitoring Settings to display the Monitoring characters are displayed.
Settings screen. You can change the server settings for Passive Mode
Tapping in the top left of the Monitoring uploading a proxy file or an original file that is Turn passive mode on/off.
Settings screen will display the setup menu for recorded on the camcorder. Destination Directory
tasks, such as file transfer. Enter the directory on the destination server.
[Note]
Menu items If characters that are invalid on the destination server
are entered in the destination directory, files will
ˎˎRemote Control be transferred to the user’s home directory. Invalid
Camera Control characters will vary depending on the server.
ˎˎMonitoring Using Secure Protocol
Monitoring Settings Set whether to perform secure FTP uploading.
ˎˎFile Transfer Setting to ON displays the certificate status.
Slot A Tap OK to apply the settings. Tap Cancel to To import or clear a certificate, tap Select
Slot B Registering a destination server cancel the settings. Function and select a task in the displayed
Slot SD/MS Select a server in the Upload Server list and Service menu.
Job List tap Edit to display the server setup screen, Displays the server type. ˎˎLoad
Upload Settings then set each item to register a server. “FTP”: FTP server Load a CA certificate.
You can also register a server using File * The certificate to be loaded must be in PEM
Display Name
Video monitoring settings (Monitoring Transfer (page 120) in the Network menu. Enter the name of the server to display in the
format, and should be written to the root
directory of the SD card with “certification.pem”
Settings) A server configured here will be displayed in list. file name.
the file transfer list on the Slot A, Slot B, and Host Name ˎˎClear
You can set the format when monitoring on a Slot SD/MS screens when uploading a file. Enter the address of the server. Clear the CA certificate.
device. Port ˎˎNone
Enter the port number of the server to Do not load or clear a certificate.
connect.
[Note]
User Name Set the clock of the camcorder to the correct time before
Enter the user name. importing a CA certificate.
Password
Enter the password. Changing registered server settings
[Notes] Select the server whose settings you want to
ˎˎ The password is cleared when the Edit screen is change on the Upload Settings screen, then
opened for security reasons. Enter it again if the tap Edit. Change the settings as required on
server settings have changed.
the displayed screen.
ˎˎ From a security standpoint, it is recommended that
you set a password with a sufficiently long character You can also set a server using File Transfer
Size string that is hard to guess by others, and that you (page 120) in the Network menu.
Sets the picture size and bit rate of the video store it safely.
for monitoring. Display Password
ˎˎ480×270(1Mbps) Shows/hides the password.
ˎˎ480×270(0.5Mbps)
71 4. Network Functions: Using Web Remote Control

Uploading a proxy file automatically

Auto Upload On/Off
5 Tap Transfer. 3 Display the file list screen to select a file.
The server that you set using Default Tap >File Transfer >Slot A or Slot B.
Auto Upload (Proxy) On/Off/Chunk Upload Server in “Registering a A file list screen for the media inserted in
When Auto Upload or Auto Upload (Proxy) destination server” (page 70) appears. slot A or slot B appears.
is set to On and the camcorder is connected To change the server, tap the server to Example: Slot A screen
to the Internet, the camcorder automatically display the server list, then select a server.
uploads an original file or a proxy file to the Input the name of the directory on the
transfer destination that is set using Default server in Directory if necessary.
Upload Server when recording ends. When
Auto Upload (Proxy) is set to Chunk, the
camcorder automatically uploads a proxy file You can select a displayed file to upload the
to the transfer destination that is set using file to a server on the Internet.
Default Upload Server after each interval set in
Uploading a proxy file on an SD card
Proxy Rec >Chunk.
Default Upload Server 1 Connect the camcorder and device using
Select the default destination file transfer a LAN connection (page 58).
server.
4 Select the file to upload.
[Tip] 2 Launch a browser on the device and Tap the file to select it. To cancel, tap the
See “Uploading Files Automatically” (page 65). display the web remote control file again.
(page 69). 6 Tap Transfer.
File transfer management (File Transfer) The camcorder starts uploading the 5 Tap Transfer.
You can transfer original files recorded on an
3 Display the file list screen to select a file. selected file. The server that you set using Default
Tap >File Transfer >Slot SD/MS. To cancel uploading, tap Cancel. Upload Server in “Registering a
XQD memory card or proxy files recorded on
A file list screen for the media inserted in [Tip] destination server” (page 70) appears.
an SD card, manage file transfer, and configure
the UTILITY SD/MS card slot appears. You can tap at the top right of the screen and To change the server, tap the server to
the file transfer destination. select Transfer to start uploading a file.
display the server list, then select a server.
Input the name of the directory on the
Transferring files (Slot A, Slot B, Slot SD/MS) Uploading an original file on an XQD memory
server in Directory if necessary.
You can display a list of clips recorded on card
media inserted in slot A/slot B or a list of proxy
files recorded on media inserted in the UTILITY
[Tip]
The cover of the XQD card slot must be closed in order 6 Tap Transfer.
SD/MS card slot. to view information about the files on the XQD memory The camcorder starts uploading the
card. selected file.
[Note]
Using web remote control, a proxy file recorded in
To cancel uploading, tap Cancel.
chunks will be displayed as individual clips. These clips 1 Connect the camcorder and device using [Tip]
cannot be deleted. When these clips are transferred a LAN connection (page 58). You can tap at the top right of the screen and
using the web remote control, the clips cannot be
4
select Transfer to start uploading a file.
merged automatically on the server. Select the file to upload.
Tap the file to select it. To cancel, tap the 2 Launch a browser on the device and
file again. display the web remote control
You can double-tap the file to play the file (page 69).
and check the contents (SD card only).
72 4. Network Functions: Using Web Remote Control

Checking the file transfer (Job List) ˎˎSelect All: Select all files in the list.
You can check the list of the files to be
uploaded, the file that is being uploaded,
cancel or start the file upload, and delete the
file from the file list.
The camcorder is compatible with the FTP
resume function (resume upload for a file
whose transfer was suspended).

ˎˎTotal: Progress of all the files to be

uploaded.
ˎˎStatus: Progress of the file that is currently
being uploaded.
ˎˎRemain Time: Estimated remaining time for
uploading.
ˎˎTransfer data rate: Transfer rate indication.

To cancel or start uploading, or delete a file

from the file list
1 Select a file.

2 Tap at the upper right of the screen,

and select an item.
ˎˎAbort selected: Cancel uploading the
selected file.
ˎˎDelete from list: Delete the selected file
from the list.
ˎˎStart selected: Start uploading the
selected file.
ˎˎClear completed: Delete the list of
uploaded files.
[Note]
If a clip chunk job is deleted during chunk
recording, the subsequent clip chunks are not
uploaded.
73 5. Thumbnail Screen

Thumbnail Screen
The thumbnail screen appears if you press the THUMBNAIL button (page 7). The thumbnail screen displays the clips stored on XQD memory cards as thumbnails (index pictures).
You can select a clip on the thumbnail screen and start playback of that clip. The playback image can be displayed in the viewfinder and on an external monitor.
Pressing the THUMBNAIL button again closes the thumbnail screen and returns to the camera image.
[Note]
Only the clips recorded in the currently selected recording format are displayed on the thumbnail screen. If an expected recorded clip is not displayed, check the recording format. Take special note of this fact before formatting (initializing)
media.

Screen Layout

Information for the clip at the cursor position is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Currently selected XQD memory card indicator

(A lock icon is displayed if the card is protected.)
Clip number/Total number of clips

Cursor (yellow)

2 6

3 4 5
1. Thumbnail (index picture) 2. Clip name For Slow & Quick Motion clips, the frame rate
Displays the index picture of a clip. When a clip Displays the name of the selected clip. is displayed on the right.
is recorded, its first frame is automatically set
3. Recording video format 5. Clip duration
as the index picture.
Displays the file format of the selected clip.
Clip/frame information is displayed below 6. Creation date
the thumbnail. You change the information 4. Special recording information
displayed using Customize View (page 111) Displays the recording mode only if the clip
>Thumbnail Caption in the Thumbnail menu. was recorded using a special recording mode.
74 5. Thumbnail Screen

Playing Clips
arrow button to return to the start of the clip, then
Playing Recorded Clips restart playback.
ˎˎ You can also use the multi selector (page 9).

You can play recorded clips when the

camcorder is in recording standby (Stby)
mode.
1 Insert an XQD memory card for playback.

2 Press the THUMBNAIL button.

3 Use the arrow buttons (page 7) or

multi-function dial (page 4) to move
the cursor to the thumbnail for the clip
you want to play.

4 Press the SET button or multi-function

dial.
Playback begins from the start of the
selected clip.

You can control playback by pressing the

following buttons.
Press the SET button or multi-function dial:
Pauses playback.
Press again to return to normal playback.
Press the left/right arrow buttons:
Jumps to start of clip/start of next clip.
Press and hold the left/right arrow buttons:
Fast reverse/forward.
Returns to normal playback when you
release the button.
CANCEL/BACK button:
Stops playback, and returns to recording
standby mode.
[Notes]
ˎˎ There may be momentary picture breakup or still
image display at the boundary between clips. You
cannot operate the camcorder during this period.
ˎˎ When you select a clip in the thumbnail screen and
begin playback, there may be momentary picture
breakup at the start of the clip. To start playback
without distortion from the beginning of the clip,
pause playback once after starting it, press the left
75 5. Thumbnail Screen

Clip Operations
On the thumbnail screen, you can operate
Menu Items for Clip Operations Displaying the filtered clip thumbnail
the clips or check clip properties using the
Thumbnail menu. screen
The Thumbnail menu (page 110) appears ˎˎDisplay Clip Properties Select Filter Clips (page 111) in the
when you press the MENU button and select ˎˎSet Shot Mark Thumbnail menu, and select a clip flag type to
Thumbnail. ˎˎSet Clip Flag display only those clips that have the specified
ˎˎLock/Unlock Clip flag.
ˎˎDelete Clip To display all clips, select All.
ˎˎCopy Clip
[Tip]
Thumbnail Menu Operations ˎˎCopy Sub Clip You can also switch filters in sequence using the
ˎˎTransfer Clip DISPLAY button.
ˎˎTransfer Clip (Proxy)
Use the arrow buttons (page 7) or the
ˎˎSet Index Picture Deleting clips
multi-function dial (page 4) to select a
ˎˎThumbnail View
function, then press the SET button or multi-
ˎˎFilter Clips You can delete clips from XQD memory cards.
function dial.
ˎˎCustomize View Select Delete Clip >Select Clip or All Clips in
Press the CANCEL/BACK button (page 7)
the Thumbnail menu.
to return to the previous screen.
For details about clip operation menu items, Select Clip:
[Tip] see the Thumbnail menu (page 110). Deletes the selected clip. Multiple clip
You can also use the multi selector (page 9).
selection is supported.
[Note] Displaying clip properties All Clips:
Some items cannot be selected, depending on the state Deletes all of the displayed clips.
when the menu was displayed. Select Display Clip Properties (page 110)
in the Thumbnail menu to display the clip Changing the information displayed on
properties screen.
the thumbnail screen
Displaying the essence mark thumbnail You can change the clip/frame information
screen displayed below the thumbnail.
Select Customize View >Thumbnail Caption
Select Thumbnail View (page 111) >Essence in the Thumbnail menu and select the
Mark Thumbnail in the Thumbnail menu, and information to display.
select the essence mark type to display a Date Time:
thumbnail view of the frames that have the Displays the date and time the clip was
specified essence mark. created and last modified.
To display all clips, set Thumbnail View Time Code:
>Essence Mark Thumbnail in the Thumbnail Displays the timecode.
menu to All. Duration::
Displays the duration of the clip.
Sequential Number:
Displays a sequential number on each
thumbnail.
76 6. Menu Display and Settings

Setup Menu Configuration and Hierarchy

Press the MENU button to display the setup
menu in the viewfinder to specify various Setup Menu Hierarchy Shooting ISO/Gain/EI Paint HDR Paint Setting
ND Filter Black
items for shooting, recording, and playback
(menu can also be displayed on an external Shutter Gamma
User Base Setting
monitor). The setup menu comprises the Auto Exposure Black Gamma
(Factory settings) Rec Format
following menus. White Knee
ISO/Gain/EI
White Setting White Clip
Focus
Offset White Detail(4K/QFHD)
S&Q Motion
Focus Detail(HD)
Menu Configuration Monitor LUT
S&Q Motion Skin Detail
Monitor LUT Setting
Monitor LUT Aperture
User menu Simul Rec
Contains menu items configured by the Monitor LUT Setting Matrix
4K & HD (Sub) Rec
user using Edit User Menu. Monitor 3D LUT Multi Matrix
Proxy Rec
Edit User menu Noise Suppression Scene File
Contains menu items for editing the User Picture Cache Rec
Flicker Reduce TC/Media Timecode
menu. Assignable Button
SteadyShot TC Display
Shooting menu Assignable Dial
Contains settings related to shooting. Auto Black Balance Users Bit
Multi Function Dial
Project menu Project Base Setting HDMI TC Out
Contains basic project settings. All File
Rec Format Clip Name Format
Paint menu Clip Name Format
Cine EI Setting Update Media
Contains settings related to image quality. Format Media
TC/Media menu HDR Setting Format Media
Output Format
Contains settings related to timecodes Simul Rec Monitoring Output On/Off
VF Setting
and recording media. 4K & HD (Sub) Rec Output Format
Monitoring menu Menu Settings
Proxy Rec Output Setting
Contains settings related to video output Edit User Menu Add Item
Interval Rec Output Display
and the viewfinder display. Customize Reset
Audio menu Picture Cache Rec Display On/Off
Contains settings related to audio. SDI/HDMI Rec Control Marker
Thumbnail menu Assignable Button VF Setting
Contains settings related to thumbnail Assignable Dial Gamma Display Assist
display.
Multi Function Dial Peaking
Technical menu
Contains settings for technical items. User File Zebra
Network menu All File Audio Audio Input
Contains settings related to networks. Planning Metadata Audio Output
Maintenance menu
Contains devices settings, such as the
clock and language.
77 6. Menu Display and Settings: Setup Menu Configuration and Hierarchy

Thumbnail Display Clip Properties Network Setup for Mobile App

Set Shot Mark Access Authentication
Set Clip Flag Wireless LAN
Lock/Unlock Clip AP Mode Settings
Delete Clip ST Mode Settings
Copy Clip Wired LAN
Copy Sub Clip Modem
Transfer Clip Network Client Mode
Transfer Clip (Proxy) File Transfer
Set Index Picture Network Reset
Thumbnail View Maintenance Language
Filter Clips Clock Set
Customize View Network Public Key
Technical Color Bars All Reset
Test Saw Hours Meter
ND Dial Version
Tally
HOLD Switch Setting
Touch Operation
Rec Review
Handle Zoom
GPS
Menu Settings
Status Page On/Off
RCP
Fan Control
Lens
Video Light Set
APR
Camera Battery Alarm
Camera DC IN Alarm
Ext. Unit Battery Alarm
Ext. Unit DC IN Alarm
78 6. Menu Display and Settings

Setup Menu Operations

Press the MENU button to display the setup
menu in the viewfinder to specify various Setting Menu Items Entering a Character String Locking and Unlocking the Menu
items for shooting, recording, and playback
(menu can also be displayed on an external Press the arrow buttons or turn the multi- When you select an item, such as a file name, You can lock the setup menu so that only the
monitor). function dial to move the cursor to the menu which requires character entry, the character User menu is displayed.
item to set, then press the SET button or multi- entry screen appears. Settings on the status screen also cannot be
function dial to select the item. changed.
ˎˎThe menu item selection area displays up
1
Menu Controls to eight lines. If the available options for an Locking the menu
item cannot be displayed at the same time,

MENU button (page 7)

scroll the display by moving the cursor up/
down.
1 Press and hold the multi-function dial and
Turns menu mode for setup menu press the MENU button.
ˎˎFor sub-items with a large settings range
operations on/off.
(for example, –99 to +99), the settings area
////SET button (page 7)
is not displayed. The current setting is 2 Select Menu Settings >User Menu with
Press the arrows buttons to move the Lock in the Technical menu.
highlighted to indicate that the value can be
cursor up/down/left/right to select menu
changed.
2 3 [Note]
items or settings.
Press the SET button to apply the selected
ˎˎSelecting [Execute] for a function will
execute the corresponding function.
1 Press the arrow buttons or turn the multi-
When only the MENU button is pressed to display
the normal setup menu, User Menu Only is
item. function dial to select a character type, displayed under Menu Settings in the Technical
ˎˎSelecting an item that requires confirmation menu. Press and hold the multi-function dial and
then apply the setting.
[Tip] before execution will temporarily hide the press the MENU button to display User Menu with
You can also use the multi selector (page 9) in ABC: Uppercase alphabetic characters
menu and display a confirmation message. Lock.
the same way. abc: Lowercase alphabetic characters
Check the message, and then select
Multi-function dial (page 4) 123: Numeric characters
Turn the multi-function dial to move the
whether to execute or cancel the function.
!#$: Special characters 3 Set to On, and press the SET button or
cursor up/down to select menu items or multi-function dial.
settings. 2 Select a character from the selected
The viewfinder screen display switches to
the passcode number input screen.
Press the multi-function dial to apply the character type, then apply the setting.
selected item. The cursor moves to the next field.
CANCEL/BACK button (page 7) Space: Enters a space character at the 4 Enter an arbitrary number.
Press to return to the previous menu. An cursor position. Enter a 4-digit number in the range 0000
uncompleted change is canceled. /: Moves the position of the cursor. to 9999. The default value is 0000.
[Notes] BS: Deletes the character on the left of the Enter a number and press the SET button
ˎˎ The setup menu cannot be operated when in focus cursor (backspace). or multi-function dial to move the cursor
magnifier mode (page 35). to the next digit.
ˎˎ Some items cannot be selected, depending on the
state when the menu was displayed. 3 When finished, select [Done] and apply
When all digits have been entered, move
the cursor to SET.
ˎˎ Touch operation is not supported. the setting.
The character string is confirmed and the
character entry screen disappears. 5 Press the SET button or multi-function
dial.
The entry is applied.
A confirmation message appears, and the
screen switches to the User menu display.
79 6. Menu Display and Settings: Setup Menu Operations

Unlocking the menu those functions cannot be assigned to assignable

buttons.
Setup menu item Assignable button Setup menu item Assignable button
selection selection
ˎˎ If those functions were already assigned to assignable
1 Press and hold the multi-function dial and buttons, the assignable setting is forcibly disabled at
the point when the menu is locked.
Project >Picture Cache
Rec >Setting
Picture Cache Rec Network >File Transfer
>Auto Upload (Proxy)
Auto Upload (Proxy)
press the MENU button.
Setup menu item Assignable button Technical >Rec Review Rec Review User User Menu
2 Select Menu Settings >User Menu with selection >Setting
Thumbnail >Set Clip Clip Flag OK
Lock in the User menu. Shooting >ISO/Gain/EI Base ISO/Sensitivity
>Base Sensitivity, Flag >Add OK
[Note]
Shooting >ISO/Gain/EI Thumbnail >Set Clip Clip Flag NG
When only the MENU button is pressed to display
the normal setup menu, User Menu Only is >Base ISO Flag >Add NG
displayed under Menu Settings in the Technical Shooting >Auto AGC Thumbnail >Set Clip Clip Flag Keep
menu. Press and hold the multi-function dial and Exposure >AGC Flag >Add KEEP
press the MENU button to display User Menu with
Lock.
Shooting >Auto Auto ND Filter Technical >Color Bars Color Bars
Exposure >Auto ND >Setting
Filter
3 Set to Off, and press the SET button or
Shooting >Auto Auto Shutter
Monitoring >Display
On/Off >Lens Info
Lens Info

multi-function dial. Exposure >Auto Shutter Monitoring >Display Video Signal

The viewfinder screen display switches to
Shooting >Auto Auto Exposure Level On/Off >Video Signal Monitor
the passcode number input screen.
Exposure >Level Monitor

4 Enter the passcode number used to lock

Shooting >Auto
Exposure >Mode
Backlight Monitoring >Marker
>Setting
Marker

the menu.
Shooting >Auto Spotlight Monitoring >VF Setting VF Mode
Enter a number and press the SET button Exposure >Mode >Color Mode
or multi-function dial to move the cursor
Shooting >White > Preset White Select Monitoring >Gamma Gamma Display
to the next digit.
Preset White Display Assist >Setting Assist
When all digits have been entered, move
Shooting >Focus > AF Speed/Sens. Monitoring >Peaking Peaking
the cursor to Set.
AF Transition Speed, >Setting
Shooting >Focus >
5 Press the SET button or multi-function AF Subj. Shift Sens.
Monitoring >Zebra
>Setting
Zebra

dial. Shooting >Focus > Focus Area Audio >Audio Output Audio Monitor CH
The entry is applied. Focus Area >Monitor CH
If the entered passcode number matches
Shooting >Focus > Focus Area(AF-S) Audio >Audio Output Audio Mon. CH
the passcode number used to lock the Focus Area(AF-S) >Monitor CH Switch
menu, the menu is unlocked and the
Shooting >Focus > Face/Eye Detection Technical >Touch Touch Operation
menu is displayed.
Face/Eye Detection AF AF Operation >Setting
[Notes] Shooting >Focus > Push AF Mode Technical >Handle Handle Zoom
ˎˎ If the entered passcode number does not match the Push AF Mode
passcode number used to lock the menu, the menu is Zoom >Setting
not unlocked. Shooting >S&Q Motion S&Q Motion Network >Wireless LAN NFC
ˎˎ It is recommended that you leave a record of the >Setting >NFC
passcode nearby, just in case it is forgotten. If you
Shooting >SteadyShot SteadyShot Network >Network Network Client
do forget the passcode number, contact your Sony
service representative.
>Setting Client Mode >Setting Mode
ˎˎ If the menu is locked without registering setup menu
items from the following tables in the User menu,
80 6. Menu Display and Settings

User Menu
This section describes the function and settings of each menu item.

User
Item Description
Base Setting Project >Base Setting item
Rec Format Project >Rec Format item
ISO/Gain/EI Shooting >ISO/Gain/EI item
Focus Shooting >Focus item
S&Q Motion Shooting >S&Q Motion item
Monitor LUT Shooting >Monitor LUT item
Monitor LUT Setting Shooting >Monitor LUT Setting item
Simul Rec Project >Simul Rec item
4K & HD (Sub) Rec Project >4K & HD (Sub) Rec item
Proxy Rec Project >Proxy Rec item
Picture Cache Rec Project >Picture Cache Rec item
Assignable Button Project >Assignable Button item
Assignable Dial Project >Assignable Dial item
Multi Function Dial Project >Multi Function Dial item
All File Project >All File item
Clip Name Format TC/Media >Clip Name Format item
Format Media TC/Media >Format Media item
Output Format Monitoring >Output Format item
VF Setting Monitoring >VF Setting item
Menu Settings Technical >Menu Settings item
Edit User Menu Displays the Edit User menu screen.

[Note]
You can add and remove menu items in the User menu using the Edit User menu. Up to 20 items can be configured.
The camcorder is configured with 20 items by default. To add an item, you first have to delete an existing item using
Delete in the Edit User menu and then add an item using Add Item.
81 6. Menu Display and Settings

Edit User Menu

The Edit User menu is displayed at the top level when Edit User Menu is selected in the User
menu.

Edit User
Item Sub-item setting Description
Add Item Adds a menu item to the User menu.
Add an item to the User
menu
Customize Reset Restores the menu items registered
Reset the items in the in the User menu to the factory
User menu default.
Menu item selected Delete Deletes the registered menu item
during editing from the User menu.
Move Rearranges the registered menu
items within the User menu.
Edit Sub Item Edits (register/delete) the registered
menu sub-item in the User menu.
82 6. Menu Display and Settings

Shooting Menu
This section describes the function and settings of each menu item. Shooting >ISO/Gain/EI
Factory default settings are shown in bold (for example, 18dB). Sets gain settings.
Shooting >ISO/Gain/EI Item Sub-item setting Description
Sets gain settings. ISO/Gain<H> When Mode is set to ISO with dynamic
Item Sub-item setting Description range of 1300% and Base Sensitivity is set
to High:
Mode ISO/dB Selects the gain setting mode.
ISO 4000 / ISO 5000 / ISO 6400 /
ISO/Gain<H> When Mode is set to ISO with dynamic Sets the <H> gain preset value. ISO 8000 / ISO 10000 / ISO 12800 /
range of 460% and Base Sensitivity is set ISO 16000 / ISO 20000 / ISO 25600 /
[Tip]
to High: The dynamic range is determined by the ISO 32000 / ISO 40000 / ISO 51200 /
ISO 1600 / ISO 2000 / ISO 2500 / gamma. The gamma in HDR mode is HLG. ISO 64000 / ISO 80000 / ISO 102400
ISO 3200 / ISO 4000 / ISO 5000 / Gamma Dynamic range When Mode is set to ISO with dynamic
ISO 6400 / ISO 8000 / ISO 10000 / range of 1300% and Base Sensitivity is set
STD / HG1 / HG2 / 460%
ISO 12800 / ISO 16000 / ISO 20000 / to Low:
HG3 / HG4 /
ISO 25600 / ISO 32000 / ISO 40000 / ISO 800 / ISO 1000 / ISO 1250 /
S-Cinetone
ISO 51200 / ISO 64000 / ISO 80000 / ISO 1600 / ISO 2000 / ISO 2500 /
ISO 102400 HG7 / HG8 800%
ISO 3200 / ISO 4000 / ISO 5000 /
When Mode is set to ISO with dynamic S-Log3 / HLG 1300%
ISO 6400 / ISO 8000 / ISO 10000 /
range of 460% and Base Sensitivity is set ISO 12800 / ISO 16000 / ISO 20000
to Low: When Mode is set to dB:
ISO 320 / ISO 400 / ISO 500 / ISO 640 / –3dB to 27dB (12dB) (1dB increments)
ISO 800 / ISO 1000 / ISO 1250 /
ISO 1600 / ISO 2000 / ISO 2500 /
ISO 3200 / ISO 4000 / ISO 5000 /
ISO 6400 / ISO 8000 / ISO 10000 /
ISO 12800 / ISO 16000 / ISO 20000
When Mode is set to ISO with dynamic
range of 800% and Base Sensitivity is set
to High:
ISO 2500 / ISO 3200 / ISO 4000 /
ISO 5000 / ISO 6400 / ISO 8000 /
ISO 10000 / ISO 12800 / ISO 16000 /
ISO 20000 / ISO 25600 / ISO 32000 /
ISO 40000 / ISO 51200 / ISO 64000 /
ISO 80000 / ISO 102400
When Mode is set to ISO with dynamic
range of 800% and Base Sensitivity is set
to Low:
ISO 500 / ISO 640 / ISO 800 / ISO 1000 /
ISO 1250 / ISO 1600 / ISO 2000 /
ISO 2500 / ISO 3200 / ISO 4000 /
ISO 5000 / ISO 6400 / ISO 8000 /
ISO 10000 / ISO 12800 / ISO 16000 /
ISO 20000
83 6. Menu Display and Settings: Shooting Menu

Shooting >ISO/Gain/EI Shooting >ISO/Gain/EI

Sets gain settings. Sets gain settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
ISO/Gain<M> (Same settings as ISO/Gain<H>) Sets the <M> gain preset value. ISO/Gain<L> (Same settings as ISO/Gain<H>) Sets the <L> gain preset value.
The default values are given below. The default values are given below.
When Mode is set to ISO with dynamic When Mode is set to ISO with dynamic
range of 460% and Base Sensitivity is set range of 460% and Base Sensitivity is set
to High: to High:
ISO 3200 ISO 1600
When Mode is set to ISO with dynamic When Mode is set to ISO with dynamic
range of 460% and Base Sensitivity is set range of 460% and Base Sensitivity is set
to Low: to Low:
ISO 640 ISO 320
When Mode is set to ISO with dynamic When Mode is set to ISO with dynamic
range of 800% and Base Sensitivity is set range of 800% and Base Sensitivity is set
to High: to High:
ISO 5000 ISO 2500
When Mode is set to ISO with dynamic When Mode is set to ISO with dynamic
range of 800% and Base Sensitivity is set range of 800% and Base Sensitivity is set
to Low: to Low:
ISO 1000 ISO 500
When Mode is set to ISO with dynamic When Mode is set to ISO with dynamic
range of 1300% and Base Sensitivity is set range of 1300% and Base Sensitivity is set
to High: to High:
ISO 8000 ISO 4000
When Mode is set to ISO with dynamic When Mode is set to ISO with dynamic
range of 1300% and Base Sensitivity is set range of 1300% and Base Sensitivity is set
to Low: to Low:
ISO 1600 ISO 800
When Mode is set to dB: When Mode is set to dB:
6dB 0dB
84 6. Menu Display and Settings: Shooting Menu

Shooting >ISO/Gain/EI Shooting >ISO/Gain/EI

Sets gain settings. Sets gain settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Exposure When Base ISO is set to ISO 800: Sets the <H> exposure index value. Base ISO ISO 4000 / ISO 800 Sets the base ISO sensitivity for Cine EI
Index<H> 200EI / 4.0E Available in Cine EI mode only. mode.
250EI / 4.3E
Shooting >ND Filter
320EI / 4.7E
Sets the preset values for the ND filter.
400EI / 5.0E
500EI / 5.3E Item Sub-item setting Description
640EI / 5.7E Preset1 1/4 / 1/8 / 1/16 / 1/32 / 1/64 / 1/128 Sets the preset 1 value for the ND filter.
800EI / 6.0E
Preset2 1/4 / 1/8 / 1/16 / 1/32 / 1/64 / 1/128 Sets the preset 2 value for the ND filter.
1000EI / 6.3E
1250EI / 6.7E Preset3 1/4 / 1/8 / 1/16 / 1/32 / 1/64 / 1/128 Sets the preset 3 value for the ND filter.
1600EI / 7.0E Shooting >Shutter
2000EI / 7.3E Sets electronic shutter operating condition settings.
2500EI / 7.7E
3200EI / 8.0E Item Sub-item setting Description
When Base ISO is set to ISO 4000: Mode Speed / Angle Selects the operating mode of the
1000EI / 4.0E electronic shutter.
1250EI / 4.3E Used for shooting fast-moving subjects
1600EI / 4.7E clearly. Selects the mode for setting the
2000EI / 5.0E shutter speed in seconds (Speed) or as a
2500EI / 5.3E shutter angle (Angle).
3200EI / 5.7E Shutter On / Off Sets whether the exposure time when
4000EI / 6.0E Speed On/ Speed mode is selected follows the
5000EI / 6.3E Off Shutter Speed value or is set for full
6400EI / 6.7E exposure.
8000EI / 7.0E
10000EI / 7.3E
12800EI / 7.7E
16000EI / 8.0E
Exposure (Same settings as Exposure Index<H>) Sets the <M> exposure index value.
Index<M> When Base ISO is set to ISO 800:
1000EI / 6.3E
When Base ISO is set to ISO 4000:
5000EI / 6.3E
Exposure (Same settings as Exposure Index<H>) Sets the <L> exposure index value.
Index<L> When Base ISO is set to ISO 800:
800EI / 6.0E
When Base ISO is set to ISO 4000:
4000EI / 6.0E
Shockless On / Off Turns the shockless gain function on/off.
Gain
Base High / Low Sets the base sensitivity for SDR/HDR
Sensitivity mode.
85 6. Menu Display and Settings: Shooting Menu

Shooting >Shutter Shooting >Shutter

Sets electronic shutter operating condition settings. Sets electronic shutter operating condition settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Shutter 64F to 1/8000 Sets the shutter speed when Mode is set ECS 23.99 to 8000 Sets the ECS frequency when Mode is set
Speed The available settings vary depending on to Speed. Frequency The available settings vary depending on to ECS.
the frame frequency of the selected video the frame frequency of the selected video
format. format.
59.94P / 59.94i: The default values are given below.
64F / 32F / 16F / 8F / 7F / 6F / 5F / 4F / 59.94P: 60.00
3F / 2F / 1/50 / 1/60 / 1/100 / 1/120 / 59.94i: 60.00
1/125 / 1/250 / 1/500 / 1/1000 / 50P: 50.00
1/2000 / 1/4000 / 1/8000 50i: 50.00
50P / 50i: 29.97P: 30.00
64F / 32F / 16F / 8F / 7F / 6F / 5F / 4F / 23.98P: 23.99
3F / 2F / 1/50 / 1/60 / 1/100 / 1/120 / 25P: 25.02
1/125 / 1/250 / 1/500 / 1/1000 / 24P: 24.02
1/2000 / 1/4000 / 1/8000
Shooting >Auto Exposure
29.97P:
Sets automatic exposure adjustment settings.
64F / 32F / 16F / 8F / 7F / 6F / 5F / 4F /
3F / 2F / 1/30 / 1/40 / 1/50 / 1/60 / Item Sub-item setting Description
1/100 / 1/120 / 1/125 / 1/250 / 1/500 / Level +3.0 / +2.75 / +2.5 / +2.25 / +2.0 / +1.75 / Sets the brightness level for the
1/1000 / 1/2000 / 1/4000 / 1/8000 +1.5 / +1.25 / +1.0 / +0.75 / +0.5 / +0.25 / automatically detected exposure.
25P: ±0 / –0.25 / –0.5 / –0.75 / –1.0 / –1.25 /
64F / 32F / 16F / 8F / 7F / 6F / 5F / 4F / –1.5 / –1.75 / –2.0 / –2.25 / –2.5 / –2.75 /
3F / 2F / 1/25 / 1/33 / 1/50 / 1/60 / –3.0
1/100 / 1/120 / 1/125 / 1/250 / 1/500 / Mode Backlight / Standard / Spotlight Sets the operating mode of auto
1/1000 / 1/2000 / 1/4000 / 1/8000 exposure adjustment.
24P/23.98P: Backlight:
64F / 32F / 16F / 8F / 7F / 6F / 5F / 4F / Backlight mode (mode for reduced
3F / 2F / 1/24 / 1/32 / 1/48 / 1/50 / darkening of a subject when the
1/60 / 1/96 / 1/100 / 1/120 / 1/125 / subject is backlit)
1/250 / 1/500 / 1/1000 / 1/2000 / Standard:
1/4000 / 1/8000 Standard mode
Shutter Angle 64F / 32F / 16F / 8F / 7F / 6F / 5F / 4F / Sets the shutter angle when Mode is set Spotlight:
3F / 2F / 360.0° / 300.0° / 270.0° / to Angle. Spotlight mode (mode for reduced
240.0° / 216.0° / 210.0° / 180.0° / 172.8° / clipped whites when subject is lit by
150.0° / 144.0° / 120.0° / 90.0° / 86.4° / spotlighting)
72.0° / 45.0° / 30.0° / 22.5° / 11.25° / 5.6° Speed –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the adjustment speed of auto
ECS On/Off On / Off Turns the Extended Clear Scan function exposure adjustment.
on/off. AGC On / Off Turns the AGC (auto gain control)
function on/off.
86 6. Menu Display and Settings: Shooting Menu

Shooting >Auto Exposure Shooting >Auto Exposure

Sets automatic exposure adjustment settings. Sets automatic exposure adjustment settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
AGC Limit When ISO/Gain/EI >Mode is set to dB: Sets the maximum gain of the AGC AGC Limit When ISO/Gain/EI >Mode is set to ISO with
3dB / 6dB / 9dB / 12dB / 15dB / 18dB / function. dynamic range of 1300% and Base
21dB / 24dB / 27dB Sensitivity is set to High:
When ISO/Gain/EI >Mode is set to ISO with ISO 5000 / ISO 6400 / ISO 8000 /
dynamic range of 460% and Base ISO 10000 / ISO 12800 / ISO 16000 /
Sensitivity is set to High: ISO 20000 / ISO 25600 / ISO 32000 /
ISO 2000 / ISO 2500 / ISO 3200 / ISO 40000 / ISO 51200 / ISO 64000 /
ISO 4000 / ISO 5000 / ISO 6400 / ISO 80000 / ISO 102400
ISO 8000 / ISO 10000 / ISO 12800 / When ISO/Gain/EI >Mode is set to ISO with
ISO 16000 / ISO 20000 / ISO 25600 / dynamic range of 1300% and Base
ISO 32000 / ISO 40000 / ISO 51200 / Sensitivity is set to Low:
ISO 64000 / ISO 80000 / ISO 102400 ISO 1000 / ISO 1250 / ISO 1600 /
When ISO/Gain/EI >Mode is set to ISO with ISO 2000 / ISO 2500 / ISO 3200 /
dynamic range of 460% and Base ISO 4000 / ISO 5000 / ISO 6400 /
Sensitivity is set to Low: ISO 8000 / ISO 10000 / ISO 12800 /
ISO 400 / ISO 500 / ISO 640 / ISO 800 / ISO 16000 / ISO 20000
ISO 1000 / ISO 1250 / ISO 1600 / AGC Point When Lens >Iris Display in the Technical Sets the F-stop value of the iris where
ISO 2000 / ISO 2500 / ISO 3200 / menu is set to F-Number, or when Iris AGC operation starts when the AGC
ISO 4000 / ISO 5000 / ISO 6400 / Display is set to Auto and T value function is On.
ISO 8000 / ISO 10000 / ISO 12800 / information cannot be obtained from the
ISO 16000 / ISO 20000 attached lens:
When ISO/Gain/EI >Mode is set to ISO with F2.8 / F4 / F5.6
dynamic range of 800% and Base When Lens >Iris Display in the Technical
Sensitivity is set to High: menu is set to Auto and T value
ISO 3200 / ISO 4000 / ISO 5000 / information can be obtained from the
ISO 6400 / ISO 8000 / ISO 10000 / attached lens:
ISO 12800 / ISO 16000 / ISO 20000 / T2.8 / T4 / T5.6
ISO 25600 / ISO 32000 / ISO 40000 /
Auto Shutter On / Off Turns the auto shutter control function
ISO 51200 / ISO 64000 / ISO 80000 /
on/off.
ISO 102400
A.SHT Limit 1/100 / 1/150 / 1/200 / 1/250 / 1/2000 Sets the fastest shutter speed of the auto
When ISO/Gain/EI >Mode is set to ISO with
shutter function.
dynamic range of 800% and Base
Sensitivity is set to Low: A.SHT Point When Lens >Iris Display in the Technical Sets the F-stop value of the iris where
ISO 640 / ISO 800 / ISO 1000 / ISO 1250 / menu is set to F-Number, or when Iris auto shutter operation starts.
ISO 1600 / ISO 2000 / ISO 2500 / Display is set to Auto and T value
ISO 3200 / ISO 4000 / ISO 5000 / information cannot be obtained from the
ISO 6400 / ISO 8000 / ISO 10000 / attached lens:
ISO 12800 / ISO 16000 / ISO 20000 F5.6 / F8 / F11 / F16
When Lens >Iris Display in the Technical
menu is set to Auto and T value
information can be obtained from the
attached lens:
T5.6 / T8 / T11 / T16
87 6. Menu Display and Settings: Shooting Menu

Shooting >Auto Exposure Shooting >White

Sets automatic exposure adjustment settings. Sets white balance settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Clip High On / Off Turns the function that ignores brightest B Gain <A> –99.0 to +99.0 (±0.0) Sets the white balance B gain value
light areas to provide a flatter response at saved in memory A.
high luminance on/off. Color Temp 2000K to 15000K (3200K) Sets the white balance color temperature
Detect 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / Custom Sets the light metering range for <B> saved in memory B.
Window automatically adjusting the exposure
[Note]
according to the brightness of the
Since Color Temp is clipped at 2000K and
subject. (Not available when adjusting 15000K during R/B Gain operation, it may not
exposure manually) be possible to display the correct Color Temp
Detect On / Off Turns the light metering range indication value for the R/B Gain value.
Window on/off. Tint<B> –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the white balance tint value saved in
Indication white memory B.
Average Peak –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the ratio between the average value [Note]
Level Ratio and the peak of the video signal used for Since Tint is clipped at ±99 during R/B Gain
Auto Exposure detection. operation, it may not be possible to display the
correct Tint value for the R/B Gain value.
Custom 40 to 999 (500) Sets the width of the light metering
Width range. R Gain <B> –99.0 to +99.0 (±0.0) Sets the white balance R gain value
saved in memory B.
Custom 70 to 999 (500) Sets the height of the light metering
Height range. B Gain <B> –99.0 to +99.0 (±0.0) Sets the white balance B gain value
saved in memory B.
Custom H –479 to +479 (±0) Sets the horizontal position of the light
Position metering range. Shooting >White Setting
Custom V –464 to +464 (±0) Sets the vertical position of the light Adjusts white balance settings.
Position metering range. Item Sub-item setting Description
Shooting >White Shockless Off / 1 / 2 / 3 Sets the white balance response speed
Sets white balance settings. White when switching white balance mode.
Item Sub-item setting Description Off: Switches instantaneously.
1 to 3: Switches more slowly the higher
Preset White 2000K to 15000K (3200K) Sets the white balance preset value. the number.
Color Temp 2000K to 15000K (3200K) Sets the white balance color temperature ATW Speed 1/2/3/4/5 Sets the response speed in ATW mode.
<A> saved in memory A. 1: Fastest response speed
[Note] White Memory / ATW Selects the white balance adjustment
Since Color Temp is clipped at 2000K and Switch<B> mode that is selected when the WHT BAL
15000K during R/B Gain operation, it may not switch is set to B.
be possible to display the correct Color Temp
value for the R/B Gain value.
Tint<A> –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the white balance tint value saved in
white memory A.
[Note]
Since Tint is clipped at ±99 during R/B Gain
operation, it may not be possible to display the
correct Tint value for the R/B Gain value.
R Gain <A> –99.0 to +99.0 (±0.0) Sets the white balance R gain value
saved in memory A.
88 6. Menu Display and Settings: Shooting Menu

Shooting >White Setting Shooting >Offset White

Adjusts white balance settings. Sets white balance offset settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Filter White On / Off Turns the function that sets the white Offset Color –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the color temperature offset to be
Memory balance memory area for each ND filter Temp<B> added to the white balance in memory B
on/off. when Offset White <B> is set to On.
On: Sets the white balance memory for [Note]
each ND filter. Since Offset Color Temp is clipped at ±99
during R/B Gain operation, it may not be
[Tip]
possible to display the correct Offset Color
In preset mode, there are four settings
Temp value for the R/B Gain value.
(CLEAR / 1 / 2 / 3). In variable mode, there
are two settings (CLEAR / On). Offset –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the Tint value offset to be added to
Off: Sets white balance memory common Tint<B> the white balance in memory B when
to all ND filters. Offset White <B> is set to On.

Shooting >Offset White [Note]

Since Offset Tint is clipped at ±99 during R/B
Sets white balance offset settings.
Gain operation, it may not be possible to
Item Sub-item setting Description display the correct Offset Tint value for the R/B
Gain value.
Offset White On / Off Selects whether to add (On) or not to add
<A> (Off) an offset value to the white balance Offset White On / Off Selects whether to add (On) or not to add
in memory A. <ATW> (Off) an offset value to the ATW white
balance.
Offset Color –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the color temperature offset to be
Temp<A> added to the white balance in memory A Offset Color –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the color temperature offset to be
when Offset White <A> is set to On. Temp<ATW> added to the ATW white balance when
Offset White <ATW> is set to On.
[Note]
Since Offset Color Temp is clipped at ±99 Offset –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the Tint value offset to be added to
during R/B Gain operation, it may not be Tint<ATW> the ATW white balance when Offset
possible to display the correct Offset Color White <ATW> is set to On.
Temp value for the R/B Gain value.
Shooting >Focus
Offset –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the Tint value offset to be added to
Sets focus settings.
Tint<A> the white balance in memory A when
Offset White <A> is set to On. Item Sub-item setting Description
[Note] AF Transition 1(Slow) / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7(Fast) Sets the speed of the focus drive for
Since Offset Tint is clipped at ±99 during R/B Speed when the subject changes during auto
Gain operation, it may not be possible to focus.
display the correct Offset Tint value for the R/B AF Subj. Shift 1(Locked On) / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5(Responsive) Sets the sensitivity for changing subject
Gain value.
Sens. focus during auto focus.
Offset White On / Off Selects whether to add (On) or not to add
<B> (Off) an offset value to the white balance
in memory B.
89 6. Menu Display and Settings: Shooting Menu

Shooting >Focus Shooting >Monitor LUT

Sets focus settings. Sets monitor LUT settings. Available only when shooting in Cine EI mode.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Focus Area Wide / Zone / Flexible Spot Sets the target area for auto focus and Category LUT / User 3D LUT Selects the monitor LUT category.
push auto focus (AF) (page 36).
LUT Select 709(800%) / HG8009G40 / Selects the monitor LUT type.
Wide:
HG8009G33 / S-Log3 / s709 709(800%):
Searches for a subject over a wide
Signal with ITU-R709 base curve with
angle of the image when focusing. [Tip] extended dynamic range up to 800%.
Zone: The “ ” in HG8009G40 and HG8009G33
HG8009G40:
Automatically searches for a focus indicates HG8009G40 and HG8009G33 options
for which LUT data cannot be recorded in Signal using HyperGamma with 800%
point within the specified zone.
metadata (no Cube data). dynamic range, 109% white limit, and
Flexible Spot:
18% gray card video output of 40%.
Focuses on a specified position in the
HG8009G33:
image.
Signal using HyperGamma with 800%
Focus Area Flexible Spot Sets the target area for push auto focus dynamic range, 109% white limit, and
(AF-S) (AF-S). 18% gray card video output of 33%.
Face/Eye Face/Eye Only AF / Face/Eye Priority AF / Enables/disables face/eye detection AF. S-Log3:
Detection AF Off Log signal with 1300% dynamic range
Push AF AF / Single-shot AF(AF-S) Sets the push auto focus mode during that mimics film characteristics, close
Mode manual focus. to Cineon Log curve.
Touch Tracking AF/Spot Focus Sets the action that occurs when the s709:
Function in touch screen is tapped during manual Cinema color equivalent to
MF focus. 709(800%).

AF Assist On / Off When set to On, allows you to [Note]

temporarily override auto focus and set Configurable only when Category is set to LUT.
focus manually. User 3D LUT File name (01 to 16) of user 3D LUT files Selects the user 3D LUT file.
Select stored in internal memory
Shooting >S&Q Motion [Notes]
Sets Slow & Quick Motion mode settings (page 48). ˎˎ Configurable only when Category is set to
User 3D LUT.
Item Sub-item setting Description ˎˎ User 3D LUT files loaded into the unit
running firmware prior to version 4.0 will
Setting On / Off Turns the Slow & Quick motion mode on/ display “ ” in front of the file names. After
off. updating the firmware of the unit to version
When set to On, the following functions 4.0, load the user 3D LUT files again.
are disabled.
Shooting >Monitor LUT Setting
ˎˎ Auto iris
Adjusts monitor LUT settings. Available only when shooting in Cine EI mode.
ˎˎ Auto focus
Frame Rate 1fps to 60fps / 100fps / 120fps / 150fps / Sets the frame rate for Slow & Quick Item Sub-item setting Description
180fps Motion shooting. Internal Rec MLUT On / MLUT Off Selects whether to apply monitor LUT to
[Note] the main video recorded on XQD memory
The available settings vary depending on the cards.
selected system frequency, codec, and video Monitor Out MLUT On / MLUT Off Selects whether to apply monitor LUT to
format.
recorded video and video output, other
than the main video recorded on XQD
memory cards.
90 6. Menu Display and Settings: Shooting Menu

Shooting >Monitor LUT Setting Shooting >Flicker Reduce

Adjusts monitor LUT settings. Available only when shooting in Cine EI mode. Sets flicker correction settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
HD(Sub) Rec/ Display only Displays whether monitor LUT is applied Mode Auto / On / Off Sets the flicker correction mode.
Proxy to the HD (Sub) video and proxy Frequency 50Hz / 60Hz Sets the frequency of the power source
recording video during 4K & HD (Sub) supplying the lighting that is causing the
recording. flicker.
SDI1 Display only Displays whether monitor LUT is applied
Shooting >SteadyShot
to the SDI1 video output.
Sets image stabilization settings.
SDI2 Display only Displays whether monitor LUT is applied
to the SDI2 video output. Item Sub-item setting Description
HDMI Display only Displays whether monitor LUT is applied Setting Active / Standard / Off Turns the image stabilization function
to the HDMI video output. on/off.
VF/Streaming Display only Displays whether monitor LUT is applied [Note]
to the viewfinder and streaming video Enabled when a compatible lens is attached.
output. Shooting >Auto Black Balance
Shooting >Monitor 3D LUT Sets auto black balance settings.
Sets user 3D LUT settings. Item Sub-item setting Description
Item Sub-item setting Description Auto Black Execute / Cancel Executes the auto black balance function.
Load from Loads user 3D LUT data from an SD card. Balance
[Notes]
Utility SD/MS ˎˎ Run the auto black balance function with the
Load from Execute / Cancel Loads uploaded 3D LUT data from the C3 lens cap attached.
ˎˎ Cannot be executed during recording or
Cloud(Private) Portal cloud service (private).
color bar display.
Execute: Execute function.
Load from Execute / Cancel Loads uploaded 3D LUT data from the C3
Cloud(Share) Portal cloud service (share).
Execute: Execute function.
Reset Resets a user 3D LUT data setting.
Reset All Execute / Cancel Resets all user 3D LUT data settings.
Execute: Execute function.
Shooting >Noise Suppression
Sets noise suppression settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description
Setting On / Off Turns the noise suppression function on/
(SDR/HDR) off in SDR and HDR mode.
Level Low / Mid / High Sets the noise suppression level in SDR
(SDR/HDR) and HDR mode.
Setting On / Off Turns the noise suppression function on/
(Cine EI) off in Cine EI mode.
Level Low / Mid / High Sets the noise suppression level in Cine EI
(Cine EI) mode.
91 6. Menu Display and Settings

Project Menu
This section describes the function and settings of each menu item. Project >Rec Format
Factory default settings are shown in bold (for example, 18dB). Sets recording format settings.

Project >Base Setting Item Sub-item setting Description

Sets base settings. Video Format The available settings vary depending on Sets the recording format.
the Frequency and Codec settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description
Frequency Codec Selection options
Shooting SDR / HDR / Cine EI Sets the shooting mode (page 27).
Mode 59.94 RAW –
RAW & 1920×1080P
Project >Rec Format
XAVC-I
Sets recording format settings.
RAW & 1920×1080P 50
Item Sub-item setting Description XAVC-L
Frequency 59.94 / 50 / 29.97 / 25 / 24 / 23.98 Selects the system frequency. RAW & 1920×1080i 50
Imager Scan FF 6K / FFcrop 5K / S35 4K / FF 2K / Sets the combination of imager readout MPEG
Mode S35 2K / S16 2K method (all pixels/pixel binning) and HD422
imager size setting. XAVC-I 4096×2160P
Codec RAW / RAW & XAVC-I / RAW & XAVC-L / Sets the recording/playback mode. 3840×2160P
RAW & MPEG HD 422 / XAVC-I / XAVC-L / 1920×1080P
[Note]
MPEG HD 422 The RAW settings are displayed only when an 1920×1080i
extension unit is attached. XAVC-L 3840×2160P
RAW Output The available settings vary depending on Sets the recording format for an external 1920×1080P 50
Format the Frequency, Imager Scan Mode, and RAW recorder. 1920×1080P 35
Codec settings (page 57). 1920×1080i 50
1920×1080i 35
1920×1080i 25
MPEG 1920×1080i 50
HD422
92 6. Menu Display and Settings: Project Menu

Project >Rec Format Project >Rec Format

Sets recording format settings. Sets recording format settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Video Format 50 RAW – Video Format 25 RAW –
RAW & 1920×1080P RAW & 1920×1080P
XAVC-I XAVC-I
RAW & 1920×1080P 50 RAW & 1920×1080P 50
XAVC-L XAVC-L
RAW & 1920×1080i 50 RAW & 1920×1080P 50
MPEG MPEG
HD422 HD422
XAVC-I 4096×2160P XAVC-I 4096×2160P
3840×2160P 3840×2160P
1920×1080P 1920×1080P
1920×1080i XAVC-L 3840×2160P
XAVC-L 3840×2160P 1920×1080P 50
1920×1080P 50 1920×1080P 35
1920×1080P 35 MPEG 1920×1080P 50
1920×1080i 50 HD422
1920×1080i 35
24 RAW –
1920×1080i 25
XAVC-I 4096×2160P
MPEG 1920×1080i 50
HD422 23.98 RAW –
29.97 RAW – RAW & 1920×1080P
XAVC-I
RAW & 1920×1080P
XAVC-I RAW & 1920×1080P 50
XAVC-L
RAW & 1920×1080P 50
XAVC-L RAW & 1920×1080P 50
MPEG
RAW & 1920×1080P 50
HD422
MPEG
HD422 XAVC-I 4096×2160P
3840×2160P
XAVC-I 4096×2160P
1920×1080P
3840×2160P
1920×1080P XAVC-L 3840×2160P
1920×1080P 50
XAVC-L 3840×2160P
1920×1080P 35
1920×1080P 50
1920×1080P 35 MPEG 1920×1080P 50
HD422
MPEG 1920×1080P 50
HD422
93 6. Menu Display and Settings: Project Menu

Project >Cine EI Setting Project >Proxy Rec

Sets Cine EI mode settings. Sets proxy recording mode settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Color Gamut S-Gamut3/SLog3 / S-Gamut3.Cine/SLog3 Sets the color space in Cine EI mode. Setting On / Off Turns proxy recording mode on/off.
S-Gamut3/SLog3:
[Note]
Sets the color space in Cine EI mode Cannot be set to On when S&Q Motion >Setting
to S-Gamut3. (page 89) in the Shooting menu is set to On.
S-Gamut3.Cine/SLog3: Proxy Format 1920×1080(9Mbps) / 1280×720(9Mbps) / Sets the picture size for the proxy file.
Sets the color space in Cine EI mode 1280×720(6Mbps) / 640×360(3Mbps) When set to 1920×1080(9Mbps) and the
to S-Gamut3.Cine. system frequency is 23.98, recording uses
Embed LUT On / Off Turns the function for recording LUT data progressive scan. For system frequencies
File (Cube data) as metadata in a clip on/off. other than 23.98, recording uses
interlaced scan.
Project >HDR Setting
For settings other than
Sets HDR mode settings.
1920×1080(9Mbps), recording always
Item Sub-item setting Description uses progressive scan, regardless of the
VF SDR On / Off In HDR mode, this turns the function that system frequency.
Preview converts the viewfinder image from HDR Audio CH1/CH2 / CH3/CH4 Selects the audio channel to record to
to SDR on/off when gamma display Channel proxy data.
assist is enabled.
Chunk 30s / 1min / 2min Selects the chunk recording interval for
[Tip] proxy files.
When set to On, SDR Gain is applied to the
viewfinder image. Project >Interval Rec
Sets interval recording mode settings (page 49).
SDR Gain 0dB to –15dB (–6dB) In HDR mode, this sets the SDR Gain
setting that is applied to the viewfinder Item Sub-item setting Description
when VF SDR Preview is set to On. Setting On / Off Turns interval recording mode on/off.
Project >Simul Rec (Setting this mode to On will set all other
Sets simultaneous recording mode settings (page 51). special modes to Off.)
Interval Time 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / 10 / 15 / Sets the interval between recordings in
Item Sub-item setting Description
20 / 30 / 40 / 50 (s) Interval Rec recording mode (when
Setting On / Off Turns the simultaneous recording 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / 10 / 15 / 20 / Interval Rec is set to On).
function on/off and sets the recording 30 / 40 / 50 (min)
destination media. 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 6 / 12 / 24 (h)
Rec Button Rec Button:[SlotA SlotB] Handle Rec Assigns the record buttons used to Number of 1frame / 2frames / 3frames / 6frames / Sets the number of frames to record per
Set Button:[SlotA SlotB] / Rec Button:[SlotA] control each recording media. Frames 9frames / 12frames take in Interval Rec recording mode
Handle Rec Button:[SlotB] / Rec The available settings vary depending on (when Interval Rec is set to On).
Button:[SlotB] Handle Rec Button:[SlotA] the frame frequency of the selected video
Project >4K & HD (Sub) Rec format.
Sets 4K & HD (Sub) recording mode settings. 50P/59.94P:
2frames / 6frames / 12frames
Item Sub-item setting Description
23.98P/25P/29.97P/50i/59.94i:
Setting On / Off Turns 4K & HD (Sub) recording mode on/ 1frame / 3frames / 6frames / 9frames
off.
94 6. Menu Display and Settings: Project Menu

Project >Interval Rec Project >Assignable Button

Sets interval recording mode settings (page 49). Sets function assignments to assignable buttons.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Pre-Lighting Off / 2s / 5s / 10s Sets the number of seconds that the <1> to <10>, Off / Base ISO/Sensitivity / AGC / Assigns functions to assignable buttons.
video light turns on before recording Focus Hold Push AGC / ND Filter Position / Base ISO/Sensitivity:
starts in Interval Rec recording mode. Button Auto ND Filter / Push Auto ND / Auto Iris / Switches the base sensitivity of the
Push Auto Iris / Auto Shutter / image sensor.
[Tip]
Available only when using the HVL-LBPC Auto Exposure Level / Backlight / AGC:
(option). Spotlight / Preset White Select / ATW / Turns the AGC function on/off.
ATW Hold / AF Speed/Sens. / Push AGC:
Project >Picture Cache Rec Focus Zero Marker / Focus Setting / Enables the AGC function while the
Sets picture cache recording mode settings (page 50). Focus Area / Focus Area(AF-S) / button is pressed.
Item Sub-item setting Description Face/Eye Detection AF / Push AF Mode / ND Filter Position:
Setting On / Off Turns picture cache recording mode on/ Push AF/Push MF / Focus Hold / Switches ND filters.
off. Focus Magnifier x3/x6 / Auto ND Filter:
Focus Magnifier x3 / Focus Magnifier x6 / Turns the auto ND filter function on/
Cache Rec Settings vary according to the recording Sets the time for accumulation of images
S&Q Motion / SteadyShot / Crop Select / off.
Time format setting. in picture cache memory (picture cache
Rec / Picture Cache Rec / Rec Review / Push Auto ND:
recording time).
Last Clip Del. / Shot Mark1 / Shot Mark2 / Enables the auto ND filter function
Project >SDI/HDMI Rec Control Clip Flag OK / Clip Flag NG / while the button is pressed.
Sets SDI/HDMI recording control settings. Clip Flag Keep / Color Bars / Tally [Front] / Auto Iris:
Item Sub-item setting Description CALL / DURATION/TC/U-BIT / Display / Turns the iris function on/off.
Lens Info / Video Signal Monitor / Marker / Push Auto Iris:
Setting Off / SDI/HDMI Remote I/F / Parallel Rec Sets recording start/stop control of an
VF Adjust / VF Mode / Gamma Display Enables the auto iris function while
external device via the SDI/HDMI output
Assist / Peaking / Zebra / Audio Monitor the button is pressed.
signal.
CH / Audio Mon. CH Switch / Thumbnail / Auto Shutter:
Off:
Touch Operation / Handle Zoom / NFC / Turns the auto shutter function on/
Do not use remote control.
Network Client Mode / off.
SDI/HDMI Remote I/F:
Auto Upload (Proxy) / Direct Menu / Auto Exposure Level:
Record stop/start control of an
User Menu / Menu Displays/exits the Auto Exposure
external connected device, when
Level direct menu.
there is no media inserted in the
Backlight:
camcorder. Not synchronized with
Switches between Backlight and
frame accuracy to camcorder media.
Standard.
Parallel Rec:
Spotlight:
Record stop/start control of an
Switches between Spotlight and
external connected device, when
Standard.
media is inserted in the camcorder.
Preset White Select:
Synchronized with frame accuracy to
Switches the white balance preset
camcorder media.
mode value.
ATW:
Turns the ATW function on/off.
ATW Hold:
Pauses ATW function operation.
95 6. Menu Display and Settings: Project Menu

Project >Assignable Button Project >Assignable Button

Sets function assignments to assignable buttons. Sets function assignments to assignable buttons.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
<1> to <10>, AF Speed/Sens.: <1> to <10>, Rec:
Focus Hold Switches the AF transition speed Focus Hold Starts/stops recording.
Button setting and AF subject shift sensitivity Button Picture Cache Rec:
setting. Turns picture cache recording mode
Focus Zero Marker: on/off.
Sets the current focus position as the Rec Review:
reference position. Turns the Rec Review function on/off.
Focus Setting: Last Clip Del.:
Sets the focus area. Executes the last clip delete (for
Focus Area: retake) function.
Sets the focus area for AF and push Shot Mark1:
AF. Executes the Add Shot Mark1
Focus Area(AF-S): function.
Sets the focus area for push AF Shot Mark2:
(AF-S). Executes the Add Shot Mark2
Face/Eye Detection AF: function.
Switches the face/eye detection AF Clip Flag OK:
settings. Executes the Add OK function.
Push AF Mode: Press twice to execute Delete Clip
Switches the Push AF mode setting. Flag.
Push AF/Push MF: Clip Flag NG:
In MF focus mode, activates AF while Executes the Add NG function.
the button is pressed. Press twice to execute Delete Clip
In AF focus mode, activates MF while Flag.
the button is pressed. Clip Flag Keep:
Focus Hold: Executes the Add Keep function.
In AF focus mode, focus is fixed while Press twice to execute Delete Clip
the button is pressed. Flag.
Focus Magnifier x3/x6: Color Bars:
Focus Magnifier x3: Turns the color bars on/off.
Focus Magnifier x6: Tally [Front]:
Turns the focus magnifier function Turns the recording/tally lamp (front)
on/off. light/flashing function on/off.
S&Q Motion: CALL:
Turns Slow & Quick Motion on/off. Displays a call on the tally lamp of
Sets the recording frame rate if the remote control panel connected
pressed and held. to the unit while the button is
SteadyShot: pressed.
Switches between Active, Standard, DURATION/TC/U-BIT:
and Off. Switches between Time Code, Users
Crop Select: Bit, and Duration.
Switches the imager scan mode Display:
setting. Turns the screen indicators on/off.
96 6. Menu Display and Settings: Project Menu

Project >Assignable Button Project >Assignable Button

Sets function assignments to assignable buttons. Sets function assignments to assignable buttons.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
<1> to <10>, Lens Info: <1> to <10>, User Menu:
Focus Hold Switches the depth-of-field indicator. Focus Hold Displays/exits the User menu.
Button Video Signal Monitor: Button Menu:
Switches the video signal monitor Displays/exits the setup menu.
(such as a waveform monitor).
Project >Assignable Dial
Marker:
Sets function assignments for assignable dial and sets rotation direction.
Turns the marker function on/off.
VF Adjust: Item Sub-item setting Description
Displays the level bars for adjusting Assignable Off / ISO/Gain/EI / ND Filter / IRIS / Assigns functions to the assignable dial.
the brightness of the viewfinder Dial Audio Input Level ISO/Gain/EI:
screen. Adjusts the gain or EI.
VF Mode: ND Filter:
Switches the viewfinder display Adjusts the ND filter.
between color and B&W. IRIS:
Gamma Display Assist: Adjusts the iris.
Switches the gamma display assist Audio Input Level:
function. Adjusts the audio recording level.
Peaking: Assignable Normal / Opposite Sets the direction of rotation of the
Turns the peaking function on/off. Dial Direction assignable dial.
Zebra: Normal: Turn in normal direction.
Turns the Zebra function on/off. Opposite: Turn in opposite direction.
Audio Monitor CH:
Switches the combination of audio Project >Multi Function Dial
channels (page 53). Assigns functions to the multi-function dial.
Audio Mon. CH Switch: Item Sub-item setting Description
Switches the combination of audio
Default Off / IRIS / ISO/Gain/EI / Audio Input Level Assigns the default function to the
channels (page 53).
Function multi-function dial.
Thumbnail:
IRIS:
Displays/exits the thumbnail screen.
Adjusts the iris.
Touch Operation:
ISO/Gain/EI:
Turns touch operation on/off.
Adjusts the gain or EI.
Handle Zoom:
Audio Input Level:
Switches the handle zoom operation.
Adjusts the audio recording level.
NFC:
Executes the NFC function.
Network Client Mode:
Turns network client mode on/off.
Auto Upload (Proxy):
Turns proxy file auto transfer on/off
or sets chunk mode.
Direct Menu:
Displays/exits the direct menu.
97 6. Menu Display and Settings: Project Menu

Project >User File Project >Planning Metadata

Sets settings related to user file operations. Sets settings related to planning metadata operations.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Load from Execute / Cancel Loads user file settings from an SD card. Load from Execute / Cancel Loads planning metadata from the
Utility SD/MS Execute: Execute function. Media(A) or memory card in slot A or B.
Save to Utility Execute / Cancel Saves user file settings to an SD card. Load from Select Execute to display the list of the
SD/MS Execute: Execute function. Media(B) planning metadata files stored on the
memory card in slot A or B. Select a file
File ID Displays a screen for displaying/editing
using Load and then select Execute to
the file ID of user files.
load the file.
Load On / Off Sets whether to load User menu
Customize customized information when Load from [Notes]
Data Utility SD/MS is executed. ˎˎ The file list displays up to 64 files. Even if the
total number of planning metadata files is
Load White On / Off Sets whether to load white balance 64 or less, all of the planning metadata files
Data information when Load from Utility may not appear if the directory where they
SD/MS is executed. are located in the memory card (XDROOT/
General/Sony/Planning) contains 512 or
Project >All File more files.
Sets settings related to ALL files. ˎˎ After you start loading, do not remove the
memory card until the completion message
Item Sub-item setting Description is displayed.
Load from Execute / Cancel Loads an ALL file
Utility SD/MS Execute: Execute function.
Load from Execute / Cancel Loads an uploaded ALL file from the C3
Cloud(Private) Portal cloud service (private).
Execute: Execute function.
Load from Execute / Cancel Loads an uploaded ALL file from the C3
Cloud(Share) Portal cloud service (share).
Execute: Execute function.
Save to Utility Execute / Cancel Saves an ALL file.
SD/MS Execute: Execute function.
Save to Execute / Cancel Saves ALL file settings file to the C3 Portal
Cloud(Private) cloud service (private).
Execute: Execute function.
Save to Execute / Cancel Saves ALL file settings file to the C3 Portal
Cloud(Share) cloud service (share).
Execute: Execute function.
File ID Assigns a name to the file.
Load Network On / Off Sets whether to load Network menu
Data settings information when Load from
Utility SD/MS, Load from Cloud(Private),
or Load from Cloud(Share) is executed.
98 6. Menu Display and Settings: Project Menu

Project >Planning Metadata

Sets settings related to planning metadata operations.
Item Sub-item setting Description
Properties Execute / Cancel Select Execute to display the properties
of the planning metadata loaded in the
memory of the camcorder.
File Name:
File name
Assign ID:
Assigned ID
Created:
Time and date the file was created
Modified:
Time and date of most recent file
modification
Modified by:
Name of person who modified the
file
Title1:
Title1 specified in file (clip name in
ASCII format)
Title2:
Title2 specified in file (clip name in
UTF-8 format)
Material Group:
Number of material groups (groups
of clips recorded using the same
planning metadata)
Shot Mark0 to 9:
Names defined for shot marks 0 to 9
Clear Execute / Cancel Select Execute to clear the planning
Memory metadata loaded in the memory of the
camcorder.
Clip Name Title1(ASCII) / Title2(UTF-8) Sets the display mode of the clip name
Display specified in planning metadata.
99 6. Menu Display and Settings

Paint Menu
This section describes the function and settings of each menu item. Paint >Gamma
Factory default settings are shown in bold (for example, 18dB). Sets gamma correction settings.

Paint >HDR Paint Setting Item Sub-item setting Description

Sets High Dynamic Range (HDR) settings. Setting On / Off Turns the gamma correction function on/
off.
Item Sub-item setting Description
Step Gamma 0.35 to 0.45 to 0.90 Sets a gamma correction value in 0.05
HLG Look Natural / Live Sets the type of HLG when Shooting
steps.
Mode is set to HDR.
Natural: Master –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the master gamma level.
Characteristic conforming to ITU-R Gamma
BT.2100(HLG). R Gamma –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the R gamma level.
Live: G Gamma –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the G gamma level.
Characteristic conforming to ITU-R
B Gamma –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the B gamma level.
BT.2100(HLG) that delivers improved
HDR performance. Gamma Original / STD / HG / S-Log3 Selects original gamma (Original),
Category standard gamma (STD), hypergamma
[Note] (HG), or S-Log3.
Using the Live setting may increase the noise
level. Gamma When Gamma Category is set to STD: Selects the gamma table used for
HDR Black –95 to +103 (±0) Sets the HDR black offset relative to the Select STD1 DVW / STD2 ×4.5 / STD3 ×3.5 / gamma correction.
Offset SDR setting (Master Black) when STD4 240M / STD5 R709 / STD6 ×5.0 See the table below for details about
Shooting Mode is set to HDR. When Gamma Category is set to HG: hypergamma and S-Log3.
HG1 3250G36 / HG2 4600G30 / HG3
HDR Knee On / Off Turns the HDR signal knee correction Name Dynamic White 18% gray
3259G40 / HG4 4609G33 / HG7
function on/off when Shooting Mode is range limit card video
8009G40 / HG8 8009G33
set to HDR. output (20%
When Gamma Category is set to S-Log3:
HDR Knee –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the knee point for HDR signals when video input)
S-Log3
Point HDR Knee is set to On. When Gamma Category is set to Original: HG1 3250G36 325% 100% 36%
HDR Knee –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the knee slope for HDR signals when S-Cinetone HG2 4600G30 460% 100% 30%
Slope HDR Knee is set to On. HG3 3259G40 325% 109% 40%
Paint >Black HG4 4609G33 460% 109% 33%
Sets black settings. HG7 8009G40 800% 109% 40%
Item Sub-item setting Description HG8 8009G33 800% 109% 33%
Master Black –99.0 to +99.0 (±0.0) Sets the master black level. S-Log3 1300% – 41%
R Black –99.0 to +99.0 (±0.0) Sets the R black level.
B Black –99.0 to +99.0 (±0.0) Sets the B black level.
100 6. Menu Display and Settings: Paint Menu

Paint >Black Gamma Paint >White Clip

Sets black gamma correction settings. Sets white clip adjustment settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Setting On / Off Turns the black gamma correction Setting On / Off Turns white clipping adjustment function
function on/off. on/off.
(Enabled when Gamma >Gamma (Enabled when Gamma >Gamma
Category is set to STD) Category is set to STD)
[Note] [Note]
The Black Gamma and Knee >Knee Saturation The setting is reset to On when the camcorder
functions cannot be used at the same time. is turned off. To set to Off permanently, set
Range Low / L.Mid / H.Mid Selects the effective range of the black Level to 109%.
gamma correction. Level 90.0% to 109.0% Sets the white clip level.
Master Black –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the master black gamma level.
Paint >Detail(4K/QFHD)
Gamma
Sets detail (4K/QFHD) adjustment settings.
Paint >Knee Item Sub-item setting Description
Sets knee correction settings.
Setting On / Off Turns the detail adjustment function on/
Item Sub-item setting Description
off.
Setting On / Off Turns the knee correction function on/ Level –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the detail level.
off.
H/V Ratio –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the mix ratio between the H detail
(Enabled when Gamma >Gamma
level and the V detail level.
Category is set to STD)
Crispening –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the crispening level.
Auto Knee On / Off Turns the auto knee function on/off.
Frequency –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the center frequency of the detail
Point 75% to 109% (90%) Sets the knee point.
(detail thickness).
Slope –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the knee slope. The detail is thinner the higher the center
Knee On / Off Enables/disables knee saturation frequency, and thicker the lower the
Saturation adjustment (adjusts coloring above the center frequency.
knee point). Knee On / Off Turns the knee aperture correction
[Note] Aperture function on/off.
The Black Gamma and Knee >Knee Saturation Knee –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the knee aperture level.
functions cannot be used at the same time. Aperture
Knee –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the level for adjusting the coloring Level
Saturation above the knee point (knee saturation). White Limit –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the white-side detail limiter.
Level
Black Limit –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the black-side detail limiter.
V Detail NAM / Y / G / G+R Sets the signal source for creating the V
Creation detail to NAM (G or R, whichever is
higher), Y, G, or G+R.
101 6. Menu Display and Settings: Paint Menu

Paint >Detail(HD) Paint >Skin Detail

Sets detail (HD) adjustment settings. Sets skin detail correction settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Setting On / Off Turns the detail adjustment function on/ Width 0 to 90 (40) Sets the range for the hue of the color
off. targeted for skin detail correction.
Level –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the detail level. Paint >Aperture
H/V Ratio –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the mix ratio between the H detail Sets aperture correction settings.
level and the V detail level. Item Sub-item setting Description
Crispening –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the crispening level.
Setting On / Off Enables/disables aperture correction
Frequency –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the center frequency of the detail (processing that improves resolution by
(detail thickness). adding a high-frequency aperture signal
The detail is thinner the higher the center to the video signal to correct
frequency, and thicker the lower the deterioration due to high-frequency
center frequency. characteristics).
Knee On / Off Turns the knee aperture correction Level –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the aperture correction level.
Aperture function on/off.
Knee –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the knee aperture level. Paint >Matrix
Aperture Sets matrix correction settings.
Level Item Sub-item setting Description
White Limit –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the white-side detail limiter. Setting On / Off Turns the matrix correction function on/
Black Limit –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the black-side detail limiter. off.
Adaptive On / Off Turns the adaptive matrix function on/
V Detail NAM / Y / G / G+R Sets the signal source for creating the V
Matrix off.
Creation detail to NAM (G or R, whichever is
higher), Y, G, or G+R. Preset Matrix On / Off Turns the preset matrix function on/off.
Preset Select S-Cinetone / Standard / FL Light / Selects a preset matrix.
Paint >Skin Detail
Cinema / BT.709 / BT.2020
Sets skin detail correction settings.
User Matrix On / Off Turns the user matrix correction function
Item Sub-item setting Description
on/off.
Setting On / Off Turns the skin detail correction function User Matrix –99 to +99 (±0) Adjusts the color saturation of the entire
on/off. Level image.
Area Execute / Cancel Detects the color used for skin detail User Matrix –99 to +99 (±0) Adjusts the color tone (phase) of the
Detection correction. Phase entire image.
Execute: Execute function.
User Matrix –99 to +99 (±0) Sets a user-defined R-G user matrix.
Area On / Off Turns the function that displays the zebra R-G
Indication pattern in the target color area for the
User Matrix –99 to +99 (±0) Sets a user-defined R-B user matrix.
skin detail correction on/off.
R-B
Level –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the skin detail level. User Matrix –99 to +99 (±0) Sets a user-defined G-R user matrix.
Saturation –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the saturation of the color targeted G-R
for skin detail correction. User Matrix –99 to +99 (±0) Sets a user-defined G-B user matrix.
Hue 0 to 359 Sets the hue of the color targeted for skin G-B
detail correction.
102 6. Menu Display and Settings: Paint Menu

Paint >Matrix
Sets matrix correction settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description
User Matrix –99 to +99 (±0) Sets a user-defined B-R user matrix.
B-R
User Matrix –99 to +99 (±0) Sets a user-defined B-G user matrix.
B-G
Paint >Multi Matrix
Sets multi matrix correction settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description
Setting On / Off Turns the multi matrix correction function
on/off.
Area On / Off Turns the area indication function on/off.
Indication
Color Execute / Cancel Detects the color used for multi matrix
Detection correction.
Reset Execute / Cancel Resets the hue and saturation of each
axis color to the default values.
Axis B / B+ / MG– / MG / MG+ / R / R+ / YL– / Selects the axis.
YL / YL+ / G– / G / G+ / CY / CY+ / B–
Hue –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the hue of the color used for multi
matrix correction.
Saturation –99 to +99 (±0) Sets the saturation of the color used for
multi matrix correction.
Paint >Scene File
Sets settings related to scene files.
Item Sub-item setting Description
Recall Loads a scene file from internal memory.
Internal
Memory
Store Internal Execute / Cancel Saves a scene file in internal memory.
Memory Execute: Execute function.
Load from Execute / Cancel Loads a scene file from an SD card.
Utility SD/MS Execute: Execute function.
Save to Utility Execute / Cancel Saves a scene file to an SD card.
SD/MS Execute: Execute function.
File ID Assigns a name to the file.
Scene White On / Off Sets whether to apply the white balance
Data data when loading scene files.
103 6. Menu Display and Settings

TC/Media Menu
This section describes the function and settings of each menu item. TC/Media >HDMI TC Out
Factory default settings are shown in bold (for example, 18dB). Sets settings related to timecode output when using HDMI.

TC/Media >Timecode Item Sub-item setting Description

Sets timecode settings. Setting On / Off Sets whether to output the timecode to
Item Sub-item setting Description devices for other purposes, using HDMI.

Mode Preset / Regen / Clock Sets the timecode running mode. TC/Media >Clip Name Format
Preset: Sets settings related to clip naming and deletion.
Starts running from a preset value. Item Sub-item setting Description
Regen:
Auto Naming Cam ID + Reel# / Title / Plan Selects the clip naming format.
Starts running from the timecode of
Cam ID + Reel#:
the end of the previous clip.
Camera ID + Reel Number + Shot
Clock:
Number + date + random character
Uses the internal clock as the
string
timecode.
Title:
Run Rec Run / Free Run Rec Run: Runs only when recording. Arbitrary character string specified in
Free Run: Always running, regardless of Title Prefix + clip number
camcorder operation. Plan:
Setting Sets the timecode to an arbitrary value. Uses a clip name specified in
SET: Set the value. planning metadata, if available. Or
Reset Execute / Cancel Resets the timecode to 00:00:00:00. uses the name specified in Title Prefix
Execute: Execute function. + clip number, if unavailable.
TC Format DF / NDF Sets the timecode format. Camera ID A to Z Sets the camera ID used for creating clip
DF: Drop Frame names.
NDF: Non-Drop Frame [Note]
TC/Media >TC Display Configurable only when Auto Naming is set to
Cam ID + Reel#.
Sets time data display settings.
Reel Number 001 to 999 Sets the reel number numeric portion
Item Sub-item setting Description used for creating clip names.
Display Select Timecode / Users Bit / Duration Switches the time data display. [Note]
Configurable only when Auto Naming is set to
TC/Media >Users Bit
Cam ID + Reel#.
Sets settings related to user bits.
Camera C/L/R Sets the Shot Number prefix character
Item Sub-item setting Description Position used for creating clip names.
Mode Fix / Time Sets the user bit mode. [Note]
Fix: Uses an arbitrary fixed value in user Configurable only when Auto Naming is set to
bits. Cam ID + Reel#.
Time: Uses the current time in user bits.
Setting Sets the user bits to an arbitrary value.
104 6. Menu Display and Settings: TC/Media Menu

TC/Media >Clip Name Format TC/Media >Update Media

Sets settings related to clip naming and deletion. Updates the management file on memory cards.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Title Prefix nnn_ (nnn is the last 3 digits of the serial Sets the title part (4 to 46 characters) of Media(A) Execute / Cancel Updates the management file on the
number) the clip name. XQD memory card in slot A.
(Max. 7-digit display) Opens a character string entry screen. Execute: Execute function.
Media(B) Execute / Cancel Updates the management file on the
Character string entry screen structure XQD memory card in slot B.
Character selection area (3 lines): Execute: Execute function.
Selects the characters to insert at the
TC/Media >Format Media
cursor position of the Title Prefix
Initializes memory cards.
area.
!#$%()+.-.;=@[ ]^_~0123456789 Item Sub-item setting Description
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz Media(A) Execute / Cancel Initializes the XQD memory card in slot A.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Execute: Execute function.
Cursor operation area (1 line): Media(B) Execute / Cancel Initializes the XQD memory card in slot B.
Space: Inserts a space at the cursor Execute: Execute function.
position.
Utility SD/MS Execute / Cancel Initializes the UTILITY SD card.
: Moves the cursor to the left.
Execute: Execute function.
: Moves the cursor to the right.
BS: Deletes the character to the left
of the cursor position.
Title Prefix area (1 line):
Area for entering the title.

To set the title

1. Select the character to insert at the
cursor position in the Title Prefix area
from the character selection area
using the arrow buttons, and press
the SET button. (The selected
character is inserted, and the cursor
moves to the right.)
2. Repeat step 1 to set the title. (Use BS
as required.)
3. After setting the title, select Done to
close the character entry screen.
Number Set When Auto Naming is set to Title: Sets the 4-digit number suffix of the clip
0001 to 9999 name.
When Auto Naming is set to Plan: Sets a 5-digit number if using a planning
00001 to 99999 metadata file.
105 6. Menu Display and Settings

Monitoring Menu
This section describes the function and settings of each menu item. Monitoring >Display On/Off
Factory default settings are shown in bold (for example, 18dB). Sets display item settings.

Monitoring >Output On/Off Item Sub-item setting Description

Sets video output settings. Network On / Off Selects the items to display in the
Item Sub-item setting Description Status viewfinder.
File Transfer On / Off
SDI1 On / Off Turns SDI1 output on/off.
Status
SDI2 On / Off Turns SDI2 output on/off. NCM/ On / Off
HDMI On / Off Turns HDMI output on/off. Streaming
Status
Monitoring >Output Format
Rec/Play On / Off
Sets output format settings.
Status
Item Sub-item setting Description
RAW Output On / Off
SDI1 For details about settings, see “Output Sets the SDI and HDMI output resolution. Control
SDI2 Formats and Limitations” (page 130). Status
[Note]
HDMI The Output Format setting may not be Tally On / Off
configurable in Picture Cache Rec mode. If this
REF Battery On / Off
occurs, temporarily set Picture Cache Rec to
Off, and then change the setting. Remain
Focus Mode On / Off

Monitoring >Output Setting Focus On / Off

Sets output conversion mode settings. Position

Item Sub-item setting Description Focus Marker On / Off

Focus Area On / Off
RAW to HD Edge Crop / Letter Box Sets the conversion mode for HD video
Indicator
Conv. output of 17:9 video.
Focus Area On / Off
Monitoring >Output Display Ind.(AF-S)
Sets output signal settings. Face/Eye On / Off
Item Sub-item setting Description Detection
Frame
Setting On / Off Selects whether to superimpose menus
and status on the SDI output signal and Lens Info On / Off
HDMI output signal. Imager Scan On / Off
SDI1 Settings vary depending on the Output Displays whether the menu and status Mode
Format setting. For details, see “Output information is embedded in the SDI1 Rec Format On / Off
Formats and Limitations” (page 130). output signal. Frame Rate On / Off
SDI2 Displays whether the menu and status
Zoom On / Off
information is embedded in the SDI2
Position
output signal.
UWP RF Level On / Off
HDMI Displays whether the menu and status
information is embedded in the HDMI GPS On / Off
output signal. SteadyShot On / Off
106 6. Menu Display and Settings: Monitoring Menu

Monitoring >Display On/Off Monitoring >Marker

Sets display item settings. Sets marker display settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Gamma/LUT On / Off Setting On / Off Turns the display of all markers on/off.
SDI/HDMI On / Off Color White / Yellow / Cyan / Green / Magenta / Selects the marker signal color.
Rec Control Red / Blue
Gamma On / Off Center 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / Off Selects the center marker.
Display Assist Marker
Proxy Status On / Off Safety Zone On / Off Turns the safety zone marker on/off.
Base ISO/ On / Off Safety Area 80% / 90% / 92.5% / 95% Selects the size of the safety zone marker
Sensitivity (as a percentage of total screen size).
Media Status On / Off Aspect Line / Mask / Off Selects the type of aspect marker.
Video Signal Off / Waveform / Vector / Histogram Marker
Monitor Aspect Mask 0 to 15 (12) Sets the level of the video signal outside
Clip Name On / Off the marker.
Aspect Safety On / Off Turns the aspect safety zone marker on/
White On / Off
Zone off.
Balance
Aspect Safety 80% / 90% / 92.5% / 95% Selects the size of the aspect safety zone
Scene File On / Off
Area marker (as a percentage of total screen
Focus On / Off size).
Indicator
Aspect Select 4:3 / 13:9 / 14:9 / 15:9 / 16:9 / 17:9 / Sets the mode when displaying the
Auto On / Off 1.66:1 / 1.85:1 / 2.35:1 / 2.39:1 aspect marker.
Exposure
Mode [Note]
When VF Setting >De-Squeeze (page 107) in
Auto On / Off the Monitoring menu is not set to Off(1.0x), this
Exposure setting is set to 2.39:1 (fixed).
Level Guide Frame On / Off Turns the guide frame display on/off.
Timecode On / Off 100% Marker On / Off Turns the 100% marker on/off.
ND Filter On / Off User Box On / Off Turns the user box marker display on/off.
Iris On / Off User Box 3 to 479 (240) Sets the user box marker width (distance
ISO/Gain/EI On / Off Width from the center to the left and right
Shutter On / Off edges).

Level Gauge On / Off User Box 3 to 269 (135) Sets the user box marker height (distance
Height from the center to the top and bottom
Audio Level On / Off edges).
Meter
User Box H –476 to +476 (0) Sets the horizontal position of the center
Video Level On / Off Position of the user box marker.
Warning
User Box V –266 to +266 (0) Sets the vertical position of the center of
Clip Number On / Off Position the user box marker.
Notice On / Off
Message
107 6. Menu Display and Settings: Monitoring Menu

Monitoring >VF Setting Monitoring >Zebra

Sets viewfinder settings. Sets zebra pattern settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Contrast –99 to +99 (±0) Adjusts the contrast (difference between Setting On / Off Turns the zebra function on/off.
light and dark) of the viewfinder image. Zebra Select 1 / 2 / Both Selects the zebra pattern type (Zebra 1,
Brightness –99 to +99 (±0) Adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder Zebra 2, Both).
image. Zebra1 Level 0% to 107% (70%) Sets the Zebra 1 display level.
Color Mode Color / B&W Selects the display mode of the
Zebra1 1% to 20% (10%) Sets the Zebra 1 aperture level.
viewfinder in E-E/recording mode.
Aperture
De-Squeeze Off(1.0x) / 1.3x / 2.0x Selects the de-squeeze factor for Level
displaying an image in the viewfinder
Zebra2 Level 0% to 109% (100%) Sets the Zebra 2 display level.
when shooting with an anamorphic lens.
Monitoring >Gamma Display Assist
Sets gamma display assist settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description
Setting In SDR or Cine EI mode: Turns the gamma display assist function
On / Off on/off.
In HDR mode:
On / Off
Monitoring >Peaking
Sets peaking settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description
Setting On / Off Turns the peaking function on/off.
Type Normal / Color Selects the peaking type.
Normal: Normal peaking
Color: Color peaking
Normal Normal / High Selects the peaking frequency.
Peaking
Frequency
Normal 0 to 99 (50) Sets the normal peaking level.
Peaking Level
Color B&W / Red / Yellow / Blue Selects the color of the color peaking
signal.
Color Peaking 0 to 99 (50) Sets the color peaking level.
Level
108 6. Menu Display and Settings

Audio Menu
This section describes the function and settings of each menu item. Audio >Audio Input
Factory default settings are shown in bold (for example, 18dB). Sets audio input settings.
Refer to “Block Diagrams” (page 146).
Item Sub-item setting Description
Audio >Audio Input CH3 Wind On / Off Enables/disables the wind reduction
Sets audio input settings. Filter filter for channel 3 recording.
Item Sub-item setting Description CH4 Wind On / Off Enables/disables the wind reduction
Filter filter for channel 4 recording.
CH1 MI SHOE Shoe CH1 / Wireless Sets the external input function when the
CH3 Level Auto / Manual Selects automatic audio input level
Input Select CH1 INPUT select switch (page 7) is
Control adjustment or manual adjustment for
set to MI SHOE.
recording channel 3.
[Note]
“Wireless” is displayed only when an extension [Note]
unit is attached. If both CH3 Input Select and CH4 Input Select
are set to Internal MIC, CH4 is switched to
CH2 EXT INPUT1 / INPUT2 Switches the external input source for automatic/manual in conjunction with this
Input Select recording on channel 2. setting.
CH2 MI SHOE Shoe CH2 / Wireless Sets the external input function when the CH4 Level Auto / Manual Selects automatic audio input level
Input Select CH2 INPUT select switch (page 7) is Control adjustment or manual adjustment for
set to MI SHOE. recording channel 4.
[Note] [Note]
“Wireless” is displayed only when an extension If both CH3 Input Select and CH4 Input Select
unit is attached. are set to Internal MIC, CH4 is switched to
CH3 Input Off / INPUT1 / Internal MIC / Shoe CH1 / Switches the input source for recording automatic/manual in conjunction with the CH3
Level Control setting.
Select Wireless on channel 3.
Audio Input 0 to 99 Sets the master audio input level.
[Note]
Level Can be used as the master volume,
“Wireless” can be selected only when an
extension unit is attached. according to the settings of CH1 Level to
CH4 Level.
CH4 Input Off / INPUT1 / INPUT2 / Internal MIC / Switches the input source for recording
Select Shoe CH2 / Wireless on channel 4. Limiter Mode Off / –6dB / –9dB / –12dB / –15dB / –17dB Selects the limiter characteristic for large
input signals when adjusting the audio
[Note] input level manually.
“Wireless” can be selected only when an
extension unit is attached. CH1&2 AGC Mono / Stereo Sets the auto level adjustment mode for
Mode recording channel 1 and channel 2. When
INPUT1 MIC –80dB / –70dB / –60dB / –50dB / –40dB / Sets the reference recording level for XLR
set to Stereo, the AGC is linked between
Reference –30dB microphone input from INPUT1.
channels.
INPUT2 MIC –80dB / –70dB / –60dB / –50dB / –40dB / Sets the reference recording level for XLR
CH3&4 AGC Mono / Stereo Sets the auto level adjustment mode for
Reference –30dB microphone input from INPUT2.
Mode recording channel 3 and channel 4. When
Line Input +4dB / 0dB / –3dB / EBUL Selects the reference input level when
set to Stereo, the AGC is linked between
Reference the INPUT1/INPUT2 switch is set to LINE.
channels.
Reference –20dB / –18dB / –16dB / –12dB / EBUL Selects the recording level of the 1 kHz
AGC Spec –6dB / –9dB / –12dB / –15dB / –17dB Selects the AGC characteristic.
Level reference tone signal.
CH1 Wind On / Off Enables/disables the wind reduction
Filter filter for channel 1 recording.
CH2 Wind On / Off Enables/disables the wind reduction
Filter filter for channel 2 recording.
109 6. Menu Display and Settings: Audio Menu

Audio >Audio Input Audio >Audio Output

Sets audio input settings. Sets audio output settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
1kHz Tone on On / Off Turns the 1 kHz reference tone signal on/ Monitor CH CH1/CH2 / CH3/CH4 / MIX ALL / CH1 / Selects the audio channel output to the
Color Bars off when displaying color bars. CH2 / CH3 / CH4 headphone jack and built-in speaker.
[Note] [Note]
When set to On, the 1 kHz reference tone signal If audio for multiple channels is set for
is set for recording on channel 3 and channel 4, simultaneous output, the output level for
even if CH3 Input Select and CH4 Input Select each channel is reduced for output to prevent
are set to Off. clipping.
CH1 Level Input without XLR adaptor Sets the combination of audio input level Headphone Mono / Stereo Selects whether the headphone jack
Audio Input Level / Side / Level+Side adjustments enabled for recording Out output is monaural (Mono) or stereo
Input with XLR adaptor (page 46) channel 1. (Stereo).
Audio Input Level / Through Alarm Level 0 to 7 (4) Adjusts the volume of the alarm.
[Note]
“Side” refers to the AUDIO LEVEL (CH1) dial on HDMI Output CH1/CH2 / CH3/CH4 Sets the combination of audio channels
the side of the camcorder. When Level+Side
CH on the HDMI output.
is selected, the audio recording level is
determined by the combination of the Audio
Input Level and dial settings (page 146).
CH2 Level Input without XLR adaptor Sets the combination of audio input level
Audio Input Level / Side / Level+Side adjustments enabled for recording
Input with XLR adaptor (page 46) channel 2.
Audio Input Level / Through
[Note]
“Side” refers to the AUDIO LEVEL (CH2) dial on
the side of the camcorder. When Level+Side
is selected, the audio recording level is
determined by the combination of the Audio
Input Level and dial settings (page 146).
CH3 Level Input without XLR adaptor Sets the combination of audio input level
Audio Input Level / Side / Level+Side adjustments enabled for recording
Input with XLR adaptor (page 46) channel 3.
Audio Input Level / Through
[Note]
“Side” refers to the AUDIO LEVEL (CH3) dial on
the side of the camcorder. When Level+Side
is selected, the audio recording level is
determined by the combination of the Audio
Input Level and dial settings (page 147).
CH4 Level Input without XLR adaptor Sets the combination of audio input level
Audio Input Level / Side / Level+Side adjustments enabled for recording
Input with XLR adaptor (page 46) channel 4.
Audio Input Level / Through
[Note]
“Side” refers to the AUDIO LEVEL (CH4) dial on
the side of the camcorder. When Level+Side
is selected, the audio recording level is
determined by the combination of the Audio
Input Level and dial settings (page 147).
110 6. Menu Display and Settings

Thumbnail Menu
This section describes the function and settings of each menu item. Thumbnail >Copy Clip
Factory default settings are shown in bold (for example, 18dB). Copies clips.
Item Sub-item setting Description
Thumbnail
Select Clip Copies selected clips.
Item Sub-item setting Description
All Clips Copies all clips.
Display Clip Displays the clip properties screen.
Properties Thumbnail >Copy Sub Clip
Copies sub-clips.
Thumbnail >Set Shot Mark
Sets shot mark settings. Item Sub-item setting Description
Item Sub-item setting Description All Clips Copies all sub-clips recorded in 4K & HD
(Sub) recording mode to another media
Delete Shot Deletes Shot Mark1.
as main clips.
Mark1
Delete Shot Deletes Shot Mark2. Thumbnail >Transfer Clip
Mark2 Transfers clips.

Thumbnail >Set Clip Flag [Note]

Transfer Clip cannot be configured when Access Authentication >Password in the Network menu is undefined.
Sets clip flag settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description

Add OK Adds an OK flag. Select Clip Transfers selected clips.

Add NG Adds an NG flag. All Clips Transfers all clips.

Add KEEP Adds a Keep flag. [Note]

Up to 200 clips can be transferred.
Delete Clip Deletes all flags.
Flag Thumbnail >Transfer Clip (Proxy)
Transfers proxy clips.
Thumbnail >Lock/Unlock Clip
Sets clip protection settings. [Note]
Transfer Clip (Proxy) cannot be configured when Access Authentication >Password in the Network menu is
Item Sub-item setting Description undefined.
Select Clip Selects and locks/unlocks a clip. Item Sub-item setting Description
Lock All Clips Locks all clips. Select Clip Transfers proxy clips corresponding to
Unlock All Unlocks all clips. the selected clips.
Clips All Clips Transfers proxy clips corresponding to all
the clips.
Thumbnail >Delete Clip
Deletes clips. [Note]
Up to 200 clips can be transferred.
Item Sub-item setting Description
Select Clip Deletes the selected clip. Thumbnail >Set Index Picture
Sets the index picture of a clip.
All Clips Deletes all clips.
Item Sub-item setting Description
Set Index Sets the index picture of a clip.
Picture
111 6. Menu Display and Settings: Thumbnail Menu

Thumbnail >Thumbnail View

Sets thumbnail screen display format settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description
Essence Mark All / Rec Start / Shot Mark1 / Shot Mark2 / Displays thumbnails of frames with
Thumbnail Shot Mark3 / Shot Mark4 / Shot Mark5 / essence marks.
Shot Mark6 / Shot Mark7 / Shot Mark8 /
Shot Mark9 / Shot Mark0
Clip Displays thumbnails of recorded clips.
Thumbnail
Thumbnail >Filter Clips
Sets settings of clips to display.
Item Sub-item setting Description
OK Display only clips that have an OK flag.
NG Display only clips that have an NG flag.
KEEP Display only clips that have a Keep flag.
None Display only clips that have no flag.
All Displays all clips, regardless of whether
there are any flags.
Thumbnail >Customize View
Switches the thumbnail screen view.
Item Sub-item setting Description
Thumbnail Date Time / Time Code / Duration / Switches the information displayed
Caption Sequential Number below thumbnails.
112 6. Menu Display and Settings

Technical Menu
This section describes the function and settings of each menu item. Technical >Touch Operation
Factory default settings are shown in bold (for example, 18dB). Sets settings related to touch operations.

Technical >Color Bars Item Sub-item setting Description

Sets color bar settings. Setting On / Off Turns touch operation on/off.
Item Sub-item setting Description Technical >Rec Review
Setting On / Off Turns the color bars on/off. Sets recording review settings.
[Note] Item Sub-item setting Description
Cannot be set to On when S&Q Motion >Setting
Setting 3s / 10s / Clip Selects the time for playback of clips just
(page 89) in the Shooting menu is set to On.
recorded for recording review.
Type ARIB / 100% / 75% / SMPTE Selects the color bar type.
Technical >Handle Zoom
Technical >Test Saw Sets handle zoom settings.
Sets test signal settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description
Item Sub-item setting Description
Setting Off / Low / High / Variable Sets the speed of the handle zoom.
Test Saw On / Off Turns the test signal on/off.
High 1 to 8 (8) Sets the zoom speed of the handle zoom
Technical >ND Dial lever when High handle zoom speed is
Sets settings related to ND VARIABLE dial operations. selected.
Item Sub-item setting Description Low 1 to 8 (3) Sets the zoom speed of the handle zoom
lever when Low handle zoom speed is
CLEAR with On / Off Sets whether to enable ND status selected.
Dial switching (CLEAR  On) by ND
VARIABLE dial operation. [Note]
Uneven zooming may occur when the zoom
Technical >Tally speed is set to a low value.
Sets recording/tally lamp settings.
Technical >GPS
Item Sub-item setting Description Sets GPS settings.
Front Tally On / Off Turns the recording/tally lamp (front) on/ Item Sub-item setting Description
Lamp off.
GPS On / Off Turns the GPS function on/off.
Rear Tally On / Off Turns the recording/tally lamp (rear) on/
Lamp off. [Note]
The GPS module is built into the handle.
Tally Control REMOTE / RCP / Internal Specifies the target for receiving Tally/
Call control information. Technical >Menu Settings
Sets settings related to the menu.
Technical >HOLD Switch Setting
Sets hold switch settings. Item Sub-item setting Description

Item Sub-item setting Description User Menu On / Off Sets whether to display the User menu
Only only (On) or display the menu list (Off)
with Rec On / Off Sets whether to lock the recording when the camcorder displays the menu.
Button button.
User Menu On / Off Sets whether to lock the menu display,
with Hand On / Off Sets whether to lock operation of the grip with Lock showing the User menu only.
Grip Remote remote control.
[Note]
In normal menu display operation, this item is
not displayed. For details about menu display
operation, see page 78.
113 6. Menu Display and Settings: Technical Menu

Technical >Status Page On/Off Technical >Fan Control

Sets settings related to the status screen display. Sets fan control mode settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Main On / Off Turns the Main Status screen display on/ Setting Auto / Minimum / Off in Rec Sets the control mode of the camcorder
off. fan.
Camera On / Off Turns the Camera Status screen display [Note]
on/off. Even when Off in Rec is selected, the fan will
Audio On / Off Turns the Audio Status screen display on/ operate if the internal temperature of the
camcorder rises above a certain value.
off.
Project On / Off Turns the Project status screen display Technical >Lens
on/off. Sets settings related to lenses.
Monitoring On / Off Turns the Monitoring Status screen Item Sub-item setting Description
display on/off.
Zoom Ring Left(W)/Right(T) / Right(W)/Left(T) Sets the direction of zoom ring operation.
Assignable On / Off Turns the Assignable Button Status Direction
Button screen display on/off. [Note]
Enabled only when using an E-mount lens that
Battery On / Off Turns the Battery Status screen display supports zoom ring direction switching.
on/off.
Shading Auto / Off Turns automatic shading compensation
Media On / Off Turns the Media Status screen display Compensation on/off.
on/off.
[Note]
GPS On / Off Turns the GPS Status screen display on/ Shading compensation is not applied when
off. Imager Scan Mode is set to S35 2K.
Network On / Off Turns the Network Status screen display Chroma Auto / Off Turns automatic chromatic aberration
on/off. Aberration compensation on/off.
NCM/ On / Off Turns the NCM/Streaming Status screen Comp.
[Note]
Streaming display on/off. Chromatic aberration compensation is not
File Transfer On / Off Turns the File Transfer Status screen applied when Imager Scan Mode is set to S35
display on/off. 2K.
Distortion Auto / Off Turns automatic distortion compensation
Technical >RCP Comp. on/off.
Sets settings related to remote control panels.
[Note]
Item Sub-item setting Description Distortion compensation is not applied when
CNS Mode Off / Bridge Sets whether to allow bridge mode Imager Scan Mode is set to S35 or S16.
connection with a remote control panel. Distance Meter / Feet Sets the display units for lens information
Detail 4K/QFHD / HD Set whether the detail adjustment of the Display and focus position.
Control(RCP) remote control panel corresponds to 4K/ Zoom Focal Length / Number / Bar Sets the display format for the zoom
QFHD or HD in the detail menu. Position position.
Display
114 6. Menu Display and Settings: Technical Menu

Technical >Lens Technical >Camera Battery Alarm

Sets settings related to lenses. Sets battery low-voltage alarm settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Iris Display Auto / F-Number Sets the iris display units. Battery 3% to 7% Sets the remaining battery level to
Auto: Empty display a battery empty alarm.
Displays the T value if T value
Technical >Camera DC IN Alarm
information can be obtained from the
Sets input voltage alarm settings.
attached lens. Otherwise, it displays
the F value. Item Sub-item setting Description
F-Number: DC Low 16.0V to 19.0V (16.5V) Sets the voltage to display a DC IN low
Always displays the F value. Voltage1 input voltage alarm.
Technical >Video Light Set DC Low 15.5V to 18.5V Sets the voltage to display a DC IN
Sets the video light lighting method. Available only when using the HVL-LBPC (option). Voltage2 insufficient input voltage alarm.
Item Sub-item setting Description Technical >Ext. Unit Battery Alarm
Video Light Power Link / Rec Link / Rec Link + Stby Sets the lighting control method for the Sets XDCA-FX9 battery settings.
Set video light attached to the multi- Item Sub-item setting Description
interface shoe.
Near End:Info 5% to 100% Sets the remaining battery level to
Power Link:
Battery display a Sony Info battery low-voltage
Turns the video light on/off when the
alarm (5% increments).
camcorder is turned on/off.
Rec Link: End:Info 0% to 5% Sets the remaining battery level to
Turns the video light on/off when the Battery display a Sony Info battery end alarm and
camcorder starts/stops recording. to stop media access.
Rec Link + Stby: Near 11.5V to 17.0V Sets the remaining battery level to
Turns the video light on/standby End:Sony display a battery low-voltage alarm for a
when the camcorder starts/stops Battery Sony non-Info battery.
recording. End:Sony 11.0V to 14.0V Sets the remaining battery level to
Battery display a battery end alarm for a Sony
Technical >APR
non-Info battery and to stop media
Executes APR.
access.
Item Sub-item setting Description Near 11.5V to 17.0V (11.8V) Sets the remaining battery level to
APR Execute / Cancel Runs APR (Automatic Pixel Restoration) End:Other display a battery low-voltage alarm for
for image sensor auto adjustment. Battery an Anton/Bauer battery.
Execute: Execute function. End:Other 11.0V to 14.0V Sets the remaining battery level to
[Note] Battery display a battery end alarm for an Anton/
Always attach the lens cap before running APR. Bauer battery and to stop media access.

Technical >Camera Battery Alarm

Sets battery low-voltage alarm settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description
Low Battery 5% / 10% / 15% / … / 45% / 50% Sets the remaining battery level to
display a battery low-voltage alarm (5%
increments).
115 6. Menu Display and Settings: Technical Menu

Technical >Ext. Unit Battery Alarm

Sets XDCA-FX9 battery settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description
Detected Displays the type of power source
Battery connected to the XDCA-FX9.
If a battery is connected to the XDCA-FX9,
“Info Battery,” “Sony Battery,” or “Other
Battery” is displayed. If a DC source is
connected, “DC IN” is displayed.
If powered by a battery or DC source
connected to the camcorder, “---” is
displayed.
Technical >Ext. Unit DC IN Alarm
Sets XDCA-FX9 input voltage alarm settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description
DC Low 11.5V to 17.0V Sets the voltage to display a DC IN low
Voltage1 input voltage alarm.
DC Low 11.0V to 14.0V Sets the voltage to display a DC IN
Voltage2 insufficient input voltage alarm.
116 6. Menu Display and Settings

Network Menu
This section describes the function and settings of each menu item. Network >AP Mode Settings
Factory default settings are shown in bold (for example, 18dB). Sets settings related to access point mode connections.

Network >Setup for Mobile App Item Sub-item setting Description

Executes the network setup assist tool. Channel Auto(5GHz) / Auto / CH1 / CH2 / CH3 / Sets the wireless LAN channel.
Item Sub-item setting Description CH4 / CH5 / CH6 / CH7 / CH8 / CH9 / Auto(5GHz) is available on the
CH10 / CH11 PXW‑FX9V/VK only.
Setup Starts the network setup assist tool.
Camera SSID Displays the SSID and password of the
Network >Access Authentication & Password camcorder.
Sets settings related to authentication. Regenerate Execute / Cancel Creates a new password.
Item Sub-item setting Description Password Execute: Execute function.
IP Address Displays the IP address of the camcorder
User Name Sets the user name for access
in access point mode.
authentication.
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask of the
Input Sets the password for access
camcorder in access point mode.
Password authentication.
Network >ST Mode Settings
[Note]
From a security standpoint, it is recommended Sets settings related to station mode connections.
that you set a password with a sufficiently long Item Sub-item setting Description
character string that is hard to guess by others,
and that you store it safely. Camera Enable / Disable Sets whether to enable remote control
Generate Execute / Cancel Automatically generates a password for Remote from a device connected to the
Password access authentication. Control camcorder by wireless LAN in station
Execute: Execute function. mode.
Show Displays the user name, password, and
Settings serial number for access authentication
as text and QR code.
[Note]
Take care that the password cannot be viewed
and the QR code image cannot be copied by
others.

Network >Wireless LAN

Sets settings related to wireless LAN connections.
Item Sub-item setting Description
Setting Access Point Mode / Station Mode / Off Selects the operation mode of the
wireless LAN connection.
WPS Execute / Cancel Establishes a connection using WPS
(Wi-Fi Protected Setup).
Execute: Execute function.
NFC Execute / Cancel Establishes a connection using NFC (Near
Field Communication).
Execute: Execute function.
MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the wireless
LAN interface of the camcorder.
117 6. Menu Display and Settings: Network Menu

Network >ST Mode Settings Network >ST Mode Settings

Sets settings related to station mode connections. Sets settings related to station mode connections.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Connected Displays the connected wireless LAN Scan Detects wireless LAN networks (access
Network network (access point). Networks points) and displays a list.
SSID Displays the SSID for the access point to Select a destination from the list to
connect. connect.
Security Displays the type of security for the SSID Displays the SSID for the access point to
access point to connect. connect.
Password Displays the password for the access Security Displays the type of security for the
point to connect. access point to connect.
When Security is set to WEP or WPA: Password Enter the password for the access point
******* to connect.
When Security is set to None: (blank) DHCP Turns DHCP on/off.
DHCP Displays whether DHCP is on/off. On / Off
IP Address Displays the IP address of the camcorder IP Address Enter the IP address of the camcorder
when DHCP is set to Off. when DHCP is set to Off.
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask of the Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder
camcorder when DHCP is set to Off. when DHCP is set to Off.
Gateway Displays the default gateway of the Gateway Enter the default gateway of the
camcorder when DHCP is set to Off. camcorder when DHCP is set to Off.
DNS Auto Displays whether DNS acquisition is on/ DNS Auto Turns auto DNS acquisition on/off.
off. On / Off
Primary DNS Server Displays the primary DNS server of the Primary DNS Server Enter the primary DNS server of the
camcorder when DNS Auto is set to Off. camcorder when DNS Auto is set to Off.
Secondary DNS Server Displays the secondary DNS server of the Secondary DNS Server Enter the secondary DNS server of the
camcorder when DNS Auto is set to Off. camcorder when DNS Auto is set to Off.
118 6. Menu Display and Settings: Network Menu

Network >ST Mode Settings Network >Wired LAN

Sets settings related to station mode connections. Sets settings related to wired LAN connections.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Manual Registers settings for manual connection Setting On / Off Turns the wired LAN function on/off.
Register to an access point. Camera Enable / Disable Sets whether to enable remote control
SSID Enter the SSID for the access point to Remote from a device connected to the
connect. Control camcorder by wired LAN.
Security Set the type of security for the access Detail Configures properties of the wired LAN
None / WEP / WPA point to connect. Select WPA if the type Settings connection.
of security of the destination access point DHCP Turns DHCP on/off.
is WPA or WPA2. On / Off
Password Enter the password for the access point IP Address Enter the IP address of the camcorder
to connect. when DHCP is set to Off.
DHCP Turns DHCP on/off. Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder
On / Off when DHCP is set to Off.
IP Address Enter the IP address of the camcorder Gateway Enter the default gateway of the
when DHCP is set to Off. camcorder when DHCP is set to Off.
Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask of the camcorder DNS Auto Turns auto DNS acquisition on/off.
when DHCP is set to Off. On / Off
Gateway Enter the default gateway of the Primary DNS Server Enter the primary DNS server when DNS
camcorder when DHCP is set to Off. Auto is set to Off.
DNS Auto Turns auto DNS acquisition on/off. Secondary DNS Server Enter the secondary DNS server when
On / Off DNS Auto is set to Off.
Primary DNS Server Enter the primary DNS server when DNS
Auto is set to Off.
Secondary DNS Server Enter the secondary DNS server when
DNS Auto is set to Off.
119 6. Menu Display and Settings: Network Menu

Network >Modem Network >Network Client Mode

Sets settings related to modems. Sets settings related to network client mode.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Setting On / Off Turns the modem connection on/off. NCM Display Name Sets the display name shown in the NCM
Camera Enable / Disable Sets whether to enable remote control Settings1 Settings menu.
Remote from a device connected to the CCM Address Sets the address of the destination CCM
Control camcorder by wireless LAN via a modem/ to connect.
smartphone. Host name or IP address
[Note] CCM Port (1 to 65535 (8443)) Sets the port number of the destination
When this unit is connected to C3 Portal, this CCM to connect.
setting is switched to Enable (page 68). User Name Sets the user name for authentication of
Modem1 IP Displays the IP address of modem 1. the CCM connection.
Address Password Sets the authentication password of the
Modem1 Displays the subnet mask of modem 1. CCM connection.
Subnet Mask CCM Certificate Loads a certificate when connecting to
Modem2 IP Displays the IP address of modem 2. Load / Clear / None CCM or C3 Portal, and clears settings.
Address CCM Certificate Status Displays the certificate loading status
Modem2 Displays the subnet mask of modem 2. Loaded / Default when connecting to CCM or C3 Portal.
Subnet Mask Camera Control Enables/disables camera control from a
Network >Network Client Mode Enable / Disable CCM, when a CCM is connected, or from
Sets settings related to network client mode. C3 Portal.
Camera Setting Enables/disables All File operations from
Item Sub-item setting Description
Always / Onetime / Off a CCM, when a CCM is connected, or from
Setting On / Off Starts (On) or stops (Off) network client C3 Portal.
mode. Always:
NCM Settings Selects preset settings (NCM Settings1/ Enable All File operations from a CCM
Select NCM Settings2/NCM Settings3) or C3 Portal all the time.
comprising network client mode Onetime:
connection settings configured Enable All File operations from a CCM
beforehand. or C3 Portal one time only.
Off:
Disable All File operations from a
CCM or C3 Portal.
Reset Resets the settings of NCM Settings to
Execute / Cancel the defaults. Execute: Execute function.
NCM Same as NCM Settings1.
Settings2
NCM Same as NCM Settings1.
Settings3
Streaming Normal / High Sets the streaming quality.
Quality
[Note]
This setting is also reset when All Reset
>Reset without Network (page 121) in the
Maintenance menu is executed.
120 6. Menu Display and Settings: Network Menu

Network >File Transfer Network >File Transfer

Sets settings related to file transfers. Sets settings related to file transfers.
Item Sub-item setting Description Item Sub-item setting Description
Auto Upload On / Off Turns auto uploading of original files on/ Server Display Name Sets the display name shown in the
off. Settings1 transfer destination setup menu.
[Note] Service Displays the type of server.
When Simul Rec >Setting (page 93) in the FTP
Project menu is set to On, the clips recorded Host Name Sets the host name of the transfer
on the media in slot B are not automatically
destination server.
uploaded.
Port (1 to 65535 (21)) Sets the port number of the transfer
Auto Upload On / Off / Chunk On:
destination server.
(Proxy) Enables proxy file auto transfer.
Off: User Name Sets the user name for authentication of
Disables proxy file auto transfer. the transfer destination server
Chunk: connection.
Uploads a proxy file recorded in Password Sets the authentication password of the
chunks automatically. transfer destination server connection.
Default Selects the upload server for files. The Passive Mode Turns PASV mode on/off.
Upload server selected here becomes the auto On / Off
Server upload destination for proxy files, and Destination Directory Enter the name of the transfer
the upload destination for files from the destination directory.
thumbnail screen. Using Secure Protocol Sets whether to use (On) or not use (Off)
Displays the display name configured in On / Off secure FTP transfer (FTPS Explicit Mode:
Server Settings (NCM) and Server Settings FTPES).
1 to 3.
Root Certificate Loads a root certificate for secure FTP
Clear Execute / Cancel Clears completed transfer jobs from the Load / Clear / None transfer and clears settings.
Completed list.
Root Certificate Status Displays the root certificate loading
Jobs Execute: Execute function.
Loaded / No Certificate status for secure FTP transfer.
Clear All Jobs Execute / Cancel Clears all transfer jobs from the list.
Reset Resets the settings of Server Settings to
Execute: Execute function.
Execute / Cancel the defaults.
View Job List Displays the transfer job list. Execute: Execute function.
Server Displays the display name of the NCM Server Same as Server Settings1.
Settings server and the service (CCM). Settings2
(NCM) Display Name Displays the display name of the NCM Server Same as Server Settings1.
server. Settings3
Service Displays the service.
Network >Network Reset
Resets the network settings.
Item Sub-item setting Description
Reset Execute / Cancel Resets the network settings.
Execute: Execute function.
121 6. Menu Display and Settings

Maintenance Menu
This section describes the function and settings of each menu item. Maintenance >All Reset
Factory default settings are shown in bold (for example, 18dB). Resets settings to factory defaults.

Maintenance >Language Item Sub-item setting Description

Sets the display language. Reset Execute / Cancel Resets all settings to their factory
Item Sub-item setting Description defaults.
Execute: Execute function.
Select Sets the display language.
Reset without Execute / Cancel Resets the menu settings, excluding
SET: Set language.
Network Network menu settings, to the factory
Maintenance >Clock Set default state.
Sets internal clock settings. [Note]
Item Sub-item setting Description Network Client Mode >Streaming Quality
(page 119) in the Network menu is reset to
Time Zone UTC – 12:00 to UTC + 14:00 Sets the time difference from UTC in the factory default setting.
30-minute units.
Maintenance >Hours Meter
Date Mode YYMMDD / MMDDYY / DDMMYY Selects the display format for dates.
Displays the accumulated running time.
YYMMDD: Year, month, day
MMDDYY: Month, day, year Item Sub-item setting Description
DDMMYY: Day, month, year Hours Displays the accumulated hours of use
12h/24h 12h / 24h Selects the clock display format. (System) (cannot be reset).
12h: 12-hour mode Hours (Reset) Displays the accumulated hours of use
24h: 24-hour mode (can be reset).
Date Sets the current date. Reset Execute / Cancel Resets the Hours (Reset) display to 0.
SET: Set the value. Execute: Execute function.
Time Sets the current time.
Maintenance >Version
SET: Set the value.
Displays version information.
Maintenance >Network Public Key Item Sub-item setting Description
Sets settings related to public keys.
Version Vx.xx Displays the software version of the
Item Sub-item setting Description
Number camcorder.
Key Creation Execute / Cancel Generates a public key Ext. Unit Vx.xx Displays the software version of the
Execute: Execute function. Version XDCA-FX9.
Key Clear Execute / Cancel Removes the public key saved on the Number
unit. Version Up Execute / Cancel Updates the camcorder.*
Execute: Execute function. Execute: Execute function.
Create Key Displays the date the public key was * This function updates the camcorder
Date generated in the following format. software.
4-digit year + 2-digit month + 2 digit Lens Version Vxx Displays the software version number of
day + 2-digit hour (24-hour) + 2-digit Number an E-mount lens.
minute + 2-digit second
Display example: For 2020/12/1
12:34:56  20201201123456
122 6. Menu Display and Settings

Saving and Loading Configuration Data

Configuration Data Saving a User File / ALL File 3 Select a “No File” row on the save Loading an ALL file from a cloud service
destination screen.

You can save setup menu settings in the

Selecting a row with a File ID entry will 1 Connect to the unit from the “C3 Portal
overwrite the selected file. App” smartphone application
camcorder internal memory or on SD cards Saving to a memory card The File ID is generated automatically, but (page 68).
and “Memory Stick” media. You can also save you can modify it.
an All file to a cloud service. This allows you
1 Insert the SD card or “Memory Stick” 2 Select All File >Load from Cloud(Private) or
to quickly recall an appropriate set of menu
settings for the current situation.
media into the UTILITY SD/MS card slot 4 Select Execute on the confirmation Load from Cloud(Share) (page 97) in
(page 8) with the label facing right. screen. the Project menu.
Configuration data is saved in the following
categories. A file list screen appears.
2 For a user file, select User File >Save to
User files
Utility SD/MS (page 97) in the Project 3 Select a file to load.
User files save the setting items and data of
menu. Loading a User File / ALL File A confirmation screen appears.
For an ALL file, select All File >Save to
the customizable User menu.
You can save up to 64 files on an SD card or
Utility SD/MS (page 97) in the Project
menu.
4 Select Execute.
“Memory Stick” media.
A file save destination screen appears. Loading from a memory card
By loading this file into the camcorder
memory, you can customize the setup of the
User menu. 3 Select a “No File” row on the save 1 Insert the SD card or “Memory Stick”
Saving a Scene File
destination screen. media on which the file is saved into the
Selecting a row with a File ID entry will UTILITY SD/MS card slot (page 8) with
ALL (all settings) files the label facing right.
overwrite the selected file.
ALL files save the configuration data of all
The File ID is generated automatically, but To save in internal memory
menus. You can save up to 64 files on an SD
card or “Memory Stick” media. Up to 120 files
you can modify it. 2 For a user file, select User File >Load from
can be saved to C3 Portal (cloud service), Utility SD/MS (page 97) in the Project 1 Select Scene File >Store Internal Memory
comprising up to 60 private files and 60 share 4 Select Execute on the confirmation menu. in the Paint menu (page 102).
files. screen. For an ALL file, select All File >Load from A scene file list screen appears.
Utility SD/MS (page 97) in the Project If the File ID is set to “Standard”
[Note] menu.
Device specific data (shading, output levels, and other Saving an ALL file to a cloud service destination, preconfigured standard
data that requires adjustment for the specific device) is A file list screen appears. settings are saved.
not saved.
1 Connect to the unit from the “C3 Portal
3
Scene files
App” smartphone application Select a file to load.
A confirmation screen appears.
2 Select a save destination.
(page 68). The scene file is saved, overwriting any
Scene files save settings for paint items existing file, in the selected destination.
configured for scenes. You can save up to 5
2 Select All File >Save to Cloud(Private) or 4 Select Execute.
files in the internal memory of the camcorder,
and up to 64 files on an SD card or “Memory
Save to Cloud(Share) (page 97) in the [Notes] 3 Select Execute on the confirmation
Project menu. ˎˎ The unit will reboot automatically after loading screen.
Stick” media. configuration data.
A file save destination screen appears.
ˎˎ When All File >Load Network Data in the Project menu
is set to Off, all settings in the ALL file are loaded
except the Network menu settings.
123 6. Menu Display and Settings: Saving and Loading Configuration Data

To save on an SD card or “Memory Stick” To load from an SD card or “Memory

media Stick” media

1 Insert the SD card or “Memory Stick” 1 Insert the SD card or “Memory Stick”
media into the UTILITY SD/MS card slot media on which the scene file is saved
(page 8) with the label facing right. into the UTILITY SD/MS card slot
(page 8) with the label facing right.
2 Select Scene File >Save to Utility SD/MS in
the Paint menu (page 102). 2 Select Scene File >Load from Utility SD/MS
A scene file save destination screen in the Paint menu (page 102).
appears. A scene file list screen appears.

3 Select a “No File” row on the save 3 Select a file to load.

destination screen. A confirmation screen appears.
Selecting a row with a File ID entry will
overwrite the selected file.
The File ID is generated automatically, but
4 Select Execute.

you can modify it.

4 Select Execute on the confirmation Changing the File ID

screen.

1 For a user file, select User File >File ID in

the Project menu (page 97).
Loading a Scene File For an ALL file, select All File >File ID in the
Project menu (page 97).
For a scene file, select Scene File >File ID
in the Paint menu (page 102).
To load from internal memory A screen for editing the File ID appears.

1 Select Scene File >Recall Internal Memory 2 Use the arrow buttons (page 7) or the
in the Paint menu (page 102). multi-function dial (page 4) to select a
A scene file list screen appears. character, then press the SET button
(page 7) or multi-function dial.
2 Select a file to load.
A confirmation screen appears. 3 Repeat step 2 as required.

3 Select Execute. 4 When finished entering characters, select

[Tip] Done.
Scene files can also be loaded using the direct
menu (page 47).
124 7. External Device Connection

Connecting a Remote Control Panel

Connecting an RCP1500/1501/1530/3100/
3500/3501 or similar remote control panel
6 Connect with a remote control panel by Exiting Remote Control Mode
connecting the wired LAN connector of
to the unit using a LAN cable allows some
the XDCA-FX9 (page 25) attached to
functions of the unit to be controlled from that Turn off the unit to disconnect the remote
the camcorder to a LAN switch using a
remote device. control panel.
LAN cable.

Remote control panel

Connecting a Remote Control

Panel

1 Configure wired LAN network settings as

described in “Connecting to a Device
using a LAN Cable” (page 60).
PoE compatible
switching hub
2 Set Wired LAN >Camera Remote Control
(page 116) in the Network menu to
Enable.

3 Set RCP >CNS Mode (page 113) in the

Technical menu to Bridge.

4 Set the remote control panel to BRIDGE

mode.

5 Set the IP address of the unit on the

7 Turn the unit on.
remote control panel.
The unit enters remote control mode,
For details about configuration, refer to
allowing shooting operations of the unit
the operating instructions of each remote
to be controlled by the remote control
control panel.
panel.
[Notes]
ˎˎ Connection by wireless LAN is not possible.
ˎˎ Connection via the Internet is not possible.
ˎˎ Other network functions cannot be used at the same
time.
125 7. External Device Connection

Connecting External Monitors and Recording Devices

To display recorded/playback pictures on an the SDI OUT connector. This will synchronize
external monitor, select the camcorder output recording on the external device with the
signal and use an appropriate cable for the camcorder.
monitor to be connected. [Notes]
You can also connect recording devices, such ˎˎ If a connected external device does not support a REC
as a VTR, and record the output signal from trigger signal, the device cannot be operated.
the camcorder. ˎˎ When the record START/STOP button and the handle
record START/STOP are set to control different media,
You can display the same information that
the REC trigger signal is output in accordance with the
is visible in the viewfinder, such as status operation of slot A.
information and menus, on an external
monitor. Set Output Display (page 105) in the
Monitoring menu to On for the corresponding
type of signal to output to the monitor.
HDMI OUT Connector (Type A
connector)
SDI OUT Connector (BNC type) Set the output on/off setting and the output
format in the Monitoring menu (page 105).
Set the output on/off setting and the output Use a commercially available high-speed
format in the Monitoring menu (page 105). HDMI cable for connection.
Use a commercially available 75 Ω coaxial
cable for connection.
[Note]
Check that the connection between the camcorder
and the external device is grounded before turning the
devices on.

(It is recommended that the camcorder and

external device be turned on after connecting
the 75 Ω coaxial cable.)
If the external device must be connected
to the camcorder while the camcorder is
on, connect the 75 Ω coaxial cable to the
external device first and then connect it to the
camcorder.

To start recording on the camcorder and

external device simultaneously
With SDI signal output enabled, set SDI/
HDMI Rec Control (page 94) >Setting in
the Project menu to SDI/HDMI Remote I/F or
Parallel Rec to enable output of a REC trigger
signal to the external device connected to
126 7. External Device Connection

External Synchronization
When shooting using multiple camcorder operate properly. If this occurs, the timecode will not
units, the camcorders can be synchronized to Locking the Timecode to Other acquire successful lock with the external timecode.
ˎˎ If the external timecode source is disconnected,
a specific reference signal or timecode via the Devices the timecode may shift by one frame per hour with
genlock connector of the camcorders. respect to the reference timecode.

Set the unit that supplies the timecode to a

To release external lock
mode in which the timecode output keeps
Synchronizing the Phase of the running (such as Free Run or Clock). Change the Timecode setting in the TC/Media

Video Signals (Genlock) 1 Set Timecode (page 103) in the TC/ menu.
External synchronization is also released if the
Media menu as follows.
Mode: Preset system frequency is changed and when you
Run: Free Run start recording in a special recording mode
Set the IN/OUT select switch (page 8) of
(Slow & Quick Motion or Interval Rec).
the camcorder to the IN position, and supply a
reference signal to the GENLOCK IN/REF OUT 2 Press the assignable button (page 47)
connector (page 8) to enable genlock. assigned with the DURATION/TC/UBIT
The reference signals that can be used vary function to display the timecode on the
depending on the system frequency of the screen. Synchronizing the Timecode of
selected recording format.
Another Device with the Timecode
System frequency Supported input 3 Check that the IN/OUT select switch
of the Camcorder
of recording reference signals (page 8) is set to the IN position, then
format supply an HD or SD reference video signal
59.94P 1920×1080 59.94i to the GENLOCK IN/REF OUT connector Set the unit that supplies the timecode to a
720×486 59.94i and the reference timecode to the TC IN/ mode in which the timecode output keeps
1280×720 59.94P OUT connector. running (such as Free Run or Clock).
50P 1920×1080 50i
720×576 50i The timecode generator of the camcorder 1 Set the timecode of the camcorder using
1280×720 50P acquires lock with the reference timecode, and Timecode (page 103) in the TC/Media
29.97P 1920×1080 59.94i “EXT-LK” appears on the screen. menu.
720×486 59.94i Once about ten seconds have elapsed after
25P 1920×1080 50i the timecode locks, the external lock state 2 Check that the IN/OUT select switch
720×576 50i is maintained even if the external reference (page 8) is set to the OUT position,
24P 1920×1080 48i(24PsF) timecode source is disconnected. and connect the TC IN/OUT connector
23.98P 1920×1080 47.95i (23.98PsF) [Notes] and GENLOCK IN/REF OUT connector to
ˎˎ Check that the supplied reference timecode and the the timecode input and reference signal
59.94i 1920×1080 59.94i
reference video signal are in a phase relationship that input, respectively, of the device you want
720×486 59.94i complies with the SMPTE timecode standard. to synchronize.
50i 1920×1080 50i ˎˎ When operating with external lock, the timecode
720×576 50i instantly acquires lock with the external timecode
and the external timecode value appears in the
data display area. However, do not start recording
[Notes] immediately. Wait for a few seconds until the
ˎˎ If the reference signal is unstable, genlock cannot be timecode generator stabilizes before recording.
achieved. ˎˎ If the frequency of the reference video signal and the
ˎˎ The subcarrier is not synchronized. frame frequency on the camcorder are not the same,
lock cannot be acquired and the camcorder will not
127 7. External Device Connection

Managing/Editing Clips using a Computer

Connecting using a USB Cable 4 On Windows, check that the card is added Using a Nonlinear Editing System
as a removable disk in the “My Computer”
window.
On Macintosh, check that a folder called In a nonlinear editing system, editing software
Using an XQD card reader (option) “NO NAME” or “Untitled” (editable) is (option) that supports the formats recorded by
created on the Desktop. the camcorder is required.
Connect an XQD card reader using a USB Use dedicated application software to save
cable, and insert a memory card in the slot. [Notes]
the clips you want to edit on the HDD of the
ˎˎ Do not perform the following operations if the access
The memory card is recognized as a computer indicator is lit red. computer beforehand.
extension drive. On supported computers, you –– Turning the power off. Disconnecting the power
can import clips at high speed using the mass cord
storage mode of the camcorder. –– Removing the XQD memory card
–– Disconnecting the USB cable
ˎˎ Operation is not guaranteed to work on all computers.
Using mass storage mode
Connect the camcorder using a USB cable, and
insert a memory card in XQD card slot A or B.
The memory card is recognized as a computer
extension drive.
1 Remove the grip remote control from the
camcorder, and connect the USB/multi
connector (page 4) to the computer
using a USB cable.

2 Turn the camcorder POWER switch to the

ON position.
A message appears on the viewfinder
screen asking whether to enable USB
connection.
[Note]
The USB connection confirmation message is not
displayed while another confirmation message or
progress message is displayed, for example, when
formatting or restoring an XQD memory card.
The confirmation message is displayed when the
formatting or restoring execution ends. The USB
confirmation message is also not displayed when
the clip properties screen is displayed. The message
is displayed when processing ends or when you
return to the thumbnail screen.

3 Turn the multi-function dial to select

Execute.
128 8. Appendix

Usage Precautions
On condensation ˎˎWhen operating at a high environmental About the built-in rechargeable battery ˎˎClose to radio or TV transmitters producing
temperature strong electromagnetic fields
If the unit is suddenly taken from a cold to ˎˎWhen you have raised the gain (sensitivity) The camcorder has a built-in rechargeable ˎˎIn direct sunlight or close to heaters for
a warm location, or if ambient temperature battery for storing the date, time, and other extended periods
suddenly rises, moisture may form on the Flicker settings even when the camcorder is turned
outer surface of the unit and/or inside of If shooting under lighting produced by off. The built-in rechargeable battery will To prevent electromagnetic interference
the unit. This is known as condensation. If become charged after 24 hours have elapsed
condensation occurs, turn off the unit and
fluorescent lights, sodium lamps, mercury-
if the unit is connected to a power outlet using
from portable communications devices
vapor lamps, or LEDs, the screen may flicker or
wait until the condensation clears before colors may vary. the AC adaptor or if a fully charged battery The use of portable telephones and other
operating the unit. Operating the unit while pack is attached, regardless of whether the communications devices near this camera can
condensation is present may damage the unit. On consumable parts camcorder is turned on/off. The rechargeable result in malfunctions and interference with
battery will be fully discharged in about 3 audio and video signals. It is recommended
On LCD panels ˎˎThe fan and battery are consumable parts months if the AC adaptor is not connected that the portable communications devices
that will need periodic replacement. or the camcorder is used without the battery near this camera be powered off.
The LCD panel fitted to this unit is When operating at room temperature, a pack attached. Use your camcorder after
manufactured with high precision technology, charging the battery. However, even if the
giving a functioning pixel ratio of at least
normal replacement cycle will be about Note on laser beams
5 years. However, this replacement cycle rechargeable battery is not charged, the
99.99%. Thus a very small proportion of pixels represents only a general guideline and camcorder operation will not be affected as Laser beams may damage the CMOS image
may be “stuck”, either always off (black), does not imply that the life expectancy of long as you do not need to record the date. sensor. If you shoot a scene that includes
always on (red, green, or blue), or flashing. In these parts is guaranteed. For details on a laser beam, be careful not to let the laser
addition, over a long period of use, because parts replacement, contact your dealer. Image sensor auto adjustment beam be directed into the lens of the unit.
of the physical characteristics of the liquid ˎˎThe life expectancy of the AC adaptor and Specifically, high-power laser beams from
crystal display, such “stuck” pixels may appear the electrolytic capacitor is about 5 years If APR has not been executed since a set time medical devices or other devices may cause
spontaneously. These problems are not a under normal operating temperatures and has elapsed after setting the time and date, a damage due to reflected light and scattered
malfunction. Note that any such problems normal usage (8 hours per day; 25 days per message prompting you to execute APR will light.
have no effect on recorded data. month). If usage exceeds the above normal be displayed.
usage frequency, the life expectancy may be Security precautions
Camera CMOS image sensor reduced correspondingly. Usage and storage locations
phenomena ˎˎThe battery terminal of this unit (the ˎˎUse behind a securely designed firewall.
connector for battery packs and AC Store in a level, ventilated place. Do not connect the unit to a network
adaptors) is a consumable part. Avoid using or storing the unit in the following where there is a possibility of connection to
[Note] places.
The following phenomena that may occur in images Power may not be supplied to the unit untrusted devices.
are specific to image sensors. They do not indicate a properly if the pins of the battery terminal ˎˎIn excessive heat or cold (operating ˎˎIf FTPS is available, use FTPS. Contents, user
malfunction. are bent or deformed by shock or vibrations, temperature range: 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to names, and passwords are not encrypted
or if they become corroded due to 104 °F)) using normal FTP.
White flecks prolonged outdoor use. Remember that in summer in warm climates ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES
Although the image sensors are produced Periodic inspections are recommended the temperature inside a car with the OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM A FAILURE
with high-precision technologies, fine white to keep the unit working properly and to windows closed can easily exceed 50 °C TO IMPLEMENT PROPER SECURITY
flecks may be generated on the screen in rare prolong its usable lifetime. Contact a Sony (122 °F). MEASURES ON TRANSMISSION DEVICES,
cases, caused by cosmic rays, etc. service or sales representative for more ˎˎIn damp or dusty locations UNAVOIDABLE DATA LEAKS RESULTING
This is related to the principle of image information about inspections. ˎˎLocations where the unit may be exposed FROM TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS, OR
sensors and is not a malfunction. to rain SECURITY PROBLEMS OF ANY KIND.
The white flecks especially tend to be seen in ˎˎLocations subject to violent vibration
the following cases: ˎˎNear strong magnetic fields
129 8. Appendix: Usage Precautions

ˎˎDepending on the operating environment,

unauthorized third parties on the network
may be able to access the unit. When
connecting the unit to the network, be sure
to confirm that the network is protected
securely.
ˎˎCommunication content may be
unknowingly intercepted by unauthorized
third parties in the vicinity of the signals.
When using wireless LAN communication,
implement security measures properly to
protect the communication content.
ˎˎFrom a safety standpoint, when using
the unit connected with the network, it
is strongly recommended to change the
access limitation settings from the factory
preset values (page 116). Specifically,
exercise caution when connected to an
open network.
Also, from a security standpoint, it is
recommended that you set a password with
a sufficiently long character string that is
hard to guess by others, and that you store
it safely.
ˎˎDo not browse any other website in the
Web browser while making settings or after
making settings.
Since the login status remains in the Web
browser, close the Web browser when
you complete the settings to prevent
unauthorized third parties from using the
unit or harmful programs from running.
130 8. Appendix

Output Formats and Limitations

Factory default settings are shown in bold (for example, 1920×1080P (Level A)). System frequency Video format Output format (Monitoring >Output Format)
[Notes] (Rec Format (Rec Format SDI1 SDI2 HDMI
ˎˎ The resolution of the output format is limited by the Rec Format >Frequency, Video Format, and other settings in >Frequency in the >Video Format in
the Project menu (page 91). Project menu) the Project menu)
ˎˎ No playback picture is output if the video output resolution is higher than the resolution of the picture.
59.94 / 50 1920×1080P / 1920×1080P 1920×1080P 1920×1080P
RAW only1) (Level A) (Level A)
1920×1080P 1920×1080P –
(Level B) (Level B)
SDI OUT/HDMI OUT Connector Output Formats 1920×1080P 1920×1080i 1920×1080i
(Level A)

System frequency Video format Output format (Monitoring >Output Format) 1920×1080P 1920×1080i 1920×1080i
(Rec Format (Rec Format (Level B)
SDI1 SDI2 HDMI
>Frequency in the >Video Format in 1920×1080i 1920×1080i 1920×1080i 1920×1080i
Project menu) the Project menu) – – 720×480P/
59.94 / 50 4096×2160P 4096×2160P – 4096×2160P 720×576P
1920×1080P 1920×1080P 1920×1080P 29.97 / 25 4096×2160P 4096×2160P – 4096×2160P
(Level A) (Level A) 1920×1080i(PsF) 1920×1080i(PsF) 1920×1080i(PsF)
1920×1080P 1920×1080P – 3840×2160P 3840×2160P – 3840×2160P
(Level B) (Level B) 1920×1080i(PsF) 1920×1080i(PsF) 1920×1080i(PsF)
1920×1080P 1920×1080i 1920×1080i 1920×1080P / 1920×1080i(PsF) 1920×1080i(PsF) 1920×1080i(PsF)
(Level A) RAW only1)
1920×1080P 1920×1080i 1920×1080i 24 4096×2160P 4096×2160P – 4096×2160P
(Level B) 1920×1080P 1920×1080P 1920×1080P
1920×1080i 1920×1080i 1920×1080i RAW only1) 1920×1080P 1920×1080P 1920×1080P
3840×2160P 3840×2160P – 3840×2160P 23.98 4096×2160P 4096×2160P – 4096×2160P
1920×1080P 1920×1080P 1920×1080P 1920×1080P 1920×1080P 1920×1080P
(Level A) (Level A)
3840×2160P 3840×2160P – 3840×2160P
1920×1080P 1920×1080P –
1920×1080P 1920×1080P 1920×1080P
(Level B) (Level B)
1920×1080P / 1920×1080P 1920×1080P 1920×1080P
1920×1080P 1920×1080i 1920×1080i
RAW only1)
(Level A)
1920×1080P 1920×1080i 1920×1080i 1) Without recording internally
(Level B)
1920×1080i 1920×1080i 1920×1080i
131 8. Appendix: Output Formats and Limitations

Monitor LUT Limitations

The monitor LUT function is available in Cine EI mode when the recording resolution is
4096×2160 or 3840×2160.
When Monitor LUT Setting >Monitor Out in the Shooting menu is set to MLUT On and the image
output resolution is 1920×1080, monitor LUT is applied to the output image.
When the image output resolution is 4096×2160 or 3840×2160, the same image as the recorded
image is output.

Output Display Limitations

The menu and status embedding in each output signal (SDI1, SDI2, HDMI) is determined by the
Output Format output resolution and Output Display >Setting setting in the Monitoring menu.
Output Output Display Output Display Output Display Output Display
resolution >Setting >SDI1 >SDI2 >HDMI
4K On On – (output Off) On
Off Off – (output Off) Off
HD On Off On On
Off Off Off Off
132 8. Appendix

Troubleshooting
Power Supply Symptom Cause Solution
Clips cannot be played back. The clip is being edited. Clips cannot be played back if you have
modified file names or folders, or if the
Symptom Cause Solution clip is in use on a computer. This is not
a malfunction.
The camcorder does not No battery pack is mounted Mount a battery pack (page 18) or
power on. and no power is supplied to connect to AC power using an AC The clip is being recorded on Clips recorded on other devices may
the DC IN connector. adaptor (page 19). another device. not be played back, or displayed in
incorrect size. This is not a malfunction.
The battery pack is Replace the battery pack with a fully
completely exhausted. charged one (page 18).
The power supply cuts while The battery pack becomes Replace the battery pack with a fully
operating. exhausted. charged one (page 18).
The battery pack becomes The ambient temperature is This is due to the battery characteristics External Devices
exhausted very quickly. very low. and is not a defect.
The battery pack is Recharge the battery pack (page 18).
inadequately charged. If the battery pack is soon exhausted Symptom Solution
even after you charged it fully, it may
The computer does not Disconnect the USB cable from the computer, then connect it again
comes to the end of its life. Replace it
recognize the camcorder. securely.
with a new one.
Disconnect the USB cable from your computer, reboot your
computer, and follow the steps again in the correct order.
Clips cannot be loaded on the Disconnect the USB cable from the computer, restart the
computer. camcorder, and then connect it again.
Recording/Playback Application software must be installed to load clips on your
computer (page 127).

Symptom Cause Solution

Recording does not start The XQD memory card is full. Replace the XQD memory card with one
when you press the record having sufficient space.
button. The XQD memory card needs Restore the XQD memory card
restoration. (page 31).
Audio recording is not The AUDIO LEVEL (CH1/CH2/ Adjust the audio recording levels with
possible. CH3/CH4) dials are set to the the AUDIO LEVEL (CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4)
minimum level. dials (page 45).
The recorded sound is The audio level is too high. Adjust the audio recording levels with
distorted. the AUDIO LEVEL (CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4)
dials (page 45).
The recorded sound has a The audio level is too low. Adjust the audio recording levels with
high noise level. the AUDIO LEVEL (CH1/CH2/CH3/CH4)
dials (page 45).
When an external microphone is
selected, also adjust the INPUT MIC
Reference setting under Audio Input in
the Audio menu (page 108).
133 8. Appendix: Troubleshooting

Wireless LAN Connection 3 Insert a screwdriver in the hole and turn it counterclockwise.
ˎˎThe ND filter moves to the Clear position by turning counterclockwise. Continue turning
until reaching the Clear position.
[Note] ˎˎUse a screwdriver with ø2.4 mm diameter or smaller. The insertion depth of the screwdriver
Obstructions and electromagnetic interference between the camcorder and wireless LAN access point or terminal is about 3.0 cm (1 3/16 in.).
device, or the ambient environment (such as wall materials) could shorten the communication range or prevent
connections altogether. If you experience these problems, check the connection/communication status after moving
the camcorder to a new location, or bringing the camcorder and access point/terminal device closer together.

Symptom Solution
A terminal device cannot access ˎˎ Check the wireless LAN connection (IP address, etc.).
the camcorder. ˎˎ The communication setting between the access point and client
may be invalid. For details, refer to the operating instructions of
the access point.
You cannot log in to the Check the user name and password that you set.
camcorder.
The web remote control does Check the IP address setting.
not appear.

Screwdriver hole
(with cap removed)

Internet Connection 4 Set the ND PRESET/VARIABLE switch (page 6) to the PRESET position, and set the ND
FILTER POSITION up/down buttons (page 6) to the CLEAR position.

Symptom Solution [Notes]

ˎˎ Do not use the procedure above during normal operation. Only use this procedure if the ND filter will not move. The
File uploading fails. The user name and password of the server may not be correct. ND filter may become damaged if this procedure is used during normal operation.
Input the correct user name and password. ˎˎ After the procedure above is used, consult a Sony service center to have the camcorder repaired.
File uploading is not available. 3G/4G signal conditions may be poor. ˎˎ If an error message still appears after performing the procedure above, shooting is still possible.
Move to another location and try again.

When using the ND Filter

Symptom Solution
The ND filter does not move. You can move the filter to the Clear position manually using the
following procedure.

1 Turn the camcorder POWER switch to the off position.

2 Remove the round cap on the bottom side.

134 8. Appendix

Error/Warning Messages
If a warning, caution, or operating condition that requires confirmation occurs on the camcorder, Viewfinder message Warning Recording/ Cause and Solution
a message is displayed in the viewfinder, the recording/tally lamp starts flashing, and a warning sound tally lamp
sound is emitted. Voltage Low Intermittent Flashing The DC IN voltage is low (level 1). Check the power
The warning sound is emitted from the built-in speaker and headphones connected to the source.
headphone connector.
Insufficient Voltage Continuous High-speed The DC IN voltage is too low (level 2). Recording is
flashing disabled.
Connect a different power source.
Media Near Full Intermittent Flashing The remaining capacity on the XQD memory card
Error Messages is getting low.
Replace at the earliest convenience.
The camcorder will stop operation when the following kind of display occurs. Media Full Continuous High-speed Clips could not be recorded or copied because
flashing there is no remaining capacity on the XQD
Viewfinder message Warning Recording/ Cause and Solution memory card.
sound tally lamp Replace immediately.
E + error code Continuous High-speed Indicates an abnormality in the camcorder. Clips Near Full Intermittent Flashing The number of additional clips that can be
flashing Recording stops, even if REC is displayed in the recorded on the XQD memory card is getting low.
viewfinder. Replace at the earliest convenience.
Turn off the camcorder, and check for any
Clips Full Continuous High-speed The maximum number of clips that can be
problem with connected devices, cables, or
flashing recorded on the XQD memory card has been
media. If the error persists when the camcorder is
reached.
turned on again, contact your Sony service
Recording or copying more clips is not possible.
representative.
Replace immediately.
(If the camcorder does not turn off when the
Last Clip Recording Intermittent Flashing The clip currently recording is the last clip that can
POWER switch is set to OFF, remove the battery or
be recorded, as the maximum number of clips has
disconnect the DC IN supply.)
been reached.
An error display or warning sound may not occur
Prepare a new XQD memory card.
depending on the status of the camcorder.
Media(A)1) Near Full Intermittent Flashing When using the Simul Rec function
Media(A) Full1)
Continuous High-speed When using the Simul Rec function
flashing
Media(A)1) Clips Near Intermittent Flashing When using the Simul Rec function
Warning Messages Full
Media(A)1) Clips Full Continuous High-speed When using the Simul Rec function
flashing
Follow the instructions provided if the following display occurs.
Media(A)1) Last Clip Intermittent Flashing When using the Simul Rec function
Viewfinder message Warning Recording/ Cause and Solution Rec
sound tally lamp Transfer Jobs Near – – The number of FTP file transfer jobs that can be
Battery Near End Intermittent Flashing The remaining capacity of the battery pack is Full registered is getting low.
getting low. Transfer Jobs Full – – The number of FTP file transfer jobs that can be
Recharge at the earliest convenience. registered has reached the upper limit. To add
Battery End Continuous High-speed The battery pack is empty. Recording is disabled. another job, first delete any unwanted jobs.2)
flashing Stop operation and replace the battery pack.
1) “(B)” is displayed for the card in slot B.
Temperature High Intermittent Flashing The internal temperature is high.
2) You can select and delete jobs using File Transfer >View Job List (page 120) in the Network menu. You can also
Turn off the camcorder and allow it to cool down delete jobs from the CBM job list.
before operating it again.
135 8. Appendix: Error/Warning Messages

Caution and Operation Messages Display message Cause and Solution

Cannot Use Specified Port The specified port number is invalid.
Number Check that the setting is correct.
The following caution and operation messages may appear in the center of the screen. Fan Stopped The built-in fan stopped.
Follow the instructions provided to resolve the issue. Avoid use at high temperatures, disconnect the power, and
contact your Sony service representative.
Display message Cause and Solution
Invalid setting value was reset: The Clip Naming format setting was reset because an invalid ALL
Battery Error An error was detected in the battery pack. Media/Clip Naming/Camera file was loaded.
Please Change Battery Replace with a normal battery pack. Position Configure the desired format settings, and try to save the ALL file
Backup Battery End The remaining capacity of the backup battery is insufficient. Please save All File again again.
Please Change Charge the backup battery. Lens I/F Error(xx:xx) A lens error was detected in the lens I/F communication when an
Unknown Media (A) 1) A memory card that has been partitioned or a memory card not E-mount lens was attached.
Please Change supported by the camcorder was inserted. Check the status of the connection with the E-mount lens.
The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be replaced. If the problem persists, contact your Sony service representative
Cannot Use Media (A) 1) A card using a different file system or an unformatted card was with the error code (five characters in parentheses).
Unsupported File System inserted. This Multi Term. acc is not An incompatible accessory was detected.
The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be replaced supported by the device and The only Multi Terminal accessory supported by the unit is the
or formatted using the camcorder. cannot be used. supplied grip remote control.
Media Needs to be Restored An error occurred on the memory card, and the card must be Please verify the compatibility.
restored. Failed This error may appear if an address cannot be obtained with DHCP
Restore the memory card. set to On.
Media Error The memory card may be damaged, and can no longer be used for Check the DHCP server settings.
Cannot Record to Media (A) 1) recording. Addition of auto upload job The maximum number of transfer jobs has been reached.
Playback is possible, so making a copy and replacing the memory failed. Clear any unwanted jobs. The auto upload destination setting for
card is recommended. original files or proxy files may also be incorrect. Check that the
Media Error The memory card may be damaged, and can no longer be used for setting is correct.
Cannot Use Media (A) 1) recording or playback. <SSID>Not found. Network (access point) with the specified <SSID> could not be
The card cannot be used in the camcorder, and must be replaced. found.
Media (A) 1) Error Recording and playback was stopped because an error occurred Check that the setting is correct.
Recording Halted while using the memory card. <SSID>Authentication Failed Connection authentication on the network (access point) with the
Playback Halted If the problem persists, replace the memory card. specified <SSID> failed.
Media Reached Rewriting Limit The memory card has reached the end of its life. Check that the password and other settings are correct.
Change Media (A) 1) Make a backup, and replace the card immediately. If you continue An IP address conflict has There is a conflict in the network addresses of the wireless LAN,
using the card, the card may not be able to record or play. occurred. Please check the wired LAN, modem, or between modems.
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the memory card. network settings. Change the address manually or change the settings for the
Copy All Sub Clips Copying of all sub-clips using Copy All Sub Clips failed because of network router.
NG: Reached Clip Number Limit the displayed reason. The IP address of the Wireless The IP address of the wireless LAN access point mode was
NG: Same File Already Exists ˎˎ The maximum number of clips is reached. LAN Access Point Mode has been changed due to a conflict in the network addresses of the wireless
NG: Not Enough Capacity ˎˎ There is a file with the same name. changed due to an IP address LAN access point mode, wired LAN, or modem.
ˎˎ There is not enough capacity for copying. conflict. Check the IP address setting.
Replace the media.
1) “(B)” is displayed for the card in slot B.
The specified address is invalid. The specified address is invalid.
Check that the setting is correct.
136 8. Appendix

Items Saved in Files

Items Configured in the Setup Menu LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File
Shooting Auto Exposure Level Yes Yes
Mode Yes Yes
Yes: Item is saved.
No: Item is not saved. Speed Yes Yes
–: Not saved (temporary setting) AGC Yes Yes
LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File AGC Limit Yes Yes
Shooting ISO/Gain/EI Mode Yes Yes AGC Point Yes Yes
ISO/Gain<H> Yes Yes Auto Shutter Yes Yes
ISO/Gain<M> Yes Yes A.SHT Limit Yes Yes
ISO/Gain<L> Yes Yes A.SHT Point Yes Yes
Exposure Index<H> Yes Yes Clip High light Yes No
Exposure Index<M> Yes Yes Detect Window Yes No
Exposure Index<L> Yes Yes Detect Window Indication Yes Yes
Shockless Gain Yes Yes Average Peak Level Ratio Yes No
Base Sensitivity Yes Yes Custom Width Yes No
Base ISO Yes Yes Custom Height Yes No
ND Filter Preset1 Yes Yes Custom H Position Yes No
Preset2 Yes Yes Custom V Position Yes No
Preset3 Yes Yes White Preset White Yes No
Shutter Mode Yes Yes Color Temp <A> Yes Yes*1
Shutter Speed On/Off Yes Yes Tint<A> Yes Yes*1
Shutter Speed Yes Yes R Gain <A> Yes Yes*1
Shutter Angle Yes Yes B Gain <A> Yes Yes*1
ECS On/Off Yes Yes Color Temp <B> Yes Yes*1
ECS Frequency Yes Yes Tint<B> Yes Yes*1
R Gain <B> Yes Yes*1
B Gain <B> Yes Yes*1
White Setting Shockless White Yes No
ATW Speed Yes No
White Switch<B> Yes Yes
Filter White Memory Yes No
137 8. Appendix: Items Saved in Files

LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File
Shooting Offset White Offset White <A> Yes No Shooting Noise Suppression Setting(SDR/HDR) Yes Yes
Offset Color Temp<A> Yes No Level(SDR/HDR) Yes Yes
Offset Tint<A> Yes No Setting(Cine EI) Yes No
Offset White <B> Yes No Level(Cine EI) Yes No
Offset Color Temp<B> Yes No Flicker Reduce Mode Yes No
Offset Tint<B> Yes No Frequency Yes No
Offset White<ATW> Yes No SteadyShot Setting Yes No
Offset Color Temp<ATW> Yes No Auto Black Balance Auto Black Balance – –
Offset Tint<ATW> Yes No Project Base Setting Shooting Mode Yes No
Focus AF Transition Speed Yes No Rec Format Frequency Yes No
AF Subj. Shift Sens. Yes No Imager Scan Mode Yes No
Focus Area Yes No Codec Yes No
Focus Area (AF-S) Yes No RAW Output Format Yes No
Face/Eye Detection AF Yes No Video Format Yes No
Push AF Mode Yes No Cine EI Setting Color Gamut Yes No
Touch Function in MF Yes No Embed LUT File Yes No
AF Assist Yes No HDR Setting VF SDR Preview Yes No
S&Q Motion Setting Yes No SDR Gain Yes No
Frame Rate Yes No Simul Rec Setting Yes No
Monitor LUT Category Yes No Rec Button Set Yes No
LUT Select Yes No 4K & HD (Sub) Rec Setting Yes No
User 3D LUT Select Yes No Proxy Rec Setting Yes No
Monitor LUT Setting Internal Rec Yes No Proxy Format Yes No
Monitor Out Yes No Audio Channel Yes No
HD(Sub) Rec/Proxy – – Chunk Yes No
SDI1 – – Interval Rec Setting No No
SDI2 – – Interval Time Yes No
HDMI – – Number of Frames Yes No
VF/Streaming – – Pre-Lighting Yes No
Monitor 3D LUT Load from Utility SD/MS – – Picture Cache Rec Setting Yes No
Load from Cloud(Private) – – Cache Rec Time Yes No
Load from Cloud(Share) – – SDI/HDMI Rec Control Setting Yes No
Reset – –
Reset All – –
138 8. Appendix: Items Saved in Files

LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File
Project Assignable Button <1> Yes No Paint Black Master Black Yes Yes
<2> Yes No R Black Yes Yes
<3> Yes No B Black Yes Yes
<4> Yes No Gamma Setting Yes Yes
<5> Yes No Step Gamma Yes Yes
<6> Yes No Master Gamma Yes Yes
<7> Yes No R Gamma Yes Yes
<8> Yes No G Gamma Yes Yes
<9> Yes No B Gamma Yes Yes
<10> Yes No Gamma Category Yes Yes
Focus Hold Button Yes No Gamma Select Yes Yes
Assignable Dial Assignable Dial Yes No Black Gamma Setting Yes Yes
Assignable Dial Direction Yes No Range Yes Yes
Multi Function Dial Default Function Yes No Master Black Gamma Yes Yes
User File Load from Utility SD/MS – – Knee Setting Yes Yes
Save to Utility SD/MS – – Auto Knee Yes Yes
File ID No No Point Yes Yes
Load Customize Data Yes No Slope Yes Yes
Load White Data Yes No Knee Saturation Yes Yes
All File Load from Utility SD/MS – – Knee Saturation Level Yes Yes
Load from Cloud(Private) – – White Clip Setting No Yes
Load from Cloud(Share) – – Level Yes Yes
Save to Utility SD/MS – – Detail(4K/QFHD) Setting Yes Yes
Save to Cloud(Private) – – Level Yes Yes
Save to Cloud(Share) – – H/V Ratio Yes Yes
File ID Yes No Crispening Yes Yes
Load Network Data No No Frequency Yes Yes
Planning Metadata Load from Media(A) – – Knee Aperture Yes Yes
Load from Media(B) – – Knee Aperture Level Yes Yes
Properties – – White Limit Yes Yes
Clear Memory – – Black Limit Yes Yes
Clip Name Display Yes No V Detail Creation Yes Yes
Paint HDR Paint Setting HLG Look Yes Yes
HDR Black Offset Yes Yes
HDR Knee Yes Yes
HDR Knee Point Yes Yes
HDR Knee Slope Yes Yes
139 8. Appendix: Items Saved in Files

LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File
Paint Detail(HD) Setting Yes Yes Paint Multi Matrix Setting Yes Yes
Level Yes Yes Area Indication No No
H/V Ratio Yes Yes Color Detection – –
Crispening Yes Yes Reset – –
Frequency Yes Yes Axis No No
Knee Aperture Yes Yes Hue Yes Yes
Knee Aperture Level Yes Yes Saturation Yes Yes
White Limit Yes Yes Scene File Recall Internal Memory – –
Black Limit Yes Yes Store Internal Memory – –
V Detail Creation Yes Yes Load from Utility SD/MS – –
Skin Detail Setting Yes Yes Save to Utility SD/MS – –
Area Detection – – File ID No Yes
Area Indication No No Scene White Data Yes No
Level Yes Yes TC/Media Timecode Mode Yes No
Saturation Yes Yes Run Yes No
Hue Yes Yes Setting No No
Width Yes Yes Reset – –
Aperture Setting Yes Yes TC Format Yes No
Level Yes Yes TC Display Display Select Yes No
Matrix Setting Yes Yes Users Bit Mode Yes No
Adaptive Matrix Yes Yes Setting No No
Preset Matrix Yes Yes HDMI TC Out Setting Yes No
Preset Select Yes Yes Clip Name Format Auto Naming Yes No
User Matrix Yes Yes Camera ID No No
User Matrix Level Yes Yes Reel Number No No
User Matrix Phase Yes Yes Camera Position No No
User Matrix R-G Yes Yes Title Prefix Yes No
User Matrix R-B Yes Yes Number Set No No
User Matrix G-R Yes Yes Update Media Media(A) – –
User Matrix G-B Yes Yes Media(B) – –
User Matrix B-R Yes Yes Format Media Media(A) – –
User Matrix B-G Yes Yes Media(B) – –
Utility SD/MS – –
140 8. Appendix: Items Saved in Files

LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File
Monitoring Output On/Off SDI1 Yes No Monitoring Display On/Off Gamma Display Assist Yes No
SDI2 Yes No Proxy Status Yes No
HDMI Yes No Base ISO/Sensitivity Yes No
Output Format SDI1 Yes No Media Status Yes No
SDI2 Yes No Video Signal Monitor Yes No
HDMI Yes No Clip Name Yes No
REF No No White Balance Yes No
Output Setting RAW to HD Conv. Yes No Scene File Yes No
Output Display Setting Yes No Focus Indicator Yes No
SDI1 Yes No Auto Exposure Mode Yes No
SDI2 Yes No Auto Exposure Level Yes No
HDMI Yes No Timecode Yes No
Display On/Off Network Status Yes No ND Filter Yes No
File Transfer Status Yes No Iris Yes No
NCM/Streaming Status Yes No ISO/Gain/EI Yes No
Rec/Play Status Yes No Shutter Yes No
RAW Output Control Status Yes No Level Gauge Yes No
Tally Yes No Audio Level Meter Yes No
Battery Remain Yes No Video Level Warning Yes No
Focus Mode Yes No Clip Number Yes No
Focus Position Yes No Notice Message Yes No
Focus Marker Yes No
Focus Area Indicator Yes No
Focus Area Ind.(AF-S) Yes No
Face/Eye Detection Frame Yes No
Lens Info Yes No
Imager Scan Mode Yes No
Rec Format Yes No
Frame Rate Yes No
Zoom Position Yes No
UWP RF Level Yes No
GPS Yes No
SteadyShot Yes No
Gamma/LUT Yes No
SDI/HDMI Rec Control Yes No
141 8. Appendix: Items Saved in Files

LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File
Monitoring Marker Setting Yes No Audio Audio Input CH1 MI SHOE Input Select Yes No
Color Yes No CH2 EXT Input Select Yes No
Center Marker Yes No CH2 MI SHOE Input Select Yes No
Safety Zone Yes No CH3 Input Select Yes No
Safety Area Yes No CH4 Input Select Yes No
Aspect Marker Yes No INPUT1 MIC Reference Yes No
Aspect Mask Yes No INPUT2 MIC Reference Yes No
Aspect Safety Zone Yes No Line Input Reference Yes No
Aspect Safety Area Yes No Reference Level Yes No
Aspect Select Yes No CH1 Wind Filter Yes No
Guide Frame Yes No CH2 Wind Filter Yes No
100% Marker Yes No CH3 Wind Filter Yes No
User Box Yes No CH4 Wind Filter Yes No
User Box Width Yes No CH3 Level Control Yes No
User Box Height Yes No CH4 Level Control Yes No
User Box H Position Yes No Audio Input Level Yes No
User Box V Position Yes No Limiter Mode Yes No
VF Setting Contrast Yes No CH1&2 AGC Mode Yes No
Brightness Yes No CH3&4 AGC Mode Yes No
Color Mode Yes No AGC Spec Yes No
De-Squeeze Yes No 1kHz Tone on Color Bars Yes No
Gamma Display Assist Setting Yes No CH1 Level Yes No
Peaking Setting Yes No CH2 Level Yes No
Type Yes No CH3 Level Yes No
Normal Peaking Frequency Yes No CH4 Level Yes No
Normal Peaking Level Yes No Audio Output Monitor CH Yes No
Color Yes No Headphone Out Yes No
Color Peaking Level Yes No Alarm Level Yes No
Zebra Setting Yes No HDMI Output CH Yes No
Zebra Select Yes No
Zebra1 Level Yes No
Zebra1 Aperture Level Yes No
Zebra2 Level Yes No
142 8. Appendix: Items Saved in Files

LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File
Thumbnail Display Clip Properties – – Technical Color Bars Setting No No
Set Shot Mark Delete Shot Mark1 – – Type Yes No
Delete Shot Mark2 – – Test Saw Test Saw Yes No
Set Clip Flag Add OK – – ND Dial CLEAR with Dial Yes No
Add NG – – Tally Front Tally Lamp Yes No
Add KEEP – – Rear Tally Lamp Yes No
Delete Clip Flag – – Tally Control Yes No
Lock/Unlock Clip Select Clip – – HOLD Switch Setting with Rec Button Yes No
Lock All Clips – – with Hand Grip Remote Yes No
Unlock All Clips – – Touch Operation Setting Yes No
Delete Clip Select Clip – – Rec Review Setting Yes No
All Clips – – Handle Zoom Setting Yes No
Copy Clip Select Clip – – High Yes No
All Clips – – Low Yes No
Copy Sub Clip All Clips – – GPS GPS Yes No
Transfer Clip Select Clip – – Menu Settings User Menu Only Yes No
All Clips – – User Menu with Lock No No
Transfer Clip (Proxy) Select Clip – – Status Page On/Off Main Yes No
All Clips – – Camera Yes No
Set Index Picture – – Audio Yes No
Thumbnail View Essence Mark Thumbnail – – Project Yes No
Clip Thumbnail – – Monitoring Yes No
Filter Clips OK – – Assignable Button Yes No
NG – – Battery Yes No
KEEP – – Media Yes No
None – – GPS Yes No
All – – Network Yes No
Customize View Thumbnail Caption Yes No NCM/Streaming Yes No
File Transfer Yes No
RCP CNS Mode Yes No
Detail Control(RCP) Yes No
Fan Control Setting Yes No
143 8. Appendix: Items Saved in Files

LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File
Technical Lens Zoom Ring Direction Yes No Network ST Mode Settings Camera Remote Control Yes No
Shading Compensation Yes No Connected Network
Chroma Aberration Comp. Yes No SSID – –
Distortion Comp. Yes No Security – –
Distance Display Yes No Password – –
Zoom Position Display Yes No DHCP – –
Iris Display Yes No IP Address – –
Video Light Set Video Light Set Yes No Subnet Mask – –
APR APR – – Gateway – –
Camera Battery Alarm Low Battery Yes No DNS Auto – –
Battery Empty Yes No Primary DNS Server – –
Camera DC IN Alarm DC Low Voltage1 Yes No Secondary DNS Server – –
DC Low Voltage2 Yes No Scan Networks
Ext. Unit Battery Alarm Near End:Info Battery Yes No SSID – –
End:Info Battery Yes No Security – –
Near End:Sony Battery Yes No Password No No
End:Sony Battery Yes No DHCP Yes No
Near End:Other Battery Yes No IP Address Yes No
End:Other Battery Yes No Subnet Mask Yes No
Detected Battery No No Gateway Yes No
Ext. Unit DC IN Alarm DC Low Voltage1 Yes No DNS Auto Yes No
DC Low Voltage2 Yes No Primary DNS Server Yes No
Network Setup for Mobile App Setup – – Secondary DNS Server Yes No
Access Authentication User Name No No Manual Register
Input Password No No SSID Yes No
Generate Password No No Security Yes No
Show Settings No No Password No No
Wireless LAN Setting Yes No DHCP Yes No
WPS – – IP Address Yes No
NFC – – Subnet Mask Yes No
MAC Address – – Gateway Yes No
AP Mode Settings Channel Yes No DNS Auto Yes No
Camera SSID & Password – – Primary DNS Server Yes No
Regenerate Password – – Secondary DNS Server Yes No
IP Address – –
Subnet Mask – –
144 8. Appendix: Items Saved in Files

LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File
Network Wired LAN Setting Yes No Network File Transfer Auto Upload Yes No
Camera Remote Control Yes No Auto Upload (Proxy) Yes No
Detail Settings Default Upload Server Yes No
DHCP Yes No Clear Completed Jobs – –
IP Address Yes No Clear All Jobs – –
Subnet Mask Yes No View Job List – –
Gateway Yes No Server Settings(NCM) – –
DNS Auto Yes No Server Settings1/Server Settings2/Server Settings3
Primary DNS Server Yes No Display Name Yes No
Secondary DNS Server Yes No Service Yes No
Modem Setting Yes No Host Name Yes No
Camera Remote Control Yes No Port Yes No
Modem1 IP Address – – User Name No No
Modem1 Subnet Mask – – Password No No
Modem2 IP Address – – Passive Mode Yes No
Modem2 Subnet Mask – – Destination Directory Yes No
Network Client Mode Setting Yes No Using Secure Protocol Yes No
NCM Settings Select Yes No Root Certificate – –
NCM Settings1/NCM Settings2/NCM Settings3 Root Certificate Status – –
Display Name Yes No Reset – –
CCM Address Yes No Network Reset Reset – –
CCM Port Yes No
User Name No No
Password No No
CCM Certificate – –
CCM Certificate Status – –
Camera Control Yes No
Camera Setting No No
Reset – –
Streaming Quality Yes No
145 8. Appendix: Items Saved in Files

LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 LEVEL 3 All File Scene File

Items Configured by Assignable Buttons
Maintenance Language Select Yes No
Clock Set Time Zone Yes No
Yes: Item is saved.
Date Mode Yes No No: Item is not saved.
12h/24h Yes No –: Not saved (temporary setting)

Date No No Assignable button selection All File Scene File

Time No No ND Filter Position Yes Yes
Network Public Key Key Creation – – Auto Iris Yes Yes
Key Clear – – ATW Yes Yes*1
Create Key Date – – Focus Setting Yes No
All Reset Reset – – Display Yes No
Reset without Network – – VF Adjust Yes No
Hours Meter Hours (System) – –
*1 Not loaded when Scene File >Scene White Data in the Paint menu is set to Off.
Hours (Reset) – –
Reset – –
Version Version Number – –
Ext. Unit Version Number – – Items Configured by the Assignable Dial
Version Up – –
Lens Version Number – –
Yes: Item is saved.
*1 Not loaded when Scene File >Scene White Data in the Paint menu is set to Off. No: Item is not saved.
–: Not saved (temporary setting)

Assignable dial selection All File Scene File

IRIS Yes Yes
ND Filter Yes Yes
Audio Input Level Yes No
146 8. Appendix

Block Diagrams
See related items in “Setting the Audio to Record” (page 45) and “Audio Menu” (page 108).

Audio Input (CH1&CH2)

INPUT1
CH1

For XLR adaptor

INPUT2

[CH1 MI SHOE Input Select]

Shoe CH1
Wireless <CH1 INPUT SELECT> [CH1 Wind Filter] <CH1 LEVEL [CH1 Level] <CH1 INPUT LEVEL>
EXT On CONTROL>* Audio Input Level 0 ~ 10
Internal MIC INT Off Side
AUTO
(monaural) MI SHOE MAN Level + Side
Through

[CH2 EXT Input Select]

INPUT1
INPUT2
CH2
Shoe CH1
For XLR adaptor

Shoe CH2

EXT. Unit CH1

[CH1&2 AGC Mode]
EXT. Unit CH2 Mono
[CH2 MI SHOE Input <CH2 INPUT SELECT> [CH2 Wind Filter] <CH2 LEVEL [CH2 Level] <CH2 INPUT LEVEL> [Color Bars]
Stereo
Select] EXT On CONTROL>* Audio Input Level 0 ~ 10 [1kHz Tone on Color
Shoe CH2 INT Off AUTO Side Bars]
Wireless MI SHOE Level + Side On
MAN
Through Off
[Audio Input Level] [Limiter Mode]
0 ~ 99 Off, -6dB,
-9dB, -12dB,
-15dB, -17dB SG

* Set to Manual when audio is input from XLR adaptor.

147 8. Appendix: Block Diagrams

Audio Input (CH3&CH4)

OFF

CH3

INPUT1

For XLR adaptor

INPUT2

[CH3 Level [CH3 Level] <CH3 INPUT LEVEL>

[CH3 Input Select] [CH3 Wind Filter] Audio Input Level 0 ~ 10
Internal MIC Control]*
Off On Side
INPUT1 Off Auto
(monaural) Manual Level + Side
Internal MIC Through
Shoe CH1
Wireless

CH4
For XLR adaptor

Shoe CH1

Shoe CH2

EXT. Unit CH1 [CH3&4 AGC Mode]

Mono
[CH4 Input Select] [CH4 Wind Filter] [CH4 Level [CH4 Level] <CH4 INPUT LEVEL> [Color Bars]
Stereo
Off On Control]* Audio Input Level 0 ~ 10 [1kHz Tone on Color
EXT. Unit CH2 INPUT1 Off Side Bars]
Auto
INPUT2 Level + Side On
Manual
Internal MIC Through Off
Shoe CH2 [Limiter Mode]
[Audio Input Level]
Wireless Off, -6dB,
0 ~ 99
-9dB, -12dB,
-15dB, -17dB SG

* Set to Manual when audio is input from XLR adaptor.

148 8. Appendix: Block Diagrams

Audio Output

CH1
CH2
SDI OUT
CH3
CH4

HDMI OUT

[HDMI Output CH]

CH1/CH2, CH3/CH4
QoS
Streaming

Headphone

Ch
MIX

[Headphone Out] <VOLUME>

Mono, Stereo 0 ~ 50

[Monitor CH]
CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, Alarm Internal Speaker
CH1/CH2, CH3/CH4, Beep
MIX ALL

[Alarm Level]
0~7
149 8. Appendix

Updating E-mount Lens Software

You can update the software of an E-mount
lens using the camcorder.
Refer to the web site for the lens for lenses
that can be updated and the corresponding
software.

Checking the Version

1 Attach an E-mount lens to the camcorder

(page 22).

2 Select Version in the Maintenance menu

to display Lens Version Number
(page 121).
The software version number of the
E-mount lens is displayed on the side.

Updating Software

Set the camcorder to mass storage mode

(page 127).
Update the software following the procedure
supplied with the lens software.
150 8. Appendix

Licenses
Establish a Mass Storage connection between SOFTWARE LICENSE will continue to be available, or will operate without
MPEG-4 AVC Patent Portfolio the product and a computer to read licenses in The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. The SOFTWARE is interruption or modification.
protected by copyright and other intellectual property
License the “PMHOME” - “LICENSE” folder.
laws and international treaties. EXCLUDED SOFTWARE AND OPEN SOURCE
COMPONENTS
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE COPYRIGHT Notwithstanding the foregoing limited license grant,
All right and title in and to the SOFTWARE (including, you acknowledge that the SOFTWARE may include
AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT but not limited to, any images, photographs, animation, EXCLUDED SOFTWARE. Certain EXCLUDED SOFTWARE
PERSONAL USE OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER
USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE video, audio, music, text and “applets” incorporated into may be covered by open source software licenses
IMPORTANT: the SOFTWARE) is owned by SONY or one or more of the (“Open Source Components”), which means any
REMUNERATION TO
BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE CONTAINED IN THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS. software licenses approved as open source licenses by
(i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE
SOLID STATE MEMORY CAMCORDER, PLEASE READ THIS the Open Source Initiative or any substantially similar
AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (“EULA”) CAREFULLY. BY GRANT OF LICENSE licenses, including but not limited to any license that,
(ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED
USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ARE ACCEPTING THE TERMS SONY grants you a limited license to use the SOFTWARE as a condition of distribution of the software licensed
BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL solely in connection with the wireless adapter and only
OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS OF under such license, requires that the distributor make
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A for your individual use. SONY and the THIRD-PARTY the software available in source code format. If and to
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC
THIS EULA, YOU MAY NOT USE THE SOFTWARE.
SUPPLIERS expressly reserve all rights, title and interest the extent disclosure is required, please visit www.sony.
VIDEO. (including, but not limited to, all intellectual property com/linux or other SONY-designated web site for a list
This EULA is a legal agreement between you and Sony
NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE rights) in and to the SOFTWARE that this EULA does not of applicable OPEN SOURCE COMPONENTS included in
Corporation (“SONY”). This EULA governs your rights
IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL specifically grant to you. the SOFTWARE from time to time, and the applicable
and obligations regarding the software of SONY and/or
INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG its third party licensors (including SONY’s affiliates) and terms and conditions governing its use. Such terms
LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM their respective affiliates (collectively, the “THIRD-PARTY REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS and conditions may be changed by the applicable
SUPPLIERS”) contained in the wireless adapter, together You may not copy, publish, adapt, redistribute, attempt third party at any time without liability to you. To the
with any updates/ upgrades provided by SONY, any to derive source code, modify, reverse engineer, extent required by the licenses covering EXCLUDED
printed, on-line or other electronic documentation for decompile, or disassemble any of the SOFTWARE, SOFTWARE, the terms of such licenses will apply in lieu
Obtaining Software Under the such software, and any data files created by operation of whether in whole or in part, or create any derivative of the terms of this EULA. To the extent the terms of the
such software (collectively, the “SOFTWARE”). works from or of the SOFTWARE unless such derivative licenses applicable to EXCLUDED SOFTWARE prohibit
GPL/LGPL License works are intentionally facilitated by the SOFTWARE. any of the restrictions in this EULA with respect to such
Notwithstanding the foregoing, any software in You may not modify or tamper with any digital rights EXCLUDED SOFTWARE, such restrictions will not apply
the SOFTWARE having a separate end user license management functionality of the SOFTWARE. You to such EXCLUDED SOFTWARE. To the extent the terms
This product uses software to which the may not bypass, modify, defeat or circumvent any of of the licenses applicable to Open Source Components
agreement (including, but not limited to, GNU General
GPL/LGPL applies. This informs you that you the functions or protections of the SOFTWARE or any require SONY to make an offer to provide source code
Public license and Lesser/Library General Public License)
have a right to have access to, modify, and shall be covered by such applicable separate end user mechanisms operatively linked to the SOFTWARE. You in connection with the SOFTWARE, such offer is hereby
redistribute source code for these software license agreement in lieu of the terms of this EULA to may not separate any individual component of the made.
programs under the conditions of the GPL/ the extent required by such separate end user license SOFTWARE for use on more than one wireless adapter
LGPL. agreement (“EXCLUDED SOFTWARE”). unless expressly authorized to do so by SONY. You USE OF SOFTWARE WITH COPYRIGHTED
The source code is provided on the internet. may not remove, alter, cover or deface any trademarks MATERIALS
Use the following URL and follow the or notices on the SOFTWARE. You may not share, The SOFTWARE may be capable of being used by you
download instructions. distribute, rent, lease, sublicense, assign, transfer or to view, store, process and/or use content created by
https://oss.sony.net/Products/Linux/ sell the SOFTWARE. The software, network services you and/or third parties. Such content may be protected
or other products other than SOFTWARE upon which by copyright, other intellectual property laws, and/
We would prefer that you do not contact us the SOFTWARE’S performance depends might be or agreements. You agree to use the SOFTWARE only
about the contents of the source code. interrupted or discontinued at the discretion of the in compliance with all such laws and agreements that
suppliers (software suppliers, service suppliers, or apply to such content. You acknowledge and agree
Licenses (in English) are recorded in the SONY). SONY and such suppliers do not warrant that the that SONY may take appropriate measures to protect
internal memory of your product. SOFTWARE, network services, contents or other products the copyright of content stored, processed or used by
the SOFTWARE. Such measures include, but are not
151 8. Appendix: Licenses

limited to, counting the frequency of your backup and HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE of the wireless adapter, the SOFTWARE and their
restoration through certain SOFTWARE features, refusal The SOFTWARE is not fault-tolerant and is not designed, GIVEN BY SONY OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE components; (3) configurations of your wireless adapter,
to accept your request to enable restoration of data, and manufactured or intended for use or resale as on- OF SONY SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, DUTY OR the SOFTWARE and the software applications, contents
termination of this EULA in the event of your illegitimate line control equipment in hazardous environments CONDITION OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF and peripheral devices that interact with the wireless
use of the SOFTWARE. requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the THIS WARRANTY. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE adapter and the SOFTWARE; (4) use and frequency of
operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL use of the functions of (x) the SOFTWARE, and (y) the
CONTENT SERVICE communication systems, air traffic control, direct life NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME software applications, contents and peripheral devices
PLEASE ALSO NOTE THAT THE SOFTWARE MAY BE support machines, or weapons systems, in which the JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF that interact with the SOFTWARE; and (5) location data,
DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH CONTENT AVAILABLE failure of the SOFTWARE could lead to death, personal IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THESE EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT as indicated below. SONY and its affiliates, partners
THROUGH ONE OR MORE CONTENT SERVICES injury, or severe physical or environmental damage APPLY TO YOU. and agents may use and disclose Information subject
(“CONTENT SERVICE”). USE OF THE SERVICE AND THAT (“HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES”). SONY, each of the THIRD- to applicable laws in order to improve its products and
CONTENT IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS OF SERVICE OF PARTY SUPPLIERS, and each of their respective affiliates LIMITATION OF LIABILITY services or to provide products or services to you. Such
THAT CONTENT SERVICE. IF YOU DECLINE TO ACCEPT specifically disclaim any express or implied warranty, SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS (for uses include, but are not limited to: (a) administering
THOSE TERMS, YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE WILL duty or condition of fitness for HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES. purposes of this Section, SONY and each of the THIRD- the functionalities of the SOFTWARE; (b) to improve,
BE LIMITED. You acknowledge and agree that certain PARTY SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to as service, update or upgrade the SOFTWARE; (c)
content and services available through the SOFTWARE EXCLUSION OF WARRANTY ON SOFTWARE “SONY”) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL improving, developing and enhancing the current and
may be provided by third parties over which SONY has You acknowledge and agree that use of the SOFTWARE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF future products and services of SONY and other parties;
no control. USE OF THE CONTENT SERVICE REQUIRES AN is at your sole risk and that you are responsible for use ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, BREACH OF (d) to provide you with information about the products
INTERNET CONNECTION. THE CONTENT SERVICE MAY BE of the SOFTWARE. The SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS,” CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR UNDER and services offered by SONY and other parties; (e)
DISCONTINUED AT ANY TIME. without warranty, duty or condition of any kind. ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY RELATED TO THE SOFTWARE, complying with applicable laws or regulations; and (f)
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY DAMAGES to the extent offered, providing you with location-based
INTERNET CONNECTIVITY AND THIRD PARTY SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS (for ARISING OUT OF LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF REVENUE, services of SONY and other parties, as indicated below.
SERVICES purposes of this Section, SONY and each of the THIRD- LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR In addition, SONY retains the right to use Information
You acknowledge and agree that access to certain PARTY SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to as ANY ASSOCIATED HARDWARE, DOWN TIME AND USER'S to protect itself and third parties from illegal, criminal or
SOFTWARE features may require an Internet connection “SONY”) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, DUTIES TIME, EVEN IF ANY OF THEM HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF harmful conduct.
for which you are solely responsible. Further, you are OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN ANY CASE,
solely responsible for payment of any third party fees BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES EACH AND ALL OF THEIR AGGREGATE LIABILITY UNDER Certain services available through the SOFTWARE may
associated with your Internet connection, including OF MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT AND ANY PROVISION OF THIS EULA SHALL BE LIMITED TO rely upon location information, including, but not limited
but not limited to Internet service provider or airtime FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SONY THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID FOR THE PRODUCT. to, the geographic location of the wireless adapter. You
charges. Operation of the SOFTWARE may be limited DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY CONDITIONS SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION acknowledge that for the purpose of providing such
or restricted depending on the capabilities, bandwidth OR REPRESENTATIONS (A) THAT THE FUNCTIONS OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL services, SONY, the THIRDPARTY SUPPLIERS or their
or technical limitations of your Internet connection CONTAINED IN ANY OF THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION partners may collect, archive, process and use such
and service. The provision, quality and security of such REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THEY WILL BE UPDATED, (B) MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. location data, and that such services are governed by
Internet connectivity are the sole responsibility of the THAT THE OPERATION OF ANY OF THE SOFTWARE WILL the privacy policies of SONY or such third party. By
third party providing such service. BE CORRECT OR ERROR-FREE OR THAT ANY DEFECTS CONSENT TO USE OF NON-PERSONAL reviewed the privacy policies applicable to such services
WILL BE CORRECTED, (C) THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL INFORMATION, LOCATION DATA, DATA and consent to such activities.
EXPORT AND OTHER REGULATIONS NOT DAMAGE ANY OTHER SOFTWARE, HARDWARE OR SECURITY
You agree to comply with all applicable export and re- DATA, (D) THAT ANY SOFTWARE, NETWORK SERVICES You acknowledge and agree that SONY and its SONY, its affiliates, partners and agents will not
export restrictions and regulations of the area or country (INCLUDING THE INTERNET) OR PRODUCTS (OTHER affiliates, partners and agents may read, collect, intentionally use Information to personally identify
in which you reside, and not to transfer, or authorize THAN THE SOFTWARE) UPON WHICH THE SOFTWARE’S transfer, process and store certain information the owner or user of the SOFTWARE without your
the transfer, of the SOFTWARE to a prohibited country PERFORMANCE DEPENDS WILL CONTINUE TO BE collected from the SOFTWARE, including but not knowledge or consent. Any use of Information will be
or otherwise in violation of any such restrictions or AVAILABLE, UNINTERRUPTED OR UNMODIFIED, AND limited to information about (i) the SOFTWARE and in accordance with the privacy policies of SONY or such
regulations. (E) REGARDING THE USE OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE (ii) the software applications, contents and peripheral third party.
OF THE SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS, devices that interact with your wireless adapter and the
ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE. SOFTWARE (“Information”). Information includes, but Please contact applicable contact address of each area or
is not limited to: (1) unique identifiers relating to your country for SONY’s current privacy policy. Please contact
wireless adapter and its components; (2) performance applicable third parties for privacy policies relating
152 8. Appendix: Licenses

to personally identifiable and other information you GOVERNING LAW AND JURISDICTION of any such notice shall be deemed your agreement to
provide when you use or access third party software or The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the be bound by such amendment. Open Source Software Licenses
services. International Sale of Goods shall not apply to this EULA.
This EULA shall be governed by the laws of Japan, THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARIES
On the basis of license contracts between
Information may be processed, stored or transferred without regards to conflict of laws provisions. Any Each THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER is an express intended
Sony and the software copyright holders, this
to SONY, its affiliates or agents which are located in dispute arising out of this EULA shall be subject to the thirdparty beneficiary of, and shall have the right to
product uses open software.
countries outside of your country of residence. Data exclusive venue of the Tokyo District Court in Japan, and enforce, each provision of this EULA with respect to the
protection and information privacy laws in certain the parties hereby consent to the venue and jurisdiction To meet the requirements of the software
SOFTWARE of such party.
countries may not offer the same level of protection of such courts. copyright holders, Sony is obligated to inform
as your country of residence and you may have fewer Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, you of the content of these licenses.
legal rights in relation to Information processed and EQUITABLE REMEDIES you may contact SONY by writing to SONY at applicable Licenses (in English) are recorded in the
stored in, or transferred to, such countries. SONY will Notwithstanding anything contained in this EULA to the contact address of each area or country. internal memory of your product.
use reasonable efforts to take appropriate technical and contrary, you acknowledge and agree that any violation Establish a Mass Storage connection between
organizational steps to prevent unauthorized access to of or noncompliance with this EULA by you will cause Copyright © 2012 Sony Corporation. the product and a computer to read licenses in
or disclosure of Information, but does not warrant it will irreparable harm to SONY, for which monetary damages the “PMHOME” - “LICENSE” folder.
eliminate all risk of misuse of such Information. would be inadequate, and you consent to SONY
obtaining any injunctive or equitable relief that SONY
AUTOMATIC UPDATE FEATURE deems necessary or appropriate in such circumstances.
From time to time, SONY or the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS SONY may also take any legal and technical remedies
may automatically update or otherwise modify the to prevent violation of and/or to enforce this EULA,
SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to, for purposes including, but not limited to, immediate termination of
of enhancement of security functions, error correction your use of the SOFTWARE, if SONY believes in its sole
and improvement of functions, at such time as you discretion that you are violating or intend to violate
interact with SONY’s or third parties’ servers, or this EULA. These remedies are in addition to any other
otherwise. Such updates or modifications may delete remedies SONY may have at law, in equity or under
or change the nature of features or other aspects of the contract.
SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to, functions you
may rely upon. You acknowledge and agree that such TERMINATION
activities may occur at SONY’s sole discretion and that Without prejudice to any of its other rights, SONY may
SONY may condition continued use of the SOFTWARE terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with any of its
upon your complete installation or acceptance of such terms. In case of such termination, you must: (i) cease
update or modifications. Any updates/modifications all use, and destroy any copies, of the SOFTWARE; (ii)
shall be deemed to be, and shall constitute part of, the comply with the requirements in the section below
SOFTWARE for purposes of this EULA. By acceptance of entitled “Your Account Responsibilities”.
this EULA, you consent to such update/modification.
AMENDMENT
ENTIRE AGREEMENT, WAIVER, SEVERABILITY SONY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO AMEND ANY OF THE
This EULA and SONY’s privacy policy, each as amended TERMS OF THIS EULA AT ITS SOLE DISCRETION BY
and modified from time to time, together constitute the POSTING NOTICE ON A SONY DESIGNATED WEB SITE, BY
entire agreement between you and SONY with respect EMAIL NOTIFICATION TO AN EMAIL ADDRESS PROVIDED
to the SOFTWARE. The failure of SONY to exercise or BY YOU, BY PROVIDING NOTICE AS PART OF THE
enforce any right or provision of this EULA shall not PROCESS IN WHICH YOU OBTAIN UPGRADES/ UPDATES
constitute a waiver of such right or provision. If any part OR BY ANY OTHER LEGALLY RECOGNIZABLE FORM OF
of this EULA is held invalid, illegal, or unenforceable, NOTICE. If you do not agree to the amendment, you
that provision shall be enforced to the maximum extent should promptly contact SONY for instructions. Your
permissible so as to maintain the intent of this EULA, continued use of the SOFTWARE after the effective date
and the other parts will remain in full force and effect.
153 8. Appendix

Specifications
Operating temperature XAVC Long XAVC-L HD 25 mode:
General 0 °C to 40 °C (32 °F to 104 °F) XAVC-L QFHD mode: 59.94i
Storage temperature 3840×2160/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, Approx. 200 minutes
Mass Approx. 2.3 kg (5 lb 1 oz) (body, –20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to +140 °F) 23.98P, 25P (using QD-G64E)
including handle) Continuous operating time XAVC-L HD 50 mode: MPEG-2 Long GOP
Dimensions Approx. 54 minutes (using BP-U35) 1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, MPEG HD422 mode:
(Unit: mm (inch), body (including (body, lens, XAVC-I QFHD 59.94P 50i, 29.97P, 23.98P, 25P 59.94i
handle))1) recording, viewfinder on, no XAVC-L HD 35 mode: Approx. 105 minutes
external device connected) 1920×1080/59.94P, 50P, 59.94i, (using QD-G64E)
Recording format (video) 50i, 29.97P, 23.98P, 25P [Note]
159.5 XAVC Intra XAVC-L HD 25 mode: The recording/playback time may vary due to usage
(6 3/8) 146 conditions and memory characteristics. The recording
XAVC-I 4K/QFHD mode: VBR, 1920×1080/59.94i, 50i
(5 3/4) and playback times are for a continuous recording as a
600 Mbps (max) bit rate, MPEG-4 MPEG-2 Long GOP single clip. The actual times may be shorter, depending
AVC/H.264 MPEG HD422 mode: on the number of clips recorded.
257 (10 1/8) XAVC-I HD mode: CBG, 223 Mbps 1920×1080/59.94i, 50i, 29.97P,
(max) bit rate, MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 23.98P, 25P
XAVC Long Recording/playback time
XAVC-L QFHD mode: VBR, 150 Mbps XAVC Intra Camera Section
(max) bit rate, MPEG-4 H.264/AVC XAVC-I 4K/QFHD mode:
246 XAVC-L HD 50 mode: VBR, 50 Mbps 59.94P Imaging device (type)
(9 3/4) (max) bit rate, MPEG-4 H.264/AVC Approx. 22 minutes 35 mm full-frame, single-chip CMOS image
142.5 XAVC-L HD 35 mode: VBR, 35 Mbps (using QD-G128E/QD-G120F) sensor
(5 5/8) (max) bit rate, MPEG-4 H.264/AVC XAVC-I HD mode: Number of pixels
XAVC-L HD 25 mode: VBR, 25 Mbps 59.94P 20.5M (total)
(max) bit rate, MPEG-4 H.264/AVC Approx. 57 minutes Auto focus
216 (8 5/8)
MPEG-2 Long GOP (using QD-G128E/QD-G120F) Detection method: Phase detection/contrast
229 (9 1/8)
MPEG HD422 mode: CBR, 50 Mbps XAVC Long detection
1) The values for dimensions are approximate. (max) bit rate, MPEG-2 422P@HL XAVC-L QFHD mode: Internal ND filters
Recording format (audio) 59.94P CLEAR: OFF
Power requirements LPCM 24-bit, 48 kHz, 4-channel Approx. 86 minutes 1: 1/4ND
19.5 V DC (18.0 V to 20.5 V) Recording frame rate (using QD-G128E/G120F) 2: 1/16ND
Power consumption XAVC Intra XAVC-L HD 50 mode: 3: 1/64ND
Approx. 35.2 W (body, lens, XAVC-I XAVC-I 4K mode: 4096×2160/59.94P, 59.94P Linearly variable ND: 1/4ND to 1/128ND
QFHD 59.94P recording, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 24P, 23.98P Approx. 110 minutes ISO sensitivity
viewfinder on, no external device XAVC-I QFHD mode: (using QD-G64E) ISO 800/4000 (Cine EI mode, D55 Light
connected) 3840×2160/59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, XAVC-L HD 35 mode: source)
Approx. 36.8 W (body, lens, XAVC-I 23.98P, 25P 59.94P Lens mount
QFHD 59.94P recording, XAVC-I HD mode: 1920×1080/59.94P, Approx. 150 minutes E-mount (lever lock type)
viewfinder on, 3G-SDI×2, HDMI, 50P, 59.94i, 50i, 29.97P, 23.98P, (using QD-G64E) Latitude
external device connected) 25P 15+ stops
154 8. Appendix: Specifications

Video S/N Internal microphone HDMI:

57 dB (Y) (typ) Monaural Type A, 19-pin
Media Slot Section
Shutter speed REF OUT:
64F to 1/8000 sec. (23.98P) BNC type XQD card slots for video recording (2)
Shutter angle TC OUT: UTILITY SD/MS card slot (1)
5.6° to 360°, 2 to 64 frames Wireless LAN BNC type
Slow & Quick Motion
XAVC QFHD: 1 to 60P, XAVC HD: 1 to 180P Supported standards Other
White balance IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac DC IN: Supplied Accessories
2000 K to 15000 K Frequency band EIAJ compliant, 18 V to 20.5 V DC
Gain 2.4 GHz band Extension unit connector:
AC adaptor (1)
–3 dB to +27 dB (1 dB increments) 5.2/5.3/5.6/5.8 GHz band (PXW-FX9V/VK only) Dedicated (144-pin)
Power cord (1)
Gamma curve Supported security protocols Multi-interface shoe:
Battery charger (1)
S-Cinetone, STD1, STD2, STD3, STD4, STD5, WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK Dedicated (21-pin)
Battery pack (1)
STD6, HG1, HG2, HG3, HG4, HG7, NFC Forum Type 3 Tag compliant REMOTE:
LCD monitor (including rod and clamp)
HG8, S-Log3, HLG 2.5 mm 3-pole sub-mini type
Eyepiece (1)
USB/multi:
USB cable (1)
USB 2.0 standard compliant, micro B type for
Grip remote control (1)
Input/Output Section mass storage (1)
Lens mount cap (1)
Audio Section VF:
Handle connector protective cap (1)
Dedicated (40-pin)
Accessory shoe kit (accessory shoe (1), shoe plate
Sampling frequency (1), screws (4))
Inputs
48 kHz Tape measure hook (1)
INPUT 1/2:
Quantization Circular-shaped clamp spacer (2)
24-bit
XLR type, 3-pin, female Display Section Screws (5)
LINE / MIC / MIC+48V switchable
Frequency response Before Using This Unit (1)
MIC: Reference –30 dBu to –80 dBu
XLR input MIC mode: 20 Hz to 20 kHz Warranty booklet (1)
GENLOCK IN:
(±3 dB or less)
BNC type Viewfinder (LCD)
XLR input LINE mode: 20 Hz to 20 kHz Screen size Design and specifications are subject to
TC IN:
(±3 dB or less) 8.8 cm (3.5 inch) diagonal change without notice.
BNC type
Dynamic range Aspect ratio
XLR input MIC mode: 80 dB (Typical) 16:9
Outputs
XLR input LINE mode: 90 dB (Typical) Number of pixels
SDI OUT1:
Distortion 1280 (H) × 720 (V)
BNC type, 12G-SDI, 6G-SDI, 3G-SDI (Level A/B),
XLR input MIC mode: 0.08% or lower
HD-SDI
(–40 dBu input level)
SDI OUT2:
XLR input LINE mode: 0.08% or lower
BNC type, 3G-SDI (Level A/B), HD-SDI
(+14 dBu input level)
Headphones (stereo mini jack):
Built-in speaker
–16 dBu (reference level output, maximum
Monaural
monitor volume, 16 Ω load)
155 8. Appendix: Specifications

Notes Software Downloads Trademarks

ˎˎAlways make a test recording, and verify
that it was recorded successfully. SONY
WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF When the unit is used with a PC connection, ˎˎXDCAM is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
ANY KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED download device drivers, plug-ins, and ˎˎXAVC and are registered trademarks of
TO, COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT application software, where applicable, from Sony Corporation.
ON ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT the Sony Professional products web site. ˎˎXQD and are trademarks of Sony
OR ITS RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL Corporation.
STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER Sony Professional products web site ˎˎThe terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO RECORD homepage: Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo
CONTENT OF ANY TYPE. are trademarks or registered trademarks of
ˎˎAlways verify that the unit is operating Japan https://www.sony.jp/professional/ HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the
properly before use. SONY WILL NOT All other countries United States and other countries.
BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY https://pro.sony/ (click [Change ˎˎMicrosoft and Windows are trademarks
KIND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, Country, Region or Language] at the or registered trademarks of Microsoft
COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON bottom of the page and select the Corporation in the United States and/or
ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT OR region and language) other countries.
PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF ˎˎMac and Mac OS are registered trademarks
THIS UNIT, EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY Sony Creative Software, software download of Apple Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE page ˎˎ“Memory Stick”, “Memory Stick Duo,”
WARRANTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON http://www.sonycreativesoftware.com/ “Memory Stick PRO Duo,” “Catalyst Browse,”
WHATSOEVER. download/software_for_sony_equipment “Content Browser Mobile,” and the “Content
ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR CLAIMS OF Browser Mobile” logo are trademarks or
ANY KIND MADE BY USERS OF THIS UNIT registered trademarks of Sony Corporation.
OR MADE BY THIRD PARTIES. ˎˎiOS is a registered trademark or trademark
ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS, of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates
REPAIR, OR REPRODUCTION OF ANY DATA in the United States and certain other
RECORDED ON THE INTERNAL STORAGE countries.
SYSTEM, RECORDING MEDIA, EXTERNAL ˎˎAndroid, Google Play are trademarks of
STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA Google Inc.
OR STORAGE SYSTEMS. ˎˎWi-Fi, the Wi-Fi logo, and Wi-Fi PROTECTED
ˎˎSONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE SETUP are trademarks or registered
TERMINATION OR DISCONTINUATION OF trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.
ANY SERVICES RELATED TO THIS UNIT THAT ˎˎThe N Mark is a trademark or registered
MAY RESULT DUE TO CIRCUMSTANCES OF trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in the United
ANY KIND. States and in other countries.
ˎˎQR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc.

All other company names and product names

are registered trademarks or trademarks of
their respective owners. Trademarked items
are not indicated by ™ or ® symbols in this
document.